· project table of contents - 1 specifications for construction of 4th id cab uas hangar pn 81357...

SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION

W9128F-15-R-0047

UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS (UAS) HANGAR

PN 81357 (FY15)

FORT CARSON, COLORADO

VOLUME 3 OF 3 – DIVISIONS 26 - 41

APRIL 2015

US ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS

OMAHA DISTRICT

This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF

4TH ID CAB UAS HANGAR

PN 81357 (FY15)

FORT CARSON, COLORADO

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 10 00 SOLICITATION/CONTRACT FORM (SF 1442) 00 10 00 CONTRACT LINE ITEM PRICING SCHEDULE 00 21 00 INSTRUCTIONS, CONDITIONS AND NOTICES TO OFFERORS 00 22 00 PROPOSAL SUBMISSION AND EVALUATION 00 45 00 REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 73 00 SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00.24 OTHER ADMINISTRATIVE AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FC420E UTILITY OUTAGE GUIDANCE: FC REG 420-19 AND REQUEST FORM: FC FORM

420-E CO150006 GENERAL WAGE DECISION - BUILDING CO150012 GENERAL WAGE DECISION - HEAVY CO150018 GENERAL WAGE DECISION - HIGHWAY 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES E4025 ENG FORM 4025 TRANSMITTAL FORM REGISTER SUBMITTAL REGISTER 01 33 29 LEED (TM) DOCUMENTATION 01 33 29AT1 LEED ATTACHMENTS 01 33 29AT2 LEED 2009 PROJECT SCORECARD 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 26.05 24 (FEDERAL FACILITIES COLORADO) NPDES PERMIT REQUIREMENTS FOR STORM

WATER DISCHARGES FROM CONSTRUCTION SITES 01 41 26.05 24AT GOVERNMENT'S SWPPP 01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00.00 10AT SAMPLE CONTRACTORS QUALITY CONTROL REPORT (QCR) 01 45 00.10 10 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS) 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 01 57 20.00 10AT ATTACHMENTS TO SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 36.00 24 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION 01 78 39.00 24 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 01 78 39.00 24AT MODIFICATIONS AND TITLE BLOCK EXAMPLES 01 91 08.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING ENERGY SYSTEMS DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 DEMOLITION


DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING 03 15 00.00 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES 03 20 00.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE* 03 35 00.00 10 CONCRETE FINISHING 03 39 00.00 10 CONCRETE CURING 03 45 33 PRECAST PRESTRESSED STRUCTURAL CONCRETE* DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 MASONRY 04 74 01.10 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER AND TRIM DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 21 19 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 30 00 STEEL DECKS 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 41 16.00 10 LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK 06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 05 23 PRESSURE TESTING AN AIR BARRIER SYSTEM FOR AIR TIGHTNESS 07 21 13 BOARD AND BLOCK INSULATION 07 21 16 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION AND AIR AND VAPOR BARRIER 07 27 10.00 10 BUILDING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 07 27 26 SPRAY FOAM INSULATION (SPF) 07 42 16 METAL WALL PANELS 07 54 19 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 61 14.00 20 STEEL STANDING SEAM ROOFING 07 81 00 SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS


DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 34 16.10 STEEL SLIDING HANGAR DOORS 08 34 19.10 20 SERVICE COUNTER DOORS 08 34 59 VAULT DOORS AND DAY GATES 08 36 13 AL OVERHEAD DOORS 08 45 23 INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS WALL PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08 51 13 ALUMINUM BLAST-RESISTANT WINDOWS, DOORS, AND STOREFRONTS 08 51 13AT RESPONSE LIMITS FOR SPECIFIED LOADS 08 51 23 STEEL WINDOWS 08 62 000 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 62 45 INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS PANEL SKYLIGHTS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 81 00 GLAZING 08 91 00 METAL WALL LOUVERS DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE 09 22 00 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 30 13 CERAMIC AND PORCELAIN TILING 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 68 00 CARPETING 09 72 00 WALLCOVERINGS 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 10 00 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES 10 14 00.20 INTERIOR SIGNAGE 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTPARTITIONS 10 22 13 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10 26 13 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CABINETS 10 51 13 METAL TA-50, ARMS AND PERSONAL STORAGE LOCKERS 10 70 50 EXTERIOR SUN SHADE DEVICES 10 81 13 BIRD CONTROL DEVICES DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 21 00 WINDOW BLINDS 12 48 13.13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 23 PREFABRICATED POL/HAZARDOUS WMASTE/POL STORAGE BUILDINGS 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 24 00 HOLELESS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS


DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION 21 13 17.00 10 DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION 21 13 18.00 10 PREACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS, FIRE PROTECTION 21 13 25.00 HIGH EXPANSION FOAM (HI-EX) FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE 22 15 14.00 40 GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS, LOW PRESSURE DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 23 09 23 LONWORKS DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 11 25 FACILITY GAS PIPING 23 52 00 RADIANT SLAB HEATING SYSTEM 23 52 00.10 HEATING BOILERS 23 56 13 TRANSPIRED SOLAR WALL 23 64 10 WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE 23 64 26 COOLING AND HEATING WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 23 81 00.00 20 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 23 82 46.00 40 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 26 12 21 SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS AND SWITCHGEAR 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION WITH ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS 26 41 00 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 26 42 14.10 10 FORT CARSON CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE) 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 20.00 10 AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTING AND VISUAL NAVIGATION AIDS DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 14.00 10 CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 05 29.00 10 PROTECTIVE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (PDS) FOR SIPRNET COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM 27 51 16 RADIO AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 49 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM


DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 31 00 00AT FINAL GEOTECHNICAL REPORT DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT 32 11 10 DRAINAGE LAYER 32 11 16 SUBBASES FOR FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 11 16.01 SUBBASE AND RIGID PAVEMENT BASE COURSE FOR NON-AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS 32 11 23 AGGREGATE AND/OR GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 32 12 10 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS 32 12 15.13 HOT-MIX ASPHALT AIRFIELD PAVING 32 12 16 HOT-MIX ASPHALT FOR ROADS 32 13 11 CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR AIRFIELDS AND OTHER HEAVY-DUTY PAVEMENTS 32 13 11.10 CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR AIRFIELD HANGAR FLOORS 32 13 13.03 CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADWAYS AND SITE FACILITIES 32 13 73 COMPRESSION JOINT SEALS FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENTS 32 15 00 AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE 32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS 32 17 24.00 10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS FOR AIRFIELDS 32 17 24.00 11 PAVEMENT MARKINGS FOR ROADS AND PARKING LOTS 32 31 00.00 10 CHAIN LINK FENCE 32 92 19 SEEDING 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS 33 40 01 STORM DRAINAGE 33 51 15 NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP) DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION 34 73 13 MOORING AND GROUNDING POINTS FOR AIRCRAFT DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT 41 22 13.15 BRIDGE CRANES, OVERHEAD ELECTRIC, UNDER RUNNING -- End of Project Table of Contents --

UAS Hangar - FY15 - Fort Carson, Colorado FCW9

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION 1.5.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02) 1.5.2 Product Data (SD-03) 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6.1 Regulatory Requirements 1.6.2 Standard Products 1.6.2.1 Alternative Qualifications 1.6.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date 1.7 WARRANTY 1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE 1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES 1.11 WARNING SIGNS 1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.13 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING 3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING 3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

-- End of Section Table of Contents --

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 1


SECTION 26 00 00.00 20

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM D709 (2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5-7 2013) National Electrical Safety Code

IEEE C57.12.28 (2005; INT 3 2011) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity

IEEE C57.12.29 (2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2 2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3 2014) National Electrical Code

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to certain sections of Division 02, EXISTING CONDITIONS; Division 13, SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION; and Division 14, CONVEYING EQUIPMENT and Division 23, HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING. This section applies to all sections of Division 26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES, of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. This section has been incorporated into, and thus, does not apply to, and is not referenced in the following sections.

Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERSSection 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMSection 26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS AND SWITCHGEAR Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 2


Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMSection 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTIONSection 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)

1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE 100.

b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types.

c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and test methods.

1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 12.47 kV primary, three phase, three wire, 60 Hz and 240/120; 208/120 and 480/277 volts secondary, single and three phase, four wire. Final connections to the power distribution system at the existing load break vault shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer.

1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION

Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.

1.5.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

1.5.2 Product Data (SD-03)

Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.6.1 Regulatory Requirements

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 3


advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.6.2 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.

1.6.2.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.

1.6.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.7 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the following:

a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment.

b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.

c. Safety precautions.

d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.

e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment.

Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 4


fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

1.11 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.

a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for pad-mounted transformers and pad-mounted switches, provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background. Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.

1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.

1.13 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 5


equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.

-- End of Section --

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 6




SECTION 26 05 48.00 10

SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 General Requirements 1.2.2 Electrical Equipment 1.2.3 Electrical Systems 1.2.4 Conduits Requiring No Special Seismic Restraints 1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 1.3.1 Rigidly Mounted Equipment 1.4 SUBMITTALS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORTS 2.2 SWAY BRACING MATERIALS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SWAY BRACES FOR CONDUIT 3.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES IN BUILDINGS 3.2.1 Pendant Fixtures 3.2.2 Ceiling Attached Fixtures 3.2.2.1 Recessed Fluorescent Fixtures 3.2.2.2 Surface-Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures 3.2.3 Assembly Mounted on Outlet Box 3.2.4 Wall-Mounted Emergency Light Unit 3.2.5 Lateral Force


SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 1


SECTION 26 05 48.00 10

SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC 325 (2011) Steel Construction Manual


ASTM E580/E580M (2011b) Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

UFC 3-310-04 (2012) Seismic Design for Buildings

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 1598 (2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 General Requirements

The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this section shall be applied to the electrical equipment and systems listed below. Structural requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.

1.2.2 Electrical Equipment

Electrical equipment shall include the following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications:

Control Panels Air Handling UnitsPumps with Motors Light Fixtures TransformersSwitchboards (Floor Mounted)

1.2.3 Electrical Systems

The following electrical systems shall be installed as required on the

SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 2


drawings and other sections of these specifications and shall be seismically protected in accordance with this specification:

1.2.4 Conduits Requiring No Special Seismic Restraints

Seismic restraints may be omitted from electrical conduit less than 2-1/2 inches trade size. All other interior conduit, shall be seismically protected as specified.

1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

Submit detail drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed. Submittals shall be complete in detail, indicating thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction. Submit copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings. Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and shall verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from the brace.

1.3.1 Rigidly Mounted Equipment

Equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be constructed and assembled to withstand the seismic forces specified in UFC 3-310-04. Each item of rigid electrical equipment shall be entirely located and rigidly attached on one side only of a building expansion joint. Piping, electrical conduit, etc., which cross the expansion joint shall be provided with flexible joints that are capable of accommodating displacements equal to the full width of the joint in both orthogonal directions.

TransformersSwitchboardsFree Standing Electric Motors

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Lighting Fixtures in BuildingsEquipment Requirements

SD-03 Product Data

Lighting Fixtures in Buildings; G, DOEquipment Requirements; G, DOContractor Designed Bracing; G, DO

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORTS

Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to UL 1598.

SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 3


2.2 SWAY BRACING MATERIALS

Sway bracing materials (e.g. rods, plates, rope, angles, etc.) shall be as specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SWAY BRACES FOR CONDUIT

Conduit shall be braced as for an equivalent weight pipe in accordance with Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.

3.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES IN BUILDINGS

Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the following:

3.2.1 Pendant Fixtures

Pendant fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.

3.2.2 Ceiling Attached Fixtures

3.2.2.1 Recessed Fluorescent Fixtures

Recessed fluorescent individual or continuous-row mounted fixtures shall be supported by a seismic-resistant suspended ceiling support system built in accordance with ASTM E580/E580M. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04. Recessed lighting fixtures not over 56 pounds in weight may be supported by and attached directly to the ceiling system runners using screws or bolts, number and size as required by the seismic design. Fixture accessories, including louvers, diffusers, and lenses shall have lock or screw attachments.

3.2.2.2 Surface-Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures

Surface-mounted fluorescent individual or continuous-row fixtures shall be attached to a seismic-resistant ceiling support system built in accordance with ASTM E580/E580M. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.

3.2.3 Assembly Mounted on Outlet Box

A supporting assembly, that is intended to be mounted on an outlet box, shall be designed to accommodate mounting features on 4 inch boxes, plaster rings, and fixture studs.

3.2.4 Wall-Mounted Emergency Light Unit

Attachments for wall-mounted emergency light units shall be designed and secured for the worst expected seismic disturbance at the site.

3.2.5 Lateral Force

Structural requirements for light fixture bracing shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.


SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 4


SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 5




SECTION 26 08 00

APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING

08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Qualifications 1.4.2 Acceptance Tests and Inspections Reports 1.4.3 Acceptance Test and Inspections Procedure

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 3.2 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE 3.3 PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE


SECTION 26 08 00 Page 1


SECTION 26 08 00

APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems


Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance tests and inspections; G, PO

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications of organization, and lead engineering technician; G, PO

Acceptance test and inspections procedure; G, PO


1.4.1 Qualifications

Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization to provide inspection, testing, calibration, and adjustment of the electrical distribution system and generation equipment listed in paragraph entitled "Acceptance Tests and Inspections" herein. Organization shall be independent of the supplier, manufacturer, and installer of the equipment. The organization shall be a first tier subcontractor. No work required by this section of the specification shall be performed by a second tier subcontractor.

a. Submit name and qualifications of organization. Organization shall



have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials, devices, installations, and systems for a minimum of 5 years. The organization shall have a calibration program, and test instruments used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS.

b. Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineering technician performing the required testing services. Include a list of three comparable jobs performed by the technician with specific names and telephone numbers for reference. Testing, inspection, calibration, and adjustments shall be performed by an engineering technician, certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) with a minimum of 5 years' experience inspecting, testing, and calibrating electrical distribution and generation equipment, systems, and devices.

1.4.2 Acceptance Tests and Inspections Reports

Submit certified copies of inspection reports and test reports. Reports shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements, identify deficiencies, and recommend corrective action when appropriate. Type and neatly bind test reports to form a part of the final record. Submit test reports documenting the results of each test not more than 10 days after test is completed.

1.4.3 Acceptance Test and Inspections Procedure

Submit test procedure reports for each item of equipment to be field tested at least 45 days prior to planned testing date. Do not perform testing until after test procedure has been approved.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

Testing organization shall perform acceptance tests and inspections. Test methods, procedures, and test values shall be performed and evaluated in accordance with NETA ATS, the manufacturer's recommendations, and paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control" of each applicable specification section. Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS are not required unless otherwise specified. Equipment shall be placed in service only after completion of required tests and evaluation of the test results have been completed. Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of shop drawings, settings of adjustable devices, and other information necessary for an accurate test and inspection of the system prior to the performance of any final testing. Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 14 days in advance of when tests will be conducted by the testing organization. Perform acceptance tests and inspections on applicable equipment and systems specified in the following sections:

a. Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

b. Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

c. Section 26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS



3.2 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

Final acceptance of the system is contingent upon satisfactory completion of acceptance tests and inspections.

3.3 PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE

A representative of the approved testing organization shall be present when equipment tested by the organization is initially energized and placed in service.






SECTION 26 12 19.10

THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

02/12

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings 1.5.2 Regulatory Requirements 1.5.3 Standard Products 1.5.3.1 Alternative Qualifications 1.5.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date 1.6 MAINTENANCE 1.6.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data 1.7 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION 2.2 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 2.2.1 Compartments 2.2.1.1 High Voltage, Dead-Front 2.2.1.2 Low Voltage 2.2.2 Transformer 2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies 2.2.3 Insulating Liquid 2.2.3.1 Liquid-Filled Transformer Nameplates 2.2.4 Corrosion Protection 2.3 WARNING SIGNS 2.4 Arc Flash Warning Label 2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING 2.6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2.7.1 Transformer Test Schedule 2.7.2 Design Tests 2.7.3 Routine and Other Tests

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 GROUNDING 3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes 3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding 3.2.3 Connections 3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 1


3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING 3.5 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES 3.5.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.6.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests 3.6.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers 3.6.1.2 Grounding System 3.6.1.3 Surge Arresters, Medium- and High-Voltage 3.6.2 Follow-Up Verification




SECTION 26 12 19.10

THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS02/12

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI 318M (2011; Errata 2013) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete & Commentary


ASTM A240/A240M (2013c) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM C260/C260M (2010a) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM D117 (2010) Standard Guide for Sampling, Test Methods, Specifications and Guide for Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin

ASTM D1535 (2013) Specifying Color by the Munsell System

ASTM D3487 (2009) Standard Specification for Mineral Insulating Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus

ASTM D877/D877M (2013) Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes

ASTM D92 (2012b) Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester

ASTM D97 (2012) Pour Point of Petroleum Products

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide http://www.approvalguide.com/


IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative



Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

IEEE 386 (2006; INT 1 2011) Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V


IEEE C37.47 (2011) Standard for High Voltage Current-Limiting Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches

IEEE C57.12.00 (2010) Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers



IEEE C57.12.34 (2009) Standard for Requirements for Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers, 5 MVA and Smaller; High Voltage, 34.5 kV Nominal System Voltage and Below; Low Voltage, 15 kV Nominal System Voltage and Below

IEEE C57.12.90 (2010) Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers

IEEE C57.13 (2008; INT 2009) Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers

IEEE C57.98 (2011) Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests

IEEE C62.11 (2012) Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits (>1kV)




ANSI C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering

ANSI C12.7 (2005) Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets



NEMA LI 1 (1998; R 2011) Industrial Laminating Thermosetting Products

NEMA/ANSI C12.10 (2011) Physical Aspects of Watthour Meters - Safety Standards



ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT (OECD)

OECD Test 203 (1992) Fish Acute Toxicity Test

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 712-C-98-075 (1998) Fate, Transport and Transformation Test Guidelines - OPPTS 835.3100- "Aerobic Aquatic Biodegradation"

EPA 821-R-02-012 (2002) Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

10 CFR 431 Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment


UL 467 (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment


Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE 100.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Pad-mounted transformer drawings; G, DO

SD-03 Product Data



Pad-mounted transformers; G, DO

Submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each component, device, insulating fluid, and accessory provided with the transformer.

SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance checks and tests; G, DO

Submittal shall include acceptance criteria and limits for each test in accordance with NETA ATS "Test Values".

SD-07 Certificates

Transformer Efficiencies; G, DO

Submit certification, including supporting calculations, from the manufacturer indicating conformance with the paragraph entitled "Specified Transformer Efficiencies."

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Pad-mounted transformer design tests; G, DO

Pad-mounted transformerroutine and other tests; G, DO

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Transformer(s), Data Package 5; G, PO

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Transformer test schedule; G, DO

Submit report of test results as specified by paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."


1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings

Drawings shall indicate, but not be limited to the following:

a. An outline drawing, with front, top, and side views.

b. ANSI nameplate data.

c. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams.

d. One-line diagram, including switch(es).

e. Manufacturer's published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic paper) of the transformer high side fuses.




In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.





1.6 MAINTENANCE

1.6.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data

In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the actual transformer(s) provided:

a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted

b. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views

c. Prices for spare parts and supply list

d. Routine and field acceptance test reports

e. Fuse curves for primary fuses

g. Actual nameplate diagram

h. Date of purchase



1.7 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be pad-mounted transformers and related accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, and Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.2 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

IEEE C57.12.34, IEEE C57.12.28 and as specified herein.

2.2.1 Compartments

The high- and low-voltage compartments shall be separated by steel isolating barriers extending the full height and depth of the compartments. Compartment doors: hinged lift-off type with stop in open position and three-point latching.

2.2.1.1 High Voltage, Dead-Front

High-voltage compartment shall contain the incoming line, insulated high-voltage load-break connectors, bushing well inserts, six high-voltage bushing wells configured for loop feed application, load-break switch handle(s), access to oil-immersed bayonet fuses, tap changer handle, connector parking stands and ground pad.

a. Insulated high-voltage load-break connectors: IEEE 386, rated 15 kV, 95 kV BIL. Current rating: 200 amperes rms continuous. Short time rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a time duration of 0.17 seconds. Connector shall have a steel reinforced hook-stick eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material.

b. Bushing well inserts and feed-thru inserts: IEEE 386, 200 amperes, 15 kV Class. Provide a bushing well insert for each bushing well unless indicated otherwise.

c. Load-break switch

Loop feed sectionalizer switches: Provide three, two-position, oil-immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and sectionalizing. Each switch shall be rated at 15 kV, 95 kV BIL, with a continuous current rating and load-break rating of 200 amperes, and a make-and-latch rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handles in the high-voltage compartment. Operation of switches shall be as follows:



ARRANGEMENT NO.

DESCRIPTION OF SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

SWITCH POSITION

LINE A SW. LINE B SW XFMR. SW

OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

1 Line A connected to Line B and both lines connected to transformer

X X X

2 Transformer connected to Line A only

X X X

3 Transformer connected to Line Bonly

X X X

4 Transformer open and loop closed

X X X

5 Transformer open and loop open

X X X

d. Provide bayonet type, oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. Bayonet fuse links shall sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order to provide thermal protection to the transformer. Coordinate transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse. In order to eliminate or minimize oil spills, the bayonet fuse assembly shall include an oil retention valve inside the housing which closes when the fuse holder is removed and an external drip shield. Warning shall be conspicuously displayed within the high-voltage compartment cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless the load-break switch is in the open position and the tank pressure has been released.

Bayonet fuse assembly: 150 kV BIL.

Oil-immersed current-limiting fuses: IEEE C37.47; 50,000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified.

e e. Provide oil-immersed, weak link expulsion fuses in series with oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. Coordinate transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse.


f. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11, rated 10 kV, fully shielded, dead-front, metal-oxide-varistor, elbow type with resistance-graded gap. Provide three arresters for loop feed circuits.

g. Parking stands: Provide a parking stand near each bushing.



2.2.1.2 Low Voltage

Low-voltage compartment shall contain low-voltage bushings with NEMA spade terminals, accessories, metering, stainless steel or laser-etched anodized aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate, and ground pad.

a. Accessories shall include drain valve with sampler device, fill plug, pressure relief device, liquid level gage, pressure-vacuum gage, and dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator.

2.2.2 Transformer

a. Less-flammable liquid-insulated, two winding, 60 hertz, 65 degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average ambient, self-cooled type.

b. Transformer shall be rated as indicated on drawings.

c. Tap changer shall be externally operated, manual type for changing tap setting when the transformer is de-energized. Provide four 2.5 percent full capacity taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage. Tap changers shall clearly indicate which tap setting is in use.

d. Minimum tested percent impedance at 85 degrees C shall not be less than the following values:

2.50 for units rated 75kVA and below2.87 for units rated 112.5kVA to 300kVA4.03 for 500kVA rated units5.32 for units rated 750kVA and above

e. Audible sound levels shall comply with the following:

kVA DECIBELS(MAX

75 51

112.5 55

150 55

225 55

300 55

500 56

750 57

1000 58

1500 60



2000 61

2500 62

g. Transformer shall include lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under base. The transformer base construction shall be suitable for using rollers or skidding in any direction. Provide transformer top with an access handhole. Transformer shall have its kVA rating conspicuously displayed on its enclosure. The transformer shall have an insulated low-voltage neutral bushing with NEMA spade terminal, and with removable ground strap.

h. Transformer shall be rated to provide kVA indicated at 5900 ft. above sea level.

2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies

Transformer efficiency shall follow Deparetment of Energy 2010 Transformer Efficiency Standards.

2.2.3 Insulating Liquid

a. Less-flammable transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM APP GUIDE for less-flammable liquids having a fire point not less than 300 degrees C tested per ASTM D92 and a dielectric strength not less than 33 kV tested per ASTM D877/D877M. Provide identification of transformer as "non-PCB" and "manufacturer's name and type of fluid" on the nameplate.

The fluid shall be a biodegradable electrical insulating and cooling liquid classified by UL and approved by FM as "less flammable" fluids. The fluid shall meet the following fluid properties:

1. Pour point: ASTM D97, less than -15 degree C

2. Aquatic biodegradation: EPA 712-C-98-075, 100 percent

3. Trout toxicity: OECD Test 203, zero mortality of EPA 821-R-02-012, pass

2.2.3.1 Liquid-Filled Transformer Nameplates

Distribution transformers shall be provided with nameplate information in accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and as modified or supplemented by this section.

2.2.4 Corrosion Protection

Paint entire transformer assembly Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green. Paint coating system shall comply with IEEE C57.12.28 regardless of base, cabinet, and tank material. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.

2.3 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of pad-mounted transformers having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.

a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28, such as for pad-mounted transformers,



provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background. Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.

2.4 Arc Flash Warning Label

Provide warning label for the enclosure of pad-mounted transformers. Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the high voltage compartment door warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards.

2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING

UL 467. Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts shall be 4000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength unless specified otherwise. All concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.7.1 Transformer Test Schedule

a. Test Instrument Calibration

1. The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

3. Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

5. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

6. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following:

(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument.

(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met.



2.7.2 Design Tests

IEEE C57.12.00 states that "design tests are made only on representative apparatus to substantiate the ratings assigned to all other apparatus of basically the same design." Submit design test reports (complete with test data, explanations, formulas, and results), in the same submittal package as the catalog data and drawings for each of the specified transformer(s). Design tests shall have been performed in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90 prior to the award of this contract.

a. Tests shall be certified and signed by a registered professional engineer.

b. Temperature rise: "Basically the same design" for the temperature rise test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), the same kVA, the same cooling type (ONAN), the same temperature rise rating, and the same insulating liquid as the transformer specified.

c. Lightning impulse: "Basically the same design" for the lightning impulse dielectric test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same BIL, the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), and a tap changer, if specified. Design lightning impulse tests shall include the primary windings only of that transformer.

1. IEEE C57.12.90, paragraph 10.3 entitled "Lightning Impulse Test Procedures," and IEEE C57.98.

2. State test voltage levels.

3. Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of digitized waveforms with test report.

d. Lifting and moving devices: "Basically the same design" requirement for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of the specified transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.12.34.

e. Pressure: "Basically the same design" for the pressure test means a pad-mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the tank volume of the transformer specified.

f. Short circuit: "Basically the same design" for the short circuit test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same kVA as the transformer specified.

2.7.3 Routine and Other Tests

IEEE C57.12.00. Routine and other tests shall be performed in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90 by the manufacturer on each of the actual transformer(s) prepared for this project to ensure that the design performance is maintained in production. Submit test reports, by serial number and receive approval before delivery of equipment to the project site. Required tests and testing sequence shall be as follows:

a. Phase relation

b. Ratio



c. No-load losses (NLL) and excitation current

d. Load losses (LL) and impedance voltage

e. Dielectric

1. Impulse

2. Applied voltage

3. Induced voltage

f. Leak

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

3.2 GROUNDING

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms.

3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes

Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding

Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to the ground loop as indicated. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is required to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" shall apply.

3.2.3 Connections

Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall be installed as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 467, except as indicated or specified otherwise.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Install and connect pad-mounted transformers furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.




Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Mount transformer on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 8 inches thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9 mesh, placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab. Slab shall be placed on a 6 inch thick, well-compacted gravel base. Top of concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage. Edges above grade shall have 1/2 inch chamfer. Slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.

Stub up conduits, with bushings, 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas.

3.5.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cast-in-place concrete work shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.6.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.

3.6.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers

a. Visual and mechanical inspection

1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or cracked insulators and leaks.

3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

4. Verify the presence of PCB content labeling.

5. Verify the bushings and transformer interiors are clean.

6. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

7. Verify correct liquid level in tanks and bushings.

8. Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed transformers.



9. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer.

10. Verify de-energized tap changer position is left as specified.

11. Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters.

b. Electrical tests

1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter.

2. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral after energization and prior to loading.

3. Perform insulation-resistance tests, winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. Calculate polarization index.

4. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions.

5. Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all windings in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s published data.

6. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on each bushing equipped with a power-factor/capacitance tap. In the absence of a power-factor/capacitance tap, perform hot-collar tests.

7. Measure the resistance of each high-voltage winding in each de-energized tap-changer position. Measure the resistance of each low-voltage winding in each de-energized tap-changer position, if applicable.

8. Remove and test a sample of insulating liquid for the following: Dielectric breakdown voltage, Acid neutralization number, Specific gravity, Interfacial tension, Color, Visual Condition, Water in insulating liquids (Required on 25 kV or higher voltages and on all silicone-filled units.), and Power factor or dissipation factor.

9. Perform dissolved-gas analysis (DGA) on a sample of insulating liquid.

3.6.1.2 Grounding System


1. Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.

b. Electrical tests

1. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground



testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.

2. Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.

3.6.1.3 Surge Arresters, Medium- and High-Voltage



2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

4. Verify the arresters are clean.


6. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to a ground bus or ground electrode.

b. Electrical tests

1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.

2. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal-to-ground.

3. Test grounding connection.

3.6.2 Follow-Up Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing.






SECTION 26 12 21

SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

11/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings 1.5.2 Regulatory Requirements 1.5.3 Standard Products 1.5.3.1 Alternative Qualifications 1.5.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date 1.6 MAINTENANCE 1.6.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION 2.2 SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS (DEAD-FRONT) 2.2.1 Compartment Construction 2.2.1.1 High Voltage 2.2.1.2 Low Voltage 2.2.2 Transformer 2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies 2.3 INSULATING LIQUID 2.4 LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMER NAMEPLATES 2.5 CORROSION PROTECTION 2.6 WARNING SIGNS 2.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING 2.8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2.9.1 Transformer Test Schedule 2.9.2 Test Instrument Calibration 2.9.3 Design Tests 2.9.4 Routine and Other Tests

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 GROUNDING 3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes 3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding 3.2.3 Connections 3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES 3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING



3.5 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES 3.5.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.6.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests 3.6.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers 3.6.1.2 Grounding System 3.6.1.3 Surge Arresters, Medium- and High-Voltage 3.6.2 Follow-Up Verification




SECTION 26 12 21

SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS11/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI 318 (2011; Errata 1 2011; Errata 2 2012; Errata 3-4 2013) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary

ACI 318M (2011; Errata 2013) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete & Commentary


ASTM A240/A240M (2014) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM C260/C260M (2010a) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM D117 (2010) Standard Guide for Sampling, Test Methods, Specifications and Guide for Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin


ASTM D3487 (2009) Standard Specification for Mineral Insulating Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus

ASTM D877/D877M (2013) Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes

ASTM D92 (2012b) Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester

ASTM D97 (2012) Pour Point of Petroleum Products

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide



http://www.approvalguide.com/


IEEE 386 (2006; INT 1 2011) Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V


IEEE C37.47 (2011) Standard for High Voltage Current-Limiting Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches


IEEE C57.12.25 (1990) Standard for Transformers - Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Single-Phase Distribution Transformers With Separable Insulated High-Voltage Connectors; High Voltage, 34,500 Grdy/ 19,920 Volts and Below; Low Voltage, 240/120 Volts; 167 kVa and Smaller Requirements

IEEE C57.12.28 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity


IEEE C57.12.80 (2010) Standard Terminology for Power and Distribution Transformers

IEEE C57.12.90 (2010) Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers


IEEE C57.98 (2011) Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests


IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary of Terms & Definitions











ORGANIZATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT (OECD)

OECD Test 203 (1992) Fish Acute Toxicity Test


EPA 712-C-98-075 (1998) Fate, Transport and Transformation Test Guidelines - OPPTS 835.3100- "Aerobic Aquatic Biodegradation"

EPA 821-R-02-012 (2002) Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms


10 CFR 431 Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment




Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in conformance to Section



01 33 29SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Pad-mounted transformer drawings; G, DO

SD-03 Product Data

Single-phase pad-mounted transformers (dead-front); G, DO

Include manufacturer's information for each component, device, insulating fluid, and accessory provided with the transformer.

SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance checks and tests; G, DO

Submit reports, including acceptance criteria and limits for each test in accordance with NETA ATS "Test Values".

SD-07 Certificates

Transformer efficiencies; G, DO

Submit certification, including supporting calculations, from the manufacturer indicating conformance with the paragraph entitled "Specified Transformer Efficiencies."


Pad-mounted transformer design tests; G, DO

Pad-mounted transformer routine and other tests; G, DO


Transformer(s), Data Package 5; G, DO

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.


Transformer test schedule; G, DO

Submit report of test results as specified by paragraph entitled "Source Quality Control."


1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings

Include the following as a minimum:

a. An outline drawing, including front, top, and side views.

b. ANSI nameplate data.



c. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams.

d. One-line diagram, including switch(es) and fuses.

e. Manufacturer's published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic paper) of the transformer high side fuse.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" or "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship, and:

a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.




Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

1.6.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data

In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the actual transformer(s) provided:

a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted.

b. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views.



c. Prices for spare parts and supply list.

d. Routine and field acceptance test reports.

e. Fuse curves for primary fuses.

g. Actual nameplate diagram.

h. Date of purchase.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products and materials not considered to be pad-mounted transformers and related accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, and Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.2 SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS (DEAD-FRONT)

IEEE C57.12.25, IEEE C57.12.28 and as specified herein.

2.2.1 Compartment Construction

a. Single compartment: Provide Type 1 combination high- and low-voltage compartment, clam shell style, with lockable (having pad-locking provisions) hinged cover and single-point latching. Type 1 is defined by IEEE C57.12.25.

2.2.1.1 High Voltage

High-voltage portion contains: the incoming line, insulated high-voltage load-break connectors, bushing well inserts, two high-voltage bushing wells configured for loop feed application, 200 Amp load-break switch handle, access to oil-immersed fuses, tap changer handle, connector parking stands and ground pad.

a. Insulated high-voltage load-break connectors: IEEE 386, rated 15 kV, 95 kV BIL. Current rating: 200 amperes rms continuous. Short time rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a time duration of 0.17 seconds. Provide connectors and inserts from the same manufacturer. Provide connectors with a steel reinforced hook-stick eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material.

b. Bushing well inserts and feed-through inserts: IEEE 386, 200 amperes, 15 kV class. Provide a bushing well insert for each bushing well unless indicated otherwise.

c. Provide bayonet oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. The bayonet fuse links sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order to provide thermal protection to the transformer. Coordinate transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse. Include an oil retention valve inside the bayonet assembly housing, which closes when the fuse holder is removed, and an external drip shield to minimize oil spills. Display a warning label adjacent to the bayonet fuse(s) cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless the transformer has been



de-energized and the tank pressure has been released.

Bayonet fuse assembly: 150 kV BIL.


d. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11, rated 10 kV, fully shielded, dead-front metal-oxide-varistor, elbow type with resistance-graded gap suitable for plugging into inserts as indicated.

2.2.1.2 Low Voltage

Low-voltage portion contains: low-voltage bushings with NEMA spade terminals, accessories, metering, stainless steel or laser-etched anodized aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate, and ground pad.

a. Include the following accessories: drain valve, fill plug, pressure relief device and a liquid level gauge, oil temperature gauge, and pressure vacuum gauge.

2.2.2 Transformer

a. Less-flammable liquid-insulated, two winding, 60 hertz, 65 degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average ambient, self-cooled type.

b. Transformer shall be rated as indicated on drawings.c. Tap changer: externally operated, manual type for changing tap setting

when the transformer is de-energized. Provide four 2.5 percent full capacity taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage. Indicate which tap setting is in use, clearly visible when the compartment is opened.

d. Minimum tested percent impedance at 85 degrees C:

2.50 for units rated 25 kVA and below2.87 for units rated 37.5 kVA to 100 kVA4.03 for 167 kVA rated units

e. Comply with the following audible sound level limits:

kVA DECIBELS(MAX)

10 48

15 48

25 48

37.5 48

50 48

75 51

100 51

167 55

g. Include:



1. Lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under base, with base construction suitable for using rollers or skidding in any direction.

2. An insulated low-voltage neutral bushing with NEMA spade terminal, and with removable ground strap.

4. kVA rating conspicuously displayed on its enclosure.

h. Transformer shall be rated to provide kVA indicated at 5900 ft. above sea level.

2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies

Transformer efficiency shall follow Deparetment of Energy 2010 Transformer Efficiency Standards.

2.3 INSULATING LIQUID

a. Less-flammable transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM APP GUIDE for less-flammable liquids having a fire point not less than 300 degrees C tested per ASTM D92 and a dielectric strength not less than 33 kV tested per ASTM D877/D877M. Provide identification of transformer as "non-PCB" and "manufacturer's name and type of fluid" on the nameplate.

Provide a fluid that is a biodegradable, electrical insulating, and cooling liquid classified by UL and approved by FM as "less flammable" with the following properties:

1. Pour point: ASTM D97, less than -15 degree C.

2. Aquatic biodegradation: EPA 712-C-98-075, 100 percent.

3. Trout toxicity: OECD Test 203, zero mortality of EPA 821-R-02-012, pass.

2.4 LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMER NAMEPLATES

Provide nameplate information in accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and as modified or supplemented by this section.

2.5 CORROSION PROTECTION

Paint entire transformer assembly Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green, with paint coating system complying with IEEE C57.12.28 regardless of base, cabinet, and tank material. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.

2.6 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of pad-mounted transformers having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.

a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning signs (decals, Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal) on the outside



of the high voltage compartment door(s), with nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. Include the word "DANGER" in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters on a white background.

Provide arc flash warning label for the enclosure of pad-mounted transformers. Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the high voltage compartment side warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards.

2.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING

UL 467. Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Provide concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts rated for 4000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength unless specified otherwise. Conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.


2.9.1 Transformer Test Schedule

2.9.2 Test Instrument Calibration

a. Provide a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

b. Accuracy: Traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

c. Instrument calibration frequency schedule: less than or equal to 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

d. Dated calibration labels: visible on all test equipment.

e. Calibrating standard: higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

f. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following:

1. Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument.

2. Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met.

2.9.3 Design Tests

IEEE C57.12.00, and IEEE C57.12.90. Section 5.1.2 in IEEE C57.12.80 states



that "design tests are made only on representative apparatus of basically the same design." Submit design test reports (complete with test data, explanations, formulas, and results), in the same submittal package as the catalog data and drawings for each of the specified transformer(s), with design tests performed prior to the award of this contract.

a. Tests: certified and signed by a registered professional engineer.

b. Temperature rise: "Basically the same design" for the temperature rise test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), the same kVA, the same cooling type (ONAN), the same temperature rise rating, and the same insulating liquid as the transformer specified.

c. Lightning impulse: "Basically the same design" for the lightning impulse dielectric test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same BIL, the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), and a tap changer, if specified. Design lightning impulse tests includes the primary windings only of that transformer.

1. IEEE C57.12.90, paragraph 10.3 entitled "Lightning Impulse Test Procedures," and IEEE C57.98.

2. State test voltage levels.

3. Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of digitized waveforms with test report.

d. Lifting and moving devices: "Basically the same design" requirement for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of the specified transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.12.25.

e. Pressure: "Basically the same design" for the pressure test means a pad-mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the tank volume of the transformer specified.

f. Short circuit: "Basically the same design" for the short circuit test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same kVA as the transformer specified.

2.9.4 Routine and Other Tests

IEEE C57.12.00. Routine and other tests: performed by the manufacturer on each of the actual transformer(s) prepared for this project to ensure that the design performance is maintained in production. Submit test reports, by serial number and receive approval before delivery of equipment to the project site. Required tests include:

a. Polarity.

b. Ratio.

c. No-load losses (NLL) and excitation current.

d. Load losses (LL) and impedance voltage.

e. Dielectric.



1. Impulse.

2. Applied voltage.

3. Induced voltage.

f. Leak.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

3.2 GROUNDING

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except provide grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 25 ohms.


Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding

Provide a ground ring around the transformer with 1/0 AWG bare copper. Provide two ground rods in the ground ring at opposite corners. Install the ground rods at least 10 feetapart from each other.Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to the ground loop as indicated. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is required to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" applies.

3.2.3 Connections

Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. Install exothermic welds and compression connectors as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.




Install and connect pad-mounted transformers furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.






Mount transformer on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least 8 inches thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 inches - W2.9 by W2.9 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab.

b. Place slab on a 6 inch thick, well-compacted gravel base.

c. Install slab such that top of concrete slab is approximately 4 inches above the finished grade with gradual slope for drainage.

d. Provide edges above grade with 1/2 inch chamfer.

e. Provide slab of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.

Stub up conduits, with bushings, 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas.

3.5.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Provide cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with the requirements of Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.



Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.

3.6.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers

a. Visual and mechanical inspection.

1. Compare equipment nameplate information with specifications and approved shop drawings.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or cracked insulators and leaks.

3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

4. Verify the presence of PCB content labeling.

5. Verify the bushings and transformer interiors are clean.


7. Verify correct liquid level in tanks.

8. Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed



transformers.

9. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer.

10. Verify correct equipment grounding.

11. Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters.

b. Electrical tests.

1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter.

2. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral after energization and prior to loading.

3. Perform insulation-resistance tests, winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. Calculate polarization index.

4. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions.

5. Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all windings in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s published data.

6. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on each bushing equipped with a power-factor/capacitance tap. In the absence of a power-factor/capacitance tap, perform hot-collar tests.

7. Measure the resistance of each high-voltage winding in each de-energized tap-changer position. Measure the resistance of each low-voltage winding in each de-energized tap-changer position, if applicable.

8. Remove and test a sample of insulating liquid for the following: Dielectric breakdown voltage, Acid neutralization number, Specific gravity, Interfacial tension, Color, Visual Condition, Water in insulating liquids (Required on 25 kV or higher voltages and on all silicone-filled units.), and Power factor or dissipation factor.

9. Perform dissolved-gas analysis (DGA) on a sample of insulating liquid.





1. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather,



not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. Use an instrument equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.


3.6.1.3 Surge Arresters, Medium- and High-Voltage




3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

4. Verify the arresters are clean.


6. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to a ground bus or ground electrode.



2. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal-to-ground.

3. Test grounding connection.


Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, notify the Contracting Officer 5 working days in advance of the dates and times of checking and testing.






SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

02/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Fuses 1.4.2 Regulatory Requirements 1.4.3 Standard Products 1.4.3.1 Alternative Qualifications 1.4.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date 1.5 MAINTENANCE 1.5.1 Electrical Systems 1.6 WARRANTY 1.7 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit 2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit 2.2.1.2 Rigid Aluminum Conduit 2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT) 2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit 2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit 2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel 2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit 2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC 2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT 2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 2.3 SURFACE RACEWAY 2.3.1 Surface Metal Raceway 2.4 CABLE TRAYS 2.4.1 Basket-Type Cable Trays 2.4.2 Ladder-Type Cable Trays 2.5 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS 2.5.1 Floor Outlet Boxes 2.5.2 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System 2.6 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES 2.7 WIRES AND CABLES 2.7.1 Conductors 2.7.1.1 Minimum Conductor Sizes



2.7.2 Color Coding 2.7.2.1 Ground and Neutral Conductors 2.7.2.2 Ungrounded Conductors 2.7.3 Insulation 2.7.4 Bonding Conductors 2.7.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) 2.7.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications 2.7.5 Service Entrance Cables 2.7.6 Metal-Clad Cable 2.8 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS 2.9 DEVICE PLATES 2.10 SWITCHES 2.10.1 Toggle Switches 2.10.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle 2.10.3 Disconnect Switches 2.11 FUSES 2.11.1 Fuseholders 2.11.2 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R) 2.11.3 Cartridge Fuses, High-Interrupting Capacity, Current Limiting

Type (Classes J, L, and CC) 2.11.4 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class T) 2.12 RECEPTACLES 2.12.1 Switched Duplex Receptacles 2.12.2 Weatherproof Receptacles 2.12.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 2.12.4 Special Purpose Receptacles 2.13 PANELBOARDS 2.13.1 Enclosure 2.13.2 Panelboard Buses 2.13.3 Circuit Breakers 2.13.3.1 Multipole Breakers 2.13.3.2 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment 2.14 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2.15 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP) 2.16 TRANSFORMERS 2.16.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency 2.17 MOTORS 2.17.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors 2.17.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors 2.17.3 Motor Sizes 2.17.4 Wiring and Conduit 2.18 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 2.18.1 Control Wiring 2.18.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks 2.18.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks 2.18.3 Control Circuits 2.18.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers 2.18.5 Multiple-Speed Motor Controllers and Reversible Motor

Controllers 2.18.6 Pushbutton Stations 2.18.7 Pilot and Indicating Lights 2.19 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS 2.20 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 2.21 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM 2.22 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT 2.22.1 Ground Rods 2.22.2 Ground Bus 2.22.3 Telecommunications and CATV Grounding Busbar 2.23 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS



2.24 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE 2.25 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES 2.26 WARNING SIGNS 2.27 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS 2.28 WIREWAYS 2.29 METERING 2.30 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2.31 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH 2.32 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2.32.1 Transformer Factory Tests 2.33 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Underground Service 3.1.2 Hazardous Locations 3.1.3 Service Entrance Identification 3.1.3.1 Labels 3.1.4 Wiring Methods 3.1.4.1 Pull Wire 3.1.5 Conduit Installation 3.1.5.1 Restrictions Applicable to Aluminum Conduit 3.1.5.2 Restrictions Applicable to EMT 3.1.5.3 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit 3.1.5.4 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit 3.1.5.5 Underground Conduit 3.1.5.6 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts 3.1.5.7 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs 3.1.5.8 Conduit Through Floor Slabs 3.1.5.9 Stub-Ups 3.1.5.10 Conduit Support 3.1.5.11 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs 3.1.5.12 Locknuts and Bushings 3.1.5.13 Flexible Connections 3.1.5.14 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway 3.1.6 Cable Tray Installation 3.1.7 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports 3.1.7.1 Boxes 3.1.7.2 Pull Boxes 3.1.8 Mounting Heights 3.1.9 Conductor Identification 3.1.9.1 Marking Strips 3.1.10 Splices 3.1.11 Covers and Device Plates 3.1.12 Electrical Penetrations 3.1.13 Grounding and Bonding 3.1.13.1 Ground Rods 3.1.13.2 Grounding Connections 3.1.13.3 Ground Bus 3.1.13.4 Resistance 3.1.13.5 Telecommunications System 3.1.14 Equipment Connections 3.1.15 Elevator 3.1.16 Watthour Meters 3.1.17 Surge Protective Devices 3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING 3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING 3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING



3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation 3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test 3.5.3 Transformer Tests 3.5.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test 3.5.5 Grounding System Test 3.5.6 Watthour Meter




SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM02/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM B1 (2013) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

ASTM B8 (2011) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft




IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System







ANSI C80.1 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

ANSI C80.3 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

ANSI C80.5 (2005) American National Standard for



Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit


NEMA BU 1.1 (2010) General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 V or Less

NEMA FU 1 (2012) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2008; E 2010) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements

NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 V

NEMA ICS 3 (2005; R 2010) Medium-Voltage Controllers Rated 2001 to 7200 V AC

NEMA ICS 4 (2010) Terminal Blocks

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2011) Enclosures

NEMA KS 1 (2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V Maximum)

NEMA MG 1 (2011; Errata 2012) Motors and Generators

NEMA MG 10 (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors

NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors

NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications

NEMA TC 14 (2002) Standard for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings

NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

NEMA TC 3 (2013) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA TP 1 (2002) Guide for Determining Energy



Efficiency for Distribution Transformers

NEMA VE 1 (2009) Standard for Metal Cable Tray Systems

NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2005; R 2010) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 (2012) Wiring Devices Dimensions Specifications

NEMA Z535.4 (2011) American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels



NFPA 70E (2012; Errata 2012) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

NFPA 780 (2014) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

TIA-568-C.1 (2009; Add 2 2011; Add 1 2012) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

TIA-569 (2012c; Addendum 1 2013; Errata 2013) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises


29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)


UL 1 (2005; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1063 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Machine-Tool Wires and Cables

UL 1203 (2013) UL Standard for Safety Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations



UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel

UL 1283 (2005; Reprint Feb 2013) Electromagnetic Interference Filters

UL 1449 (2006; Reprint Sep 2013) Surge Protective Devices

UL 1561 (2011; Reprint Sep 2012) Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers

UL 1569 (1999; Reprint Jan 2012) Standard for Metal-Clad Cables

UL 1660 (2004; Reprint Apr 2013) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 1699 (2006; Reprint Nov 2013) Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

UL 198M (2003; Reprint Feb 2013) Standard for Mine-Duty Fuses

UL 20 (2010; Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap Switches

UL 2043 (2013) Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces

UL 360 (2013; Reprint May 2013) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

UL 4 (2004; Reprint Oct 2013) Standard for Armored Cable

UL 4248-1 (2007; Reprint Oct 2013) UL Standard for Safety Fuseholders - Part 1: General Requirements

UL 4248-12 (2007; Reprint Dec 2012) UL Standard for Safety Fuseholders - Part 12: Class R

UL 44 (2010) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables


UL 486A-486B (2013; Reprint Dec 2013) Wire Connectors

UL 486C (2013; Reprint Dec 2013) Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 489 (2013) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures



UL 498 (2012; Reprint Aug 2013) Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 5 (2011) Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings

UL 50 (2007; Reprint Apr 2012) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations

UL 506 (2008; Reprint Oct 2013) Specialty Transformers

UL 508 (1999; Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial Control Equipment

UL 510 (2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514A (2013) Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B (2012) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings

UL 514C (1996; Reprint Nov 2011) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

UL 5A (2003; Reprint Jun 2013) Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings

UL 6 (2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel

UL 651 (2011; Reprint Mar 2012) Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings

UL 67 (2009; Reprint Jan 2013) Standard for Panelboards

UL 674 (2011; Reprint Jul 2013) Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 6A (2008; Reprint May 2013) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel

UL 719 (2006; Reprint Apr 2013) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables

UL 797 (2007; Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel

UL 817 (2001; Reprint Feb 2014) Standard for Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords

UL 83 (2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables



UL 845 (2005; Reprint Jul 2011) Motor Control Centers

UL 854 (2004; Reprint Sep 2011) Standard for Service-Entrance Cables

UL 857 (2009; Reprint Dec 2011) Busways

UL 869A (2006) Reference Standard for Service Equipment

UL 870 (2008; Reprint Feb 2013) Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings

UL 943 (2006; Reprint Jun 2012) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

UL 984 (1996; Reprint Sep 2005) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressors

1.2 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE 100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Panelboards; G, DO

Transformers; G, DO

Cable trays; G, DO

Wireways; G, PO

Marking strips drawings; G, PO

SD-03 Product Data

Receptacles; G, DO

Circuit breakers; G, DO

Switches; G, DO

Transformers; G, DO

Enclosed circuit breakers; G, DO



Motor controllers; G, DO

Combination motor controllers; G, DO

Metering; G, DO

CATV outlets; G, DO

Telecommunications Grounding Busbar; G, DO

Surge protective devices; G, DO

Include performance and characteristic curves.

SD-06 Test Reports

600-volt wiring test; G, PO

Grounding system test; G, PO

Transformer tests; G, PO

Ground-fault receptacle test; G, PO

SD-07 Certificates

Fuses


Transformer factory tests; G, PO


Electrical Systems, Data Package 5; G, PO

Metering, Data Package 5; G, PO

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.


1.4.1 Fuses

Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.




Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship and:

a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.




Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Electrical Systems

Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building. Include the following:

a. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.

b. Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC, covered elsewhere).

c. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment for the current project.

1.6 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items supported by service organizations that are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.7 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

Provide seismic details conforming to Section 26 05 48.00 10, SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

As a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70 for all materials, equipment, and devices.

2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

Conform to the following:

2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit

2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit

ANSI C80.1, UL 6.

2.2.1.2 Rigid Aluminum Conduit

ANSI C80.5, UL 6A.

2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

PVC Type EPC-40 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.

2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)

UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.

2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)

UL 797, ANSI C80.3.

2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit

NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick).

2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1.

2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel

UL 360.

2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 514B. Ferrous fittings: cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B.

2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC

Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.

2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT

Steelcompression type.



2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.

2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 1660.

2.3 SURFACE RACEWAY

2.3.1 Surface Metal Raceway

UL 5, two-piece painted steel, totally enclosed, snap-cover type.

2.4 CABLE TRAYS

NEMA VE 1. Provide the following:

a. Cable trays: form a wireway system, with a nominal4 inch depth.

b. Cable trays: constructed of aluminum.

c. Cable trays: include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware.

d. Edges, fittings, and hardware: finished free from burrs and sharp edges.

e. Fittings: ensure not less than load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and have manufacturer's minimum standard radius.

2.4.1 Basket-Type Cable Trays

Provide width as indicated on the communications drawings and 4 inch depth with maximum wire mesh spacing of 2 by 4 inch.

2.4.2 Ladder-Type Cable Trays

Provide size as indicated on the communications drawings with maximum rung spacing of 9 inches.

2.5 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS

UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if nonmetallic.

2.5.1 Floor Outlet Boxes

Provide the following:

a. Boxes: nonadjustable and concrete tight.

b. Each outlet: consisting of cast-metal body with threaded openings, for conduits, brass flange ring, and cover plate with 1 inch threaded plug.

c. Telecommunications outlets: consisting of flush, aluminum or stainless steel housing with a receptacle as specified and 3/4 inch top opening.

d. Receptacle outlets: consisting of flush aluminum or stainless steel



housing with duplex-type receptacle as specified herein.

e. Provide gaskets where necessary to ensure watertight installation.

2.5.2 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System


a. Standard type 4 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep.

b. Outlet boxes for wall-mounted telecommunications outlets: 4 by 2 1/8 by 2 1/8 inches deep.

c. Depth of boxes: large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor bend radii.

2.6 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES

Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet steel.

2.7 WIRES AND CABLES

Provide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site.

2.7.1 Conductors


a. Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise.

b. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter: stranded.

c. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter: solid.

d. Conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3: stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise.

e. All conductors: copper.2.7.1.1 Minimum Conductor Sizes

Provide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following:

a. Branch circuits: No. 12 AWG.

b. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits: No. 14 AWG.

c. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits: No. 16 AWG.

d. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits: No. 22 AWG.

2.7.2 Color Coding

Provide color coding for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors.



2.7.2.1 Ground and Neutral Conductors

Provide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows:

a. Grounding conductors: Green.

b. Neutral conductors: White.

c. Exception, where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals color coding: white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each.

2.7.2.2 Ungrounded Conductors

Provide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems as follows:

a. 208/120 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red

(3) Phase C - blue

b. 480/277 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - brown

(2) Phase B - orange

(3) Phase C - yellow

c. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red

2.7.3 Insulation

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, provide power and lighting wires rated for 600-volts, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83, except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and signal circuits: Type TW or TF, conforming to UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.

2.7.4 Bonding Conductors

ASTM B1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter; ASTM B8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger diameter.

2.7.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)

Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA-607 with No. 6 AWG minimum size, and sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG.



2.7.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications

Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the electrical service ground in accordance with TIA-607. Size the bonding conductor for telecommunications the same as the TBB.

2.7.5 Service Entrance Cables

Service Entrance (SE) and Underground Service Entrance (USE) Cables, UL 854.

2.7.6 Metal-Clad Cable

UL 1569; NFPA 70, Type MC cable.

2.8 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes. Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires: insulated, pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.

2.9 DEVICE PLATES


a. UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed.

b. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls: satin finish stainless steel, minimum 0.03 inch thick.

c. Plates on finished walls: satin finish stainless steel, minimum 0.03 inch thick.

d. Screws: machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate.

e. Sectional type device plates are not be permitted.

f. Plates installed in wet locations: gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations."

2.10 SWITCHES

2.10.1 Toggle Switches

NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, three-way, and four-way, totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Include the following:

a. Handles: grey thermoplastic.

b. Wiring terminals: screw-type, side-wired.

c. Contacts: silver-cadmium and contact arm - one-piece copper alloy.

d. Switches: rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current rating and number of poles indicated.



2.10.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle

NEMA WD 1. Provide the following:

a. Pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part of the switch's handle.

b. Pilot light color: red and illuminate whenever the switch is closed or "on".

c. Pilot lighted switch: rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as indicated.

d. The circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light.

2.10.3 Disconnect Switches

NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches. Utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses for fused switches, unless indicated otherwise. Provide horsepower rated for switches serving as the motor-disconnect means. Provide switches in NEMA enclosure type as indicated on the drawings per NEMA ICS 6.

2.11 FUSES

NEMA FU 1. Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch. Coordinate time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers for proper operation. Submit coordination data for approval. Provide fuses with a voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.

2.11.1 Fuseholders

Provide in accordance with UL 4248-1.

2.11.2 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R)

UL 198M, Class RK-1 or RK-5. Provide only Class R associated fuseholders in accordance with UL 4248-12.

2.11.3 Cartridge Fuses, High-Interrupting Capacity, Current Limiting Type (Classes J, L, and CC)

UL 198M, Class J for zero to 600 amperes, Class L for 601 to 6,000 amperes, and Class CC for zero to 30 amperes.

2.11.4 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class T)

UL 198M, Class T for zero to 1,200 amperes, 300 volts; and zero to 800 amperes, 600 volts.

2.12 RECEPTACLES


a. UL 498, hard use (also designated heavy-duty), grounding-type.



b. Ratings and configurations: as indicated.

c. Bodies: grey as per NEMA WD 1.

d. Face and body: thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap.

e. Dimensional requirements: per NEMA WD 6.

f. Screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement.

g. Grounding pole connected to mounting strap.

h. The receptacle: containing triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.

2.12.1 Switched Duplex Receptacles

Provide separate terminals for each ungrounded pole. Top receptacle: switched when installed.

2.12.2 Weatherproof Receptacles

Provide receptacles, UL listed for use in "wet locations". Include cast metal box with gasketed, hinged, lockable and weatherproof while-in-use, die-cast metal/aluminum cover plate.

2.12.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Provide device capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter devices. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.

2.12.4 Special Purpose Receptacles

Provide in ratings indicated on the drawings.

2.13 PANELBOARDS

Provide panelboards in accordance with the following:

a. UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated.

b. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means: additionally conform to UL 869A.

c. Panelboards: circuit breaker-equipped.

d. Designed such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL.

e. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings.

f. Main breaker: "separately" mounted "above" or "below" branch breakers.



g. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers.

h. Directories: indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard.

i. Directories: indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP).

j. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering.

k. Panelboards: listed and labeled for their intended use.

l. Panelboard nameplates: provided in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.

2.13.1 Enclosure

Provide panelboard enclosure in accordance with the following:

a. UL 50.

b. Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush-mounted: hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

c. Cabinets: painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING.

d. Outdoor cabinets: NEMA 3R raintight with conduit hubs welded to the cabinet.

e. Front edges of cabinets: form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front.

f. All cabinets: fabricated such that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet deviates from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch.

g. Holes: provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a 1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface.

h. Flush doors: mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed.

i. Each door: fitted with a combined catch and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock.

j. Keys: two provided with each lock, with all locks keyed alike.

k. Finished-head cap screws: provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.

2.13.2 Panelboard Buses

Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining,



drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.

2.13.3 Circuit Breakers

UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted. Breaker terminals: UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Where indicated on the drawings, provide circuit breakers with shunt trip devices. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.

2.13.3.1 Multipole Breakers

Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.

2.13.3.2 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment

Provide circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual) marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.

2.14 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as indicated.

2.15 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP)

Motor short-circuit protectors, also called motor circuit protectors (MCPs): UL 508 and UL 489, and provided as shown. Provide MSCPs that consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker used only in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection. Rate MSCPs in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

2.16 TRANSFORMERS

Provide transformers in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA ST 20, general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled, ventilated types in Mechanical/Electrical Rooms and sealed types in the Hanger Bay.

b. Provide transformers in NEMA 1 enclosures in Mechanical/Electrical Rooms and NEMA 4 enclosures in the Hanger Bay.

c. Transformer insulation system:

(1) 220 degrees C insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and greater, with temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.



(2) 180 degrees C insulation for transformers rated 10 kVA and less, with temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.

d. Transformer of 115 degrees C temperature rise: capable of carrying continuously 115 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation rating.

2.16.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency

Transformers, indicated and specified with: 480V primary, 80 degrees C or 115 degrees C temperature rise, kVA ratings of 37.5 to 100 for single phase or 30 to 500 for three phase, energy efficient type. Minimum efficiency, based on factory test results: not be less than NEMA Class 1 efficiency as defined by NEMA TP 1.

2.17 MOTORS

Provide motors in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA MG 1.

b. Hermetic-type sealed motor compressors: Also comply with UL 984.

c. Provide the size in terms of HP, or kVA, or full-load current, or a combination of these characteristics, and other characteristics, of each motor as indicated or specified.

d. Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters.

e. Rate motors for operation on 208-volt, 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for operation on 480-volt, 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 460 volts.

f. Use motors designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating.

g. Unless otherwise indicated, use continuous duty type motors if rated 1 HP and above.

h. Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated.

2.17.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors

Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors: high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.17.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors

Select polyphase motors based on high efficiency characteristics relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. In addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors must meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors in



accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load efficiency ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.17.3 Motor Sizes

Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make adjustments to wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided.

2.17.4 Wiring and Conduit

Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit: conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring: provided under, and conform to, the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment.

2.18 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

Provide motor controllers in accordance with the following:

a. UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2.

b. Provide controllers with thermal overload protection in each phase, and one spare normally open auxiliary contact, and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact.

c. When used with pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, provide a hand/off/automatic selector switch with the controller.

d. Connections to selector switch: wired such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand" position.

e. Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices: connected in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions.

f. Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device: made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram.

g. Provide a disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the open position, for the motor that is located in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location. As an alternative, provide a motor controller disconnect, capable of being locked in the open position, to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if it is in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location.

h. Overload protective devices: provide adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case.



i. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker: interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in "off" position.

2.18.1 Control Wiring

Provide control wiring in accordance with the following:

a. All control wire: stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with 600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44, or Type MTW meeting UL 1063, and passing the VW-1 flame tests included in those standards.

b. Hinge wire: Class K stranding.

c. Current transformer secondary leads: not smaller than No. 10 AWG.

d. Control wire minimum size: No. 14 AWG.

e. Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and below: the same type as control wiring with No. 12 AWG minimum size.

f. Provide wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal points.

2.18.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks

Provide control circuit terminal blocks in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA ICS 4.

b. Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring: molded or fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts.

c. Provide terminals with removable binding, fillister or washer head screw type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts.

d. Terminals: not less than No. 10 in size with sufficient length and space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors to each terminal.

e. Terminal arrangement: subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer with not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent, whichever is greater, provided on each block or group of blocks.

f. Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks are acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type.

g. Submit data showing that any proposed alternate will accommodate the specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying capacity, and are constructed to assure positive contact between current-carrying parts.

2.18.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks

a. Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks:



furnished for all current transformer secondary leads with provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without first opening any circuit. Terminal blocks: comply with the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above.

b. Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of adequate capacity: provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits, except those for feeder tap units. Provide terminals of either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type, having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be terminated. For conductors rated more than 50 amperes, provide screws with hexagonal heads. Conducting parts between connected terminals must have adequate contact surface and cross-section to operate without overheating. Provide eEach connected terminal with the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color.

2.18.3 Control Circuits

Control circuits: maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from control transformer in same enclosure. Transformers: conform to UL 506, as applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits: provide primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on primary side. Provide fuses in each ungrounded primary feeder. Provide one fused secondary lead with the other lead grounded.

2.18.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers

NEMA ICS 6.

2.18.5 Multiple-Speed Motor Controllers and Reversible Motor Controllers

Across-the-line-type, electrically and mechanically interlocked. Multiple-speed controllers: include compelling relays and multiple-button, station-type with pilot lights for each speed.

2.18.6 Pushbutton Stations

Provide with "start/stop" momentary contacts having one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts, and red lights to indicate when motor is running. Stations: heavy duty, oil-tight design.

2.18.7 Pilot and Indicating Lights

Provide LED cluster lamps.

2.19 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS

Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Comply with requirements of Division 23, "Mechanical" for mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment.

2.20 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

Provide system of telecommunications wire-supporting structures (pathway),



including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires wireways, cable trays, and other accessories for telecommunications outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA-569 and as specified herein. Additional telecommunications requirements are specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

2.21 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM

Additional CATV requirements are specified in Section 27 05 14.00 10, CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.22 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

2.22.1 Ground Rods

UL 467. Ground rods: copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of 3/4 inch and minimum length 10 feet. Sectional ground rods are permitted.

2.22.2 Ground Bus

Copper ground bus: provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated.

2.22.3 Telecommunications and CATV Grounding Busbar

Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor installation in accordance with TIA-607. Busbars: plated for reduced contact resistance. If not plated, clean the busbar prior to fastening the conductors to the busbar and apply an anti-oxidant to the contact area to control corrosion and reduce contact resistance. Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility and a (TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms. The telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB): sized in accordance with the immediate application requirements and with consideration of future growth. Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following:

a. Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard sized lugs,

b. Minimum dimensions of 0.25 in thick by 4 in wide for the TMGB and 2 in wide for TGBs with length as indicated;

c. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2.23 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

Electrical materials, equipment, and devices for installation in hazardous locations, as defined by NFPA 70: specifically approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Boundaries and classifications of hazardous locations: as indicated. Equipment in hazardous locations: comply with UL 1203 for electrical equipment and industrial controls and UL 674 for motors.


Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be



acceptable.


Provide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following:

a. ASTM D709.

b. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings.

c. Each nameplate inscription: identify the function and, when applicable, the position.

d. Nameplates: melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.

e. Surface: matte finish. Corners: square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core.

f. Minimum size of nameplates: one by 2.5 inches.

g. Lettering size and style: a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

2.26 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards and industrial control panels that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer. Provide marking that is clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.

2.27 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

2.28 WIREWAYS

UL 870. Material: steel epoxy painted 16 gauge for heights and depths up to 6 by 6 inches, and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 inches. Provide in length required for the application with screw-cover NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.

2.29 METERING

ANSI C12.1. Provide a self-contained, electronic digital programmable indoor watthour meter. Meter: either programmed at the factory or programmed in the field. Turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Coordinate meter to system requirements.

a. Design: Provide watthour meter designed for use on a single-phase, three-wire, 240/120 and for use on three-phase, four-wire, 208/120 and 480/277 volt systems. Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware



for Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).

b. Class: 200; Form: 2S, accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent; Finish: Class II.

c. Cover: Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and unauthorized removal.

d. Kilowatt-hour Register: five digit electronic programmable type.

e. Demand Register:

(1) Provide solid state.

(2) Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter face.

(3) Demand interval length: programmed for 15 minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

2.30 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Provide parallel type surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with UL 1449 at the service entrance switchboard (MSB). Provide surge protectors in switchboard (MSB). Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the load side of a dedicated circuit breaker.

Provide the following modes of protection:

FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS- Phase to phase ( L-L ) Each phase to neutral ( L-N ) Neutral to ground ( N-G ) Phase to ground ( L-G )SPDs at the service entrance: provide with a minimum surge current rating of 80,000 amperes for L-L mode minimum and 40,000 amperes for other modes (L-N, L-G, and N-G).


Provide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein.

b. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures: thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting.

c. Exterior surfaces: free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections.

d. Interior surfaces: receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.

e. Exterior surfaces: primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish.



f. Equipment located indoors: ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located outdoors: ANSI Light Gray.

g. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.


2.32.1 Transformer Factory Tests

Submittal: include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each transformer and also provide the results of NEMA "design" and "prototype" tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to those specified.

2.33 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION

Prepare analyses as specified in Section 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION WITH ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces: conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Underground Service

Underground service conductors and associated conduit: continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.

3.1.2 Hazardous Locations

Perform work in hazardous locations, as defined by NFPA 70, in strict accordance with NFPA 70 for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Provide conduit and cable seals where required by NFPA 70. Provide conduit with tapered threads.

3.1.3 Service Entrance Identification

Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures: labeled and identified as such.

3.1.3.1 Labels

Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, label each enclosure, new and existing, as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices. Label, at minimum: indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure: provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.



3.1.4 Wiring Methods

Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise. Grounding conductor: separate from electrical system neutral conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Shared neutral, or multi-wire branch circuits, are not permitted with arc-fault circuit interrupters. Minimum conduit size: 1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings: made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts, with metal conduit extending through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches. Firestop conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.4.1 Pull Wire

Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire: plastic having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

3.1.5 Conduit Installation

Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project.

3.1.5.1 Restrictions Applicable to Aluminum Conduit

a. Do not install underground or encase in concrete or masonry.

b. Do not use brass or bronze fittings.

3.1.5.2 Restrictions Applicable to EMT

a. Do not install underground.

b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials.

c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT.

d. Do not use in hazardous areas.

e. Do not use outdoors.

3.1.5.3 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit

a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80

(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage, including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, and other such areas.



(2) Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas.

(3) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or fire-rated floors.

(4) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.

3.1.5.4 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit

Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS.

3.1.5.5 Underground Conduit

Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40. Convert nonmetallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before rising through floor slab. Plastic coating: extend minimum 6 inches above floor.

3.1.5.6 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts

Rigid metal conduit or IMC only.

3.1.5.7 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs

Conduit run under floor slab: located a minimum of 12 inches below the vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier.

3.1.5.8 Conduit Through Floor Slabs

Where conduits rise through floor slabs, do not allow curved portion of bends to be visible above finished slab.

3.1.5.9 Stub-Ups

Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.

3.1.5.10 Conduit Support

Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, threaded rod conduit hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to fasteners. Provide vibration resistant and shock-resistant fasteners attached to concrete ceiling. Do not cut main reinforcing bars for any holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than3/4 inch in concrete joints. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling



support system. Conduit and box systems: supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Do not share supporting means between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Coordinate installationwith above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.5.11 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs

Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of obstructions.

3.1.5.12 Locknuts and Bushings

Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Provide locknuts with sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.

3.1.5.13 Flexible Connections

Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size: 1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

3.1.5.14 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway

Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA-569.

a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work area to the telecommunications room: installed and cabling length requirements in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Size conduits, wireways, and cable trays in accordance with TIA-569 and as indicated.

b. Backbone Pathway: Telecommunication pathways from the telecommunications entrance facility to telecommunications rooms, and, telecommunications equipment rooms (backbone cabling): installed in accordance with TIA-569. Size conduits, wireways, and cable trays for telecommunications risers in accordance with TIA-569 and as indicated.



3.1.6 Cable Tray Installation

Install and ground in accordance with NFPA 70. In addition, install and ground telecommunications cable tray in accordance with TIA-569, and TIA-607. Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support in accordance with manufacturer recommendations but at not more than 6 foot intervals. Coat contact surfaces of aluminum connections with an antioxidant compound prior to assembly. Adjacent cable tray sections: bonded together by connector plates of an identical type as the cable tray sections. For grounding of cable tray system provide No. 2 AWG bare copper wire throughout cable tray system, and bond to each section, except use No. 1/0 aluminum wire if cable tray is aluminum. Terminate cable trays 10 inches from both sides of smoke and fire partitions. Install conductors run through smoke and fire partitions in 4 inch rigid steel conduits with grounding bushings, extending 12 inches beyond each side of partitions. Seal conduit on both ends to maintain smoke and fire ratings of partitions. Firestop penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.7 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports

Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways: cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways, or when installed in hazardous areas and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations: sheet steel, except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit, and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic conduit system. Provide each box with volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures: minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls: square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; provide readily removable fixturesfor access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.

3.1.7.1 Boxes

Boxes for use with raceway systems: minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets: minimum 4 inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters



outlet. Telecommunications outlets: a minimum of 4 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls.

3.1.7.2 Pull Boxes

Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.

3.1.8 Mounting Heights

Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, motor controller and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches 48 inches above finished floor. Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Wall-mounted telecommunications outlets: mounted at height 60 inches above finished floor. Mount other devices as indicated. Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets in non-hazardous areas to the center of the device or the outlet. Measure mounting heights of receptacle outlet boxes in the hazardous area to the bottom of the outlet box.

3.1.9 Conductor Identification

Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter, provide color coding by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, provide color coding by plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves. Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with Section 23 09 23 LONWORKS DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEMS. Provide telecommunications system conductor identification as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.

3.1.9.1 Marking Strips

Provide marking strips in accordance with the following:

a. Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to each terminal block, for wire designations.

b. Use permanent ink for the wire numbers.

c. Provide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides, or provide two marking strips with each block.

d. Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers.

e. Assign a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 to each device to which a connection is made. Mark each device terminal to which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams.

f. The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring



diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard practice; however, provide additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits for the Government's wire designations.

g. Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any rearrangement of points required.

3.1.10 Splices

Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation.

3.1.11 Covers and Device Plates

Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations.

3.1.12 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.13 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems. Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee. If flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70. Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building. Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential. This includes lightning protection, electrical service, telecommunications system grounds, as well as underground metallic piping systems. Make interconnection to the gas line on the customer's side of the meter. Use main size lightning conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system. In addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA-607. Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.

3.1.13.1 Ground Rods

Provide cone pointed ground rods. Measure the resistance to ground using



the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Do not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions for the maximum resistance of a driven ground. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add.

3.1.13.2 Grounding Connections

Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, excepting specifically those connections for which access for periodic testing is required, by exothermic weld or compression connector.

a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.

b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Provide tools and dies as recommended by the manufacturer. Use an embossing die code or other standard method to provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

3.1.13.3 Ground Bus

Provide a copper ground bus in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment: effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus. Bond the ground bus to both the entrance ground, and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor. Make connections and splices of the brazed, welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type, except use pressure connectors or bolted connections for connections to removable equipment.

3.1.13.4 Resistance

Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system: do not exceed10 ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds10 ohms, contact Contracting Officer for further instructions.

3.1.13.5 Telecommunications System

Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:

a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility. Install the TMGB as close to the electrical service entrance grounding connection as practicable. Provide a telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms. Install the TGB as close to the telecommunications room panelboard as practicable, when equipped. Where a panelboard for telecommunications equipment is not installed in the telecommunications room, locate the TGB near the backbone cabling and associated terminations. In addition, locate the TGB to provide for the shortest and straightest routing of the grounding conductors. Where a panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located within the same room or space as a TGB, bond that panelboard’s alternating current equipment ground (ACEG) bus (when equipped) or the panelboard enclosure to the TGB. Install telecommunications grounding busbars to



maintain clearances as required by NFPA 70 and insulated from its support. A minimum of 2 inches separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar and adjust the mounting height to accommodate overhead or underfloor cable routing.

b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and readily accessible grounding connection of the electrical service. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 3 feet in length, bond the conductors to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6 AWG conductor, minimum. Provide a telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB) that originates at the TMGB extends throughout the building using the telecommunications backbone pathways, and connects to the TGBs in all telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms. Install the TBB conductors such that they are protected from physical and mechanical damage. The TBB conductors should be installed without splices and routed in the shortest possible straight-line path. Make the bonding conductor between a TBB and a TGB continuous. Where splices are necessary, the number of splices should be a minimum. Make the splices accessible and located in telecommunications spaces. Connect joined segments of a TBB using exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or equivalent. Install all joints to be adequately supported and protected from damage. Whenever two or more TBBs are used within a multistory building, bond the TBBs together with a grounding equalizer (GE) at the top floor and at a minimum of every third floor in between. Do not connect the TBB and GE to the pathway ground, except at the TMGB or the TGB.

c. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications grounding connections to the TMGB or TGB: utilize listed compression two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one hole non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type connections. Bond all metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located within the same room or space as the TMGB or TGB to the TMGB or TGB respectively. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily accessible within the room; bond each TMGB and TGB to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible, bond the metal frame to the TGB or TMGB with a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. When practicable because of shorter distances and, where horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members, the TGB may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building must be listed for the intended purpose.

3.1.14 Equipment Connections

Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications and are provided under the section specifying the associated equipment.



3.1.15 Elevator

Provide circuit to line terminals of elevator controller, and disconnect switch on line side of controller, outlet for control power, outlet receptacle and work light at midheight of elevator shaft, and work light and outlet receptacle in elevator pit.

3.1.16 Watthour Meters

ANSI C12.1.

3.1.17 Surge Protective Devices

Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source, keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible. Maximum allowed lead length is 3 feet.



3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.


Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting: as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Where field painting of enclosures for panelboards, load centers or the like is specified to match adjacent surfaces, to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria, provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance to manufacturer's instructions.


Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test.

3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation

Operate each device subject to manual operation at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.

3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test

Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum resistance: 250,000 ohms.



3.5.3 Transformer Tests

Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the Inspection and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600 volt and below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm.

3.5.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test

Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.

3.5.5 Grounding System Test

Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made.

3.5.6 Watthour Meter


(1) Examine for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections.

(2) Verify that meter type, scales, and connections are in accordance with approved shop drawings.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Determine accuracy of meter.

(2) Calibrate watthour meters to one-half percent.

(3) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where applicable.






SECTION 26 23 00

SWITCHBOARDS

07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Switchboard Product Data 1.5.2 Switchboard Drawings 1.5.3 Regulatory Requirements 1.5.4 Standard Products 1.5.4.1 Alternative Qualifications 1.5.4.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date 1.6 MAINTENANCE 1.6.1 Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Data 1.6.2 Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.6.3 Spare Parts 1.7 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION 2.2 SWITCHBOARD 2.2.1 Ratings 2.2.2 Construction 2.2.2.1 Enclosure 2.2.2.2 Bus Bars 2.2.2.3 Main Section 2.2.2.4 Distribution Sections 2.2.2.5 Auxiliary Sections 2.2.2.6 Handles 2.2.3 Protective Device 2.2.3.1 Insulated-Case Breaker 2.2.3.2 Molded-Case Circuit Breaker 2.2.4 Electronic Trip Units 2.2.5 Digital Meters 2.2.5.1 Digital Meters 2.2.6 Current Transformers 2.2.7 Meter Fusing 2.2.8 Terminal Boards 2.2.9 Wire Marking 2.3 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE 2.4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2.5.1 Equipment Test Schedule 2.5.2 Switchboard Design Tests



2.5.2.1 Design Tests 2.5.3 Switchboard Production Tests 2.6 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 GROUNDING 3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes 3.2.2 Equipment Grounding 3.2.3 Connections 3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES 3.3.1 Switchboard 3.3.2 Meters and Instrument Transformers 3.3.3 Field Applied Painting 3.3.4 Galvanizing Repair 3.3.5 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting 3.4 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES 3.4.1 Exterior Location 3.4.2 Interior Location 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests 3.5.1.1 Switchboard Assemblies 3.5.1.2 Circuit Breakers 3.5.1.3 Current Transformers 3.5.1.4 Metering and Instrumentation 3.5.1.5 Grounding System 3.5.2 Follow-Up Verification




SECTION 26 23 00

SWITCHBOARDS07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI C12.15 (1990) Solid-State Demand Registers for Electromechanical Watthour Meters

ANSI C39.1 (1981; R 1992) Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments


ASTM A123/A123M (2013) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A153/A153M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A167 (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A653/A653M (2013) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A780/A780M (2009) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM D149 (2009; R 2013) Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies








IEEE C12.16 (1991) Solid-State Electricity Meters


IEEE C37.13 (2008; INT 1 2009; AMD 1 2012) Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures

IEEE C37.20.1 (2002; INT 1 2005; AMD A 2005; AMD B 2006; R 2007) Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit-Breaker Switchgear

IEEE C37.90.1 (2012) Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus








ANSI/NEMA PB 2.1 (2013) General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 V or Less

NEMA C12.4 (1984; R 2011) Registers - Mechanical Demand




NEMA LI 1 (1998; R 2011) Industrial Laminating Thermosetting Products

NEMA PB 2 (2011) Deadfront Distribution Switchboards

NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications





UL 1558 (1999; Reprint Apr 2010) Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear


UL 4248 (2007) UL Standard for Safety Fuseholders



UL 891 (2005; Reprint Oct 2012) Switchboards


Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING and 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION WITH ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Switchboard Drawings; G, DO



Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

SD-03 Product Data

Switchboard; G, DO

SD-06 Test Reports

Switchboard design tests; G, PO

Switchboard production tests; G, PO

Acceptance checks and tests; G, PO


Switchboard Operation and Maintenance, Data Package 5; G, PO


Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G, PO

Equipment Test Schedule; G, PO

Request for Settings; G, DO


1.5.1 Switchboard Product Data

Each submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each component, device and accessory provided with the switchboard including:

a. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings

b. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic paper) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device.

1.5.2 Switchboard Drawings

Drawings shall include, but are not limited to the following:

a. One-line diagram including breakers, fuses, current transformers, and meters

b. Outline drawings including front elevation, section views, footprint,



and overall dimensions

c. Bus configuration including dimensions and ampere ratings of bus bars

d. Markings and NEMA nameplate data, including fuse information (manufacturer's name, catalog number, and ratings)

e. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings

f. Three-line diagrams and elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified, and indicating prewired interconnections between items of equipment and the interconnection between the items.

g. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic paper) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device. These shall be used by the designer of record to provide breaker settings that will ensure protection and coordination are achieved.











1.6 MAINTENANCE

1.6.1 Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Data

Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

1.6.2 Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Manuals shall be assembled and bound securely in durable, hard covered, water resistant binders. The manuals shall be assembled and indexed in the following order with a table of contents. The contents of the assembled operation and maintenance manuals shall be as follows:

a. Manufacturer's O&M information required by the paragraph entitled "SD-10, Operation and Maintenance Data".

b. Catalog data required by the paragraph entitled, "SD-03, Product Data".

c. Drawings required by the paragraph entitled, "SD-02, Shop Drawings".

d. Prices for spare parts and supply list.

e. Information on metering

f. Design test reports

g. Production test reports

1.6.3 Spare Parts

Spare parts shall be furnished as specified below. All spare parts shall be of the same material and workmanship, shall meet the same requirements, and shall be interchangeable with the corresponding original parts furnished.

a. 2 - Fuses of each type and size.

1.7 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products and materials not considered to be switchboards and related accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.2 SWITCHBOARD

NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.



2.2.1 Ratings

The voltage rating of the switchboard shall be 480Y/277 volts AC, 4-wire, 3 phase. The continuous current rating of the main bus shall be 1200 amperes as indicated. The short-circuit current rating shall be 35,000 rms symmetrical amperes (minimum) as indicated. The switchboard shall be UL listed and labeled as service entrance equipment.

2.2.2 Construction

Switchboard shall consist of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly and shall be rear aligned. All circuit breakers shall be front accessible. Rear aligned switchboards shall have front accessible load connections. Compartmentalized switchboards shall have vertical insulating barriers between the front device section, the main bus section, and the cable compartment with full front to rear vertical insulating barriers between adjacent sections. Where indicated, "space for future" or "space" shall mean to include bus, device supports, and connections. Provide insulating barriers in accordance with NEMA LI 1, Type GPO-3, 0.25 inch minimum thickness. Apply moisture resistant coating to all rough-cut edges of barriers. Switchboard shall be completely factory engineered and assembled, including protective devices and equipment indicated with necessary interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring.

2.2.2.1 Enclosure

The switchboard enclosure shall be a NEMA ICS 6 Type 1. Enclosure shall be bolted together with removable bolt-on side and rear covers. Front doors shall be provided with padlockable vault handles with a three point catch. Bases, frames and channels of enclosure shall be corrosion resistant and shall be fabricated of ASTM A167 type 304 or 304L stainless steel or galvanized steel. Base shall include any part of enclosure that is within 3 inches of concrete pad. Galvanized steel shall be ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A653/A653M G90 coating, and ASTM A153/A153M, as applicable. Galvanize after fabrication where practicable. Paint enclosure, including bases, ASTM D1535 light gray No. 61 or No. 49. Paint coating system shall comply with IEEE C57.12.28 for galvanized steel and IEEE C57.12.29 for stainless steel.

2.2.2.2 Bus Bars

Bus bars shall be copper with silver-plated contact surfaces. Plating shall be a minimum of 0.0002 inch thick. Make bus connections and joints with hardened steel bolts. The through-bus shall be rated at the full ampacity of the main throughout the switchboard. Provide minimum one-quarter by 2 inch copper ground bus secured to each vertical section along the entire length of the switchboard. The neutral bus shall be rated 100 percent of the main bus continuous current rating.

2.2.2.3 Main Section

The main section shall consist of an individually mounted insulated-case circuit breaker.

2.2.2.4 Distribution Sections

The distribution sections shall consist ofindividually mounted, molded-case circuit breakers as indicated.



2.2.2.5 Auxiliary Sections

Auxiliary sections shall consist of indicated instruments, metering equipment, transformer, and current transformer compartments as indicated.

2.2.2.6 Handles

Handles for individually mounted devices shall be of the same design and method of external operation. Label handles prominently to indicate device ampere rating, color coded for device type. Identify ON-OFF indication by handle position and by prominent marking.

2.2.3 Protective Device

Provide main and branch protective devices as indicated.

2.2.3.1 Insulated-Case Breaker

UL listed, 100 percent rated, stationarymanually operated, low voltage, insulated-case circuit breaker, with a short-circuit current rating of 35,000 rms symmetrical amperes (minimum) at 480 volts. Breaker frame size shall be as indicated on sheet EP601.

2.2.3.2 Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

UL 489. UL listed and labeled, 100 percent rated, stationary manually operated, low voltage, molded-case circuit breaker, with a short-circuit current rating of35,000 rms symmetrical amperes (minimum) at 480 volts. Breaker frame sizes shall be as indicated on sheet EP601. Series rated circuit breakers are unacceptable.

2.2.4 Electronic Trip Units

Equip main breaker with a solid-state tripping system consisting of three current sensors and a microprocessor-based trip unit that will provide true rms sensing adjustable time-current circuit protection. The ampere rating of the current sensors shall be the same as the breaker frame rating. The trip unit ampere rating shall be as indicated on sheet EP601. Ground fault protection shall be as indicated. Reference also Section 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION WITH ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY for Solid-State Trip Elements requirements (para. 2.8.6).

2.2.5 Digital Meters

2.2.5.1 Digital Meters

IEEE C37.90.1 for surge withstand. Provide true rms, plus/minus one percent accuracy, programmable, microprocessor-based meter enclosed in sealed cases with a simultaneous three line, twelve value LED display. Meters shall have 0.56 inch, minimum, LEDs. Watthour meter shall have 0.56 inch, minimum, LEDs. The meters shall accept input from standard 5A secondary instrument transformers and direct voltage monitoring range to 600 volts, phase to phase. Programming shall be via a front panel display and a communication interface with a computer. Password secured programming shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory. Digital communications shall be Modbus RTU protocol via a RS485 serial port and an independently addressable RS485 serial port. The meter shall calculate and store average max/min demand values for all readings based on a user selectable sliding window averaging period. The meter shall have programmable hi/low set



limits with two Form C dry contact relays when exceeding alarm conditions. Meter shall provide Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) measurement to the thirty-first order.

a. Multi-Function Meter: Meter shall simultaneously display a selected phase to neutral voltage, phase to phase voltage, percent phase to neutral voltage THD, percent phase to phase voltage THD; a selected phase current, neutral current, percent phase current THD, percent neutral current; selected total PF, kW, KVA, kVAR, FREQ, kVAh, kWh. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over/under voltage, over/under KVA, over/under frequency, over/under selected PF/kVAR, voltage phase reversal, voltage imbalance, reverse power, over percent THD. The meter shall have a Form C KYZ pulse output relay.

b. Power Meter: Meter shall simultaneously display Watts, VARs, and selected KVA/PF. Detected alarm conditions include over/under KVA, over/under PF, over/under VARs, over/under reverse power.

c. Volt Meter: Meter shall be selectable between simultaneous display of the three phases of phase to neutral voltages and simultaneous display of the three phases of the phase to phase voltages. Detected alarm conditions include over/under voltage, over/under voltage imbalance, over percent THD.

d. Ammeter: Meter shall simultaneously display phase A, B, and C currents. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over percent THD.

e. Digital Watthour Meter: Meter shall have a single selectable display for watts, total kilowatt hours (kWh) and watt demand (Wd). The meter shall have a Form C KYZ pulse output relay.

2.2.6 Current Transformers

IEEE C57.13. Transformers shall be single ratio, 60 hertz, 1200 to 5-ampere ratio, 1.5 rating factor, with a metering accuracy class of 0.3 through B-0.9.

2.2.7 Meter Fusing

Provide a fuse block mounted in the metering compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to voltage sensing meters. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

2.2.8 Terminal Boards

Provide with engraved plastic terminal strips and screw type terminals for external wiring between components and for internal wiring between removable assemblies. Terminal boards associated with current transformers shall be short-circuiting type. Terminate conductors for current transformers with ring-tongue lugs. Terminal board identification shall be identical in similar units. External wiring shall be color coded consistently for similar terminal boards.

2.2.9 Wire Marking

Mark control and metering conductors at each end. Provide factory-installed, white, plastic tubing, heat stamped with black block type letters on factory-installed wiring. On field-installed wiring,



provide white, preprinted, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sleeves, heat stamped with black block type letters. Each sleeve shall contain a single letter or number, shall be elliptically shaped to securely grip the wire, and shall be keyed in such a manner to ensure alignment with adjacent sleeves. Provide specific wire markings using the appropriate combination of individual sleeves. Each wire marker shall indicate the device or equipment, including specific terminal number to which the remote end of the wire is attached.


Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. This nameplate and method of attachment may be the manufacturer's standard if it contains the required information.


ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switchboard, equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in this section or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.


2.5.1 Equipment Test Schedule

The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide equipment test schedules for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date.

a. Test Instrument Calibration

1. The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

3. Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

5. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

6. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by



the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following:

(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument.

(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met.

2.5.2 Switchboard Design Tests

NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.

2.5.2.1 Design Tests

Furnish documentation showing the results of design tests on a product of the same series and rating as that provided by this specification.

a. Short-circuit current test

b. Enclosure tests

c. Dielectric test

2.5.3 Switchboard Production Tests

NEMA PB 2 and UL 891. Furnish reports which include results of production tests performed on the actual equipment for this project. These tests include:

a. 60-hertz dielectric tests

b. Mechanical operation tests

c. Electrical operation and control wiring tests

d. Ground fault sensing equipment test


Provide a power system study as specified in Section 26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION WITH ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein.

3.2 GROUNDING

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounds and grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms.


Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of the



ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Equipment Grounding

Provide bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG not less than 24 inches below grade connecting to the indicated ground rods. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" shall apply.

3.2.3 Connections

Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall be installed as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.




Install and connect equipment furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.

3.3.1 Switchboard

ANSI/NEMA PB 2.1.

3.3.2 Meters and Instrument Transformers

ANSI C12.1.

3.3.3 Field Applied Painting


3.3.4 Galvanizing Repair

Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A780/A780M, zinc rich paint, for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces that repair paint has been applied to.

3.3.5 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting



3.4.1 Exterior Location

Mount switchboard on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 8 inches thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 inch No. 6 mesh



placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab. Slab shall be placed on a 6 inch thick, well-compacted gravel base. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above the finished grade. Edges above grade shall have 1/2 inch chamfer. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant. Cut off and bush conduits 3 inches above slab surface. Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.4.2 Interior Location

Mount switchboard on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 4 inches thick. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above finished floor. Edges above floor shall have 1/2 inch chamfer. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant. Cut off and bush conduits 3 inches above slab surface. Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.


Contractor shall submit request for settings of breakers to the Contracting Officer after approval of switchboard and at least 30 days in advance of their requirement.


Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.

3.5.1.1 Switchboard Assemblies

a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection


2. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.

3. Confirm correct application of manufacturer's recommended lubricants.

4. Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and correct alignment.

5. Inspect all doors, panels, and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit, and missing hardware.

6. Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings.

7. Verify that current transformer ratios correspond to approved shop drawings.




9. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.

10. Clean switchboard.

11. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.

12. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.

13. Exercise all active components.

14. Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.

15. Verify that vents are clear.

16. Test operation, alignment, and penetration of instrument transformer withdrawal disconnects.

17. Inspect control power transformers.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section.

2. Perform overpotential tests.

3. Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring; Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.

4. Perform control wiring performance test.

5. Perform primary current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of assembly.

3.5.1.2 Circuit Breakers

Low Voltage - Insulated-Casewith Solid State Trips


1. Compare nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

2. Inspect circuit breaker for correct mounting.

3. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.

4. Inspect case for cracks or other defects.

5. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted connections and/or cable connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.



6. Inspect mechanism contacts and arc chutes in unsealed units.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Perform contact-resistance tests.

2. Perform insulation-resistance tests.

3. Perform Breaker adjustments for final settings in accordance with Government provided settings.

4. Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests

5. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.

6. Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection.

7. Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection.

3.5.1.3 Current Transformers




3. Verify correct connection.

4. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit.


6. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact.

b. Electrical Tests


2. Perform insulation-resistance tests.

3. Perform polarity tests.

4. Perform ratio-verification tests.

3.5.1.4 Metering and Instrumentation


1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved



shop drawings.


3. Verify tightness of electrical connections.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Determine accuracy of meters at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full scale.

2. Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published data.

3. Verify all instrument multipliers.

4. Electrically confirm that current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are intact.




b. Electrical Tests

1. IEEE 81. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.



Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. Circuit breakers shall be tripped by operation of each protective device. Test shall require each item to perform its function not less than three times. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times for checks, settings, and tests.






SECTION 26 28 01.00 10

COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION WITH ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY

08/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 System Coordinator 1.4.2 System Installer 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD PRODUCT 2.2 NAMEPLATES 2.3 CORROSION PROTECTION 2.4 MOTOR CONTROLS 2.4.1 Motor Starters 2.4.2 Thermal-Overload Protection 2.4.3 Low-Voltage Motor Overload Relays 2.4.3.1 General 2.4.3.2 Construction 2.4.3.3 Ratings 2.4.4 Automatic Control Devices 2.4.4.1 Direct Control 2.4.4.2 Pilot-Relay Control 2.4.4.3 Manual/Automatic Selection 2.5 LOW-VOLTAGE FUSES 2.5.1 General 2.5.2 Cartridge Fuses; Noncurrent-Limiting Type 2.5.3 Cartridge Fuses; Current-Limiting Type 2.5.3.1 Continuous Current Ratings (600 amperes and smaller) 2.5.3.2 Continuous Current Ratings (greater than 600 amperes) 2.5.3.3 Motor and Transformer Circuit Fuses 2.6 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE AND HIGH-VOLTAGE FUSES 2.6.1 General 2.6.2 Construction 2.6.3 Ratings 2.6.3.1 Power Fuses 2.6.3.2 E-Rated, Current-Limiting Power Fuses 2.6.3.3 C-Rated, Current-Limiting Fuses 2.6.3.4 R-Rated, Current-Limiting Fuses 2.7 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP) 2.7.1 General 2.7.2 Construction

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 1


2.7.3 Ratings 2.8 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2.8.1 General 2.8.2 Construction 2.8.3 Ratings 2.8.4 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Elements 2.8.5 Solid-State Trip Elements 2.8.6 SWD Circuit Breakers 2.8.7 HACR Circuit Breakers 2.8.8 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) 2.9 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS 2.9.1 General 2.9.2 Current Transformers 2.9.2.1 For kW Hour and Demand Metering (Low Voltage) 2.9.2.2 Voltage Transformers 2.10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION 2.10.1 Scope of Analyses 2.10.2 Determination of Facts 2.10.3 Single Line Diagram 2.10.4 Computer Analysis Software 2.10.5 Fault Current Analysis 2.10.5.1 Method 2.10.5.2 Data 2.10.5.3 Fault Current Availability 2.10.6 Coordination Study 2.10.6.1 Arc Flash Hazard Analysis 2.10.7 Study report

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 Field Adjustment 3.3 Arc Flash Labels 3.4 Arc Flash Training 3.5 Software Training 3.6 INSTALLATION 3.7 FIELD TESTING 3.7.1 General 3.7.2 Safety 3.7.3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers 3.7.4 Solid-State Circuit Breakers


SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 2


SECTION 26 28 01.00 10

COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION WITH ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY08/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM D2472 (2000; R 2006) Standard Specification for Sulphur Hexafluoride


IEEE 242 (2001; Errata 2003) Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - Buff Book

IEEE 399 (1997) Brown Book IEEE Recommended Practice for Power Systems Analysis

IEEE 1015 (2006; Corr dated 2007) Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - IEEE Blue Book (Color series)

IEEE 1584 (2002; Int 2005) Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations - Includes Access to Additional Content


IEEE C37.010 (1999, R2005) Application Guide for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis

IEEE C37.04 (1999; Amd A 2003; Errata 2005; R 2006; Amd B 2008; INT 2010) Standard for Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers

IEEE C37.06 (2009) Standard for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis - Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities for Voltage Above 1000 V

IEEE C37.13 (2008; INT 1 2009; AMD 1 2012) Standard

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 3


for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures

IEEE C37.16 (2009) Standard for Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application Recommendations for Low-Voltage AC (635 V and below) and DC 3200 V and below) Power Circuit Breakers

IEEE C37.20.01 (2002, R2007) Metal-Enclosed Low-voltage Power Circuit Switchgear

IEEE C37.2 (2008) Standard for Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers, Acronyms and Contact Designations

IEEE C37.20.1 (2002; INT 1 2005; AMD A 2005; AMD B 2006; R 2007) Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit-Breaker Switchgear

IEEE C37.46 (2010) Standard for High Voltage Expulsion and Current-Limiting Type Power Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches

IEEE C37.90 (2005) Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated With Electric Power Apparatus


IEEE C57.12.10 (2010; Errata 2012) Standard for Transformers 230 kV and Below 833/958 through 8333/10,417 kVA, Single-Phase, and 750/862 through 60,000/80,000/ 100,000 kVA, Three-Phase Without Load Tap Changing; and 3750/4687 through 60,000/80,000/100,000 kVA With Load Tap Changing - Safety Requirements


IEEE C57.96 (1999; R 2005) Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers

INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

ICEA P-32-382 (2007) Short Circuit Characteristics of Insulated Cables

ICEA P-45-482 (2007) Short Circuit Performance of Metallic Shields and Sheaths on Insulated Cables

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 4



NEMA C37.50 (2012) American National Standard for Switchgear--Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures - Test Procedures

NEMA FU 1 (2012) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses



NEMA ICS 3 (2005; R 2010) Medium-Voltage Controllers Rated 2001 to 7200 V AC


NEMA MG 1 (2011; Errata 2012) Motors and Generators

NEMA SG 4 (2009) AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers

NEMA SG 6 (2000) Standard for Power Switching Equipment

NEMA/ANSI C12.11 (2007) Instrument Transformers for Revenue Metering, 10 kV BIL through 350 kV BIL (0.6 kV NSV through 69 kV NSV)



NFPA 70E (2012; Errata 2012) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace


UFC 3-310-04 (2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for Buildings

UFC 3-560-01 (2012) Electrical Safety, O&M


UL 1203 (2006) UL Standard for Safety Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations


SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 5


UL 486E (2009; Reprint Apr 2010) Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors


UL 508 (1999; Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial Control Equipment

UL 845 (2005; Reprint Jul 2011) Motor Control Centers

UL 969 (1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems


The fault current analysis, the arc flash hazard analysis and the protective device coordination study shall begin at the source bus at the exiting 15kV load break vault and extend down to the facility system buses where fault availability is 5,000 amperes (symmetrical) for facility low voltage (120V through 480V) level distribution buses.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall not submit nor shall submittals be considered approved for installation on any electrical equipment containing overcurrent protective devices or requiring a short circuit rating or an arc flash rating until the Protective Coordination with Arc Flash Hazard Study has been submitted for review by the Contractor and until it has been approved (transmittal "A" Action) by the reviewing agent. Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Arc Flash Hazard Analysis; G, DOFault Current Analysis; G, DOProtective Device Coordination Study; G, DOEquipment; G, DOSystem Coordinator; G, DOProtective Relays; G, DOInstallation; G, PO

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Testing; G, PO

SD-07 Certificates

Devices and Equipment; G, PO

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 6



1.4.1 System Coordinator

The short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be conducted under the responsible charge and approval of a Registered Professional Electrical Engineer skilled in performing and interpreting the power system studies. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience in performing power system studies. Submit verification of experience and license number, of a registered Professional Engineer as specified above. Experience data shall include at least five references for work of a magnitude comparable to this contract, including points of contact, addresses and telephone numbers.

1.4.2 System Installer

Calibration, testing, adjustment, and placing into service of the protective devices shall be accomplished by a manufacturer's product field service engineer or independent testing company with a minimum of two years of current product experience in protective devices.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Devices and equipment shall be visually inspected when received and prior to acceptance from conveyance. Protect stored items from the environment in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Damaged items shall be replaced.

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

Submit certificates attesting that all devices or equipment meet the requirements of the contract documents. Devices and equipment furnished under this section shall be suitable for the following site conditions:

a. Altitude: 5850 Feet.

b. Ambient Temperature: minus 20 to plus 104 degrees F.

c. Frequency: 60 HZ.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

Provide a minimum of two (2) spare fuses for each type and size utilized for this project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD PRODUCT

Provide protective devices and equipment which are the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory utility type use for at least two years prior to bid opening. Submit data consisting of manufacturer's time-current characteristic curves for individual protective devices, recommended settings of adjustable protective devices, and recommended ratings of non-adjustable protective devices.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 7


2.2 NAMEPLATES

Provide nameplates to identify all protective devices and equipment. Nameplate information shall be in accordance with UL 489.

2.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

Metallic materials shall be protected against corrosion. Ferrous metal hardware shall be zinc or chrome-plated.

2.4 MOTOR CONTROLS

Motor controls shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 3 and NEMA ICS 6, and UL 508 and UL 845.

2.4.1 Motor Starters

Provide combination starters with circuit breakers.

2.4.2 Thermal-Overload Protection

Each motor of 1/8 hp or larger shall be provided with thermal-overload protection. Polyphase motors shall have overload protection in each ungrounded conductor. The overload-protection device shall be provided either integral with the motor or controller, or shall be mounted in a separate enclosure. Unless otherwise specified, the protective device shall be of the manually reset type. Single or double pole tumbler switches specifically designed for alternating-current operation only may be used as manual controllers for single-phase motors having a current rating not in excess of 80 percent of the switch rating.

2.4.3 Low-Voltage Motor Overload Relays

2.4.3.1 General

Thermal overload relays shall conform to NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. Overload protection shall be provided either integral with the motor or controller, and shall be rated in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. Standard units shall be used for motor starting times up to 7 second. Slow units shall be used for motor starting times from 8 to 12 seconds. Quick trip units shall be used on hermetically sealed, submersible pumps, and similar motors.

2.4.3.2 Construction

Manual reset type thermal relays shall be bimetallic construction. Automatic reset type relays shall be bimetallic construction.

2.4.3.3 Ratings

Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. Trip current ratings shall be established by selection of the replaceable overload device and shall not be adjustable. Where the controller is remotely-located or difficult to reach, an automatic reset, non-compensated overload relay shall be provided. Manual reset overload relays shall be provided otherwise, and at all locations where automatic starting is provided. Where the motor is located in a constant ambient temperature, and the thermal device is located in an ambient temperature that regularly varies by more than 14 degrees F, an ambient temperature-compensated

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 8


overload relay shall be provided.

2.4.4 Automatic Control Devices

2.4.4.1 Direct Control

Automatic control devices (such as thermostats, float or pressure switches) which control the starting and stopping of motors directly shall be designed for that purpose and have an adequate horsepower rating.

2.4.4.2 Pilot-Relay Control

Where the automatic-control device does not have such a rating, a magnetic starter shall be used, with the automatic-control device actuating the pilot-control circuit.

2.4.4.3 Manual/Automatic Selection

a. Where combination manual and automatic control is specified and the automatic-control device actuates the pilot control circuit of a magnetic starter, the magnetic starter shall be provided with a three-position selector switch marked MANUAL-OFF-AUTOMATIC.

b. Connections to the selector switch shall only allow the normal automatic regulatory control devices to be bypassed when the switch is in the Manual position; all safety control devices, such as low-or high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor-control circuit in both the Manual and the Automatic positions of the selector switch. Control circuit connections to any MANUAL-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance with wiring diagram approved by the contracting Officer unless such diagram is included on the drawings. All controls shall be 120 volts or less unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 LOW-VOLTAGE FUSES

2.5.1 General

Low-voltage fuses shall conform to NEMA FU 1. Time delay and nontime delay options shall be as specified. Equipment provided under this contract shall be provided with a complete set of properly rated fuses when the equipment manufacturer utilizes fuses in the manufacture of the equipment, or if current-limiting fuses are required to be installed to limit the ampere-interrupting capacity of circuit breakers or equipment to less than the maximum available fault current at the location of the equipment to be installed. Fuses shall have a voltage rating of not less than the phase-to-phase circuit voltage, and shall have the time-current characteristics requires for effective power system coordination.

2.5.2 Cartridge Fuses; Noncurrent-Limiting Type

Cartridge fuses of the noncurrent-limiting type shall be Class H, nonrenewable, dual element, time lag type and shall have interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes. Class H Fuses shall conform to UL 198M. At 500 percent current, cartridge fuses shall not blow in less than 10 seconds. Cartridge fuses shall be used for circuits rated in excess of 30 amperes, 125 volts, except where current-limiting fuses are indicated.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 9


2.5.3 Cartridge Fuses; Current-Limiting Type

Cartridge fuses, current-limiting type, Class G, J, K, L, RK1, T, CC shall have tested interrupting capacity not less than 100,000 amperes. Fuse holders shall be the type that will reject Class H fuses.

a. Class G, J, L, CC fuses shall conform to UL 198M.

b. Class K fuses shall conform to UL 198M.

c. Class R fuses shall conform to UL 198M.

d. Class T fuses shall conform to UL 198M.

2.5.3.1 Continuous Current Ratings (600 amperes and smaller)

Service entrance and feeder circuit fuses (600 amperes and smaller) shall be Class RK1 or J, current-limiting, time-delay with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity.

2.5.3.2 Continuous Current Ratings (greater than 600 amperes)

Service entrance and feeder circuit fuses (greater than 600 amperes) shall be Class L, current-limiting, time-delay with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity.

2.5.3.3 Motor and Transformer Circuit Fuses

Motor, motor controller, transformer, and inductive circuit fuses shall be Class RK1, current-limiting, time-delay with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity.

2.6 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE AND HIGH-VOLTAGE FUSES

2.6.1 General

Medium-voltage and high-voltage fuses shall be distribution fuse cutouts or power fuses, E-rated, C-rated, or R-rated current-limiting fuses as shown.

2.6.2 Construction

Units shall be suitable for outdoor use. Fuses shall have integral blown-fuse indicators. All ratings shall be clearly visible.

2.6.3 Ratings

Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. Continuous-current ratings shall be as shown.

2.6.3.1 Power Fuses

Current-limiting power fuses shall have ratings in accordance with IEEE C37.46 and as follows:

a. Nominal voltage....................................12.47 kV

b. Rated maximum voltage..............................15kV

c. Maximum symmetrical interrupting capacity..........25-50kA

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 10


d. Rated continuous current...........................fuses sized per manufacturers recommendations.

e. BIL................................................95kB

2.6.3.2 E-Rated, Current-Limiting Power Fuses

E-rated, current-limiting, power fuses shall conform to IEEE C37.46.

2.6.3.3 C-Rated, Current-Limiting Fuses

C-rated, current-limiting, power fuses shall open in 1000 seconds at currents between 170 and 240 percent of the C rating.

2.6.3.4 R-Rated, Current-Limiting Fuses

R-rated, current-limiting, fuses shall be used with medium-voltage motor controllers only. R-rated fuses shall conform to IEEE C37.46.

2.7 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP)

2.7.1 General

Motor short-circuit protectors shall conform to UL 508 and shall be provided as shown. Protectors shall be used only as part of a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection, and shall be rated in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

2.7.2 Construction

Motor short-circuit protector bodies shall be constructed of high temperature, dimensionally stable, long life, nonhygroscopic materials. Protectors shall fit special MSCP mounting clips and shall not be interchangeable with any commercially available fuses. Protectors shall have 100 percent one-way interchangeability within the A-Y letter designations. All ratings shall be clearly visible.

2.7.3 Ratings

Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. Letter designations shall be A through Y for motor controller Sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, with 100,000 amperes interrupting capacity rating. Letter designations shall correspond to controller sizes as follows:

CONTROLLER SIZE MSCP DESIGNATION

NEMA 0 A-N

NEMA 1 A-P

NEMA 2 A-S

NEMA 3 A-U

NEMA 4 A-W

NEMA 5 A-Y

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 11


2.8 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2.8.1 General

Molded-case circuit breakers shall conform to UL 489 and UL 489. Circuit breakers may be installed in panelboards, switchboards, enclosures, or combination motor controllers.

2.8.2 Construction

Molded-case circuit breakers shall be assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of glass reinforced insulating material providing high dielectric strength. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. Lugs shall be listed for copper conductors only in accordance with UL 486E. Single-pole circuit breakers shall be full module size with not more than one pole per module. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be of the common-trip type having a single operating handle such that an overload or short circuit on any one pole will result in all poles opening simultaneously. Sizes of 100 amperes or less may consist of single-pole breakers permanently factory assembled into a multi-pole unit having an internal, mechanical, nontamperable common-trip mechanism and external handle ties. All circuit breakers shall have a quick-make, quick-break overcenter toggle-type mechanism, and the handle mechanism shall be trip-free to prevent holding the contacts closed against a short-circuit or sustained overload. All circuit breaker handles shall assume a position between "ON" and "OFF" when tripped automatically. All ratings shall be clearly visible.

2.8.3 Ratings

Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the available short-circuit current at the line terminals of the circuit breaker and correspond to the UL listed integrated short-circuit current rating specified for the panelboards and switchboards. Molded-case circuit breakers shall have nominal voltage ratings, maximum continuous-current ratings, and maximum short-circuit interrupting ratings in accordance with UL 489. Ratings shall be coordinated with system X/R ratio.

2.8.4 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Elements

Thermal magnetic circuit breakers shall be provided as shown. Automatic operation shall be obtained by means of thermal-magnetic tripping devices located in each pole providing inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit protection. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall be adjustable and accessible from the front of all circuit breakers on frame sizes above 400 amperes.

2.8.5 Solid-State Trip Elements

Solid-state circuit breakers shall be provided for the MSB main circuit breaker shown on drawing sheet EP601.

All electronics shall be self-contained and require no external relaying, power supply, or accessories. Printed circuit cards shall be treated to resist moisture absorption, fungus growth, and signal leakage. All electronics shall be housed in an enclosure which provides protection against arcs, magnetic interference, dust, and other contaminants.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 12


Solid-state sensing shall measure true RMS current with error less than one percent on systems with distortions through the 13th harmonic. Peak or average actuating devices are not acceptable. Current sensors shall be toroidal construction, encased in a plastic housing filled with epoxy to protect against damage and moisture and shall be integrally mounted on the breaker. Where indicated on the drawings, circuit breaker frames shall be rated for 100 percent continuous duty. Circuit breakers shall have tripping features as shown on the drawings and as described below:

a. Long-time current pick-up, adjustable from 50 percent to 100 percent of continuous current rating.

b. Adjustable long-time delay.

c. Short-time current pick-up, adjustable from 1.5 to 9 times long-time current setting.

d. Adjustable short-time delay.

e. Short-time I square times t switch.

f. Instantaneous current pick-up, adjustable from 1.5 to 9 times long-time current setting.

g. Ground-fault pick-up (MSB main circuit breaker only), adjustable from 20 percent to 60 percent of sensor rating, but in no case greater than 1200 amperes. Sensing of ground-fault current at the main bonding jumper or ground strap shall not be permitted.

2.8.6 SWD Circuit Breakers

Circuit breakers rated 15 amperes or 20 amperes and intended to switch 277 volts or less fluorescent lighting loads shall be marked "SWD."

2.8.7 HACR Circuit Breakers

Circuit breakers 60 amperes or below, 240 volts, 1-pole or 2-pole, intended to protect multi-motor and combination-load installations involved in heating, air conditioning, and refrigerating equipment shall be marked "Listed HACR Type."

2.8.8 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)

Motor circuit protectors shall conform to UL 489 and UL 489 and shall be provided as shown. MCPs shall consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor circuit overload and short-circuit protection. Motor Circuit Protectors shall be rated in accordance with NFPA 70.

2.9 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

2.9.1 General

Instrument transformers shall comply with NEMA/ANSI C12.11 and IEEE C57.13. Instrument transformers shall be configured for mounting in/on the device to which they are applied. Polarity marks on instrument transformers shall be visually evident and shown on the drawings.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 13


2.9.2 Current Transformers

Unless otherwise indicated, bar, wound, or window-type transformers are acceptable; and except for window-type units installed over insulated buses, transformers shall have a BIL rating consistent with the rated BIL of the associated switchgear or electric power apparatus bushings, buses or conductors. Current transformers shall have the indicated ratios. The continuous thermal-current rating factor shall be not less than 1.5. Other thermal and mechanical ratings of current transformers and their primary leads shall be coordinated with the design of the circuit breaker and shall be not less than the momentary rating of the associated circuit breaker. Circuit protectors shall be provided across secondary leads of the current transformers to prevent the accidental open-circuiting of the transformers while energized. Each terminal of each current transformer shall be connected to a short-circuiting terminal block in the circuit interrupting mechanism cabinet, power transformer terminal cabinet, and in the associated instrument and relay cabinets.

2.9.2.1 For kW Hour and Demand Metering (Low Voltage)

Current transformers shall conform to IEEE C57.13. Current transformers with a metering accuracy Class of 0.3 through B-0.9, with a minimum RF of 3.0 at 86 degrees F, with 600-volt insulation, and 10 kV BIL shall be provided. Butyl-molded, window-type current transformers mounted in the current transformer cabinet in the low voltage switchboard shall be provided.

2.9.2.2 Voltage Transformers

Voltage transformers shall have indicated ratios. Units shall have an accuracy rating of 0.3. Voltage transformers shall be of the drawout type having current-limiting fuses in both primary and secondary circuits. Mechanical interlocks shall prevent removal of fuses, unless the associated voltage transformer is in a drawout position. Voltage transformer compartments shall have hinged doors.


Analyses shall be prepared to demonstrate that the equipment selected and system constructed meet the contract requirements for ratings, coordination, and protection. They shall include a load flow analysis, a fault current analysis, and a protective device coordination study. Submit the study along with protective device equipment submittals. No time extensions or similar contact modifications will be granted for work arising out of the requirements for this study. Approval of protective devices proposed will be based on recommendations of this study. The Government shall not be held responsible for any changes to equipment, device ratings, settings, or additional labor for installation of equipment or devices ordered and/or procured prior to approval of the study. The studies shall be performed by a registered professional engineer with demonstrated experience in power system coordination in the last 5 years. Provide a list of references complete with points of contact, addresses and telephone numbers. The selection of the engineer is subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.

2.10.1 Scope of Analyses

The fault current analysis, and protective device coordination study shall begin at the source bus at the existing 15kV load break vault and extend

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 14


down to system buses where fault availability is 5,000 amperes (symmetrical) for building/facility low voltage (120V through 480V) level distribution buses.

Study shall include motors that are 20 hp and larger. The study shall run the short circuit and arc flash hazard analysis with the motor or motors on and off to determine the worst case. If more than one motor the analysis shall show both off, one running and both running. If more than two motors, the same pattern of adding a motor shall be followed.

2.10.2 Determination of Facts

The time-current characteristics, features, and nameplate data for each existing protective device shall be determined and documented. Coordinate with the Fort Carson DPW Utilities Manager for fault current availability at the site.

Power system data base shall be gathered and tabulated to support the study. The information shall include the equipment nameplate data and the protective device settings:

a. Impedance of service entrance.

b. Electrical Distribution System: (1) Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.

(2) Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.

(3) Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance and X/R ratios.

(4) Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material, insulation and length.

(5) Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1. Only those 20 HP and larger.

c. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system input data, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

(1) Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

(2) Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current and overload capability.

(3) Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start and thermal-damage curve.

(4) Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.

(5) Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.

(6) Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range and instantaneous adjustment range

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 15


for circuit breakers.

(7) Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

(8) Panelboards and switchboards ampacity and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

2.10.3 Single Line Diagram

A single line diagram shall be prepared to show the electrical system buses, devices, transformation points, and all sources of fault current (including motor contributions). A fault-impedance diagram or a computer analysis diagram may be provided. Each bus, device or transformation point shall have a unique identifier. If a fault-impedance diagram is provided, impedance data shall be shown. Location of switches, breakers, and circuit interrupting devices shall be shown on the diagram together with available fault data, and the device interrupting rating.

2.10.4 Computer Analysis Software

The studies shall be performed using computer analysis software. The software shall be Windows based. The following are programs that are acceptable to use:

a. SKM Systems Analysis Power Tools for Windows (PTW). b. EasyPower by ESA, Inc. c. EDSA Micro Corporation. d. Synergee.

2.10.5 Fault Current Analysis

2.10.5.1 Method

The fault current analysis shall be performed in accordance with methods described in IEEE 242, and IEEE 399.

a. Transformer design impedances shall be used when test impedances are not available.

b. Provide the following: (1) Calculation methods and assumptions.

(2) Selected base per unit quantities.

(3) One-line diagram of the system being evaluated that clearly identifies individual equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and bus connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at each bus location and other information pertinent to the computer analysis.

(4) The study shall include input circuit data including electric utility system characteristics, source impedance data, conductor lengths, number of conductors per phase, conductor impedance values, insulation types, transformer impedances and X/R ratios, motor contributions, and other circuit information as related to the short-circuit calculations.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 16


(5) Software shall calculate maximum available three-phase fault current. Also, different levels of fault current is required to be calculated based on different levels indicated in the arc flash hazard analysis requirements.

(6) Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

(7) Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall also comply with: (a) Transformers: IEEE C57.12.10, IEEE C57.12.00, and IEEE C57.96. (b) Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.01. (c) Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

(8) Tabulations of calculated quantities including short-circuit currents, X/R ratios, equipment short-circuit interrupting or withstand current ratings and notes regarding adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment rating.

(9) Results, conclusions, and recommendations. A comprehensive discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment must be provided and include recommendations as appropriate for improvements to the system.

c. Protective Device Evaluation: (1) Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings. (2) Adequacy of switchboard and panelboard bus bars to withstand short-circuit stresses. (3) Contractor shall notify Owner in writing, of any circuit protective devices improperly rated for the calculated available fault current.

d. Include motors 20 hp and larger in the short circuit analysis as previously discussed.

2.10.5.2 Data

Actual data shall be utilized in fault calculations. Bus characteristics and transformer impedance shall be those proposed. Data shall be documented in the report.

2.10.5.3 Fault Current Availability

Balanced three-phase fault, bolted line-to-line fault, and line-to-ground fault current values shall be provided at each voltage transformation point and at each power distribution bus. The maximum and minimum values of fault available at each location shall be shown in tabular form on the diagram or in the report.

2.10.6 Coordination Study

The study shall demonstrate that the maximum possible degree of selectivity has been obtained between devices specified, consistent with protection of equipment and conductors from damage from overloads and fault conditions.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 17


The study shall include a description of the coordination of the protective devices in this project. A written narrative shall be provided describing: which devices may operate in the event of a fault at each bus; the logic used to arrive at device ratings and settings; situations where system coordination is not achievable due to device limitations (an analysis of any device curves which overlap); coordination between upstream and downstream devices; and relay settings. Recommendations to improve or enhance system reliability, and detail where such changes would involve additions or modifications to the contract and cost associated with each modification (addition or reduction) shall be provided. Composite coordination plots shall be provided on log-log graph paper. The study shall be performed in accordance with methods described in IEEE 399.

a. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.

b. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-circuit currents.

c. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

The coordination study analysis shall provide the following information:

a. Protective device coordination time-current curves (TCC) shall be displayed on log-log scale graphs.

b. Include on each TCC graph, a complete title with descriptive device names.

c. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.

d. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.

e. Plot the following characteristics on the TCC graphs, where applicable: (1) Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands. (2) Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's tolerance bands. (3) Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault protection curves. (4) Medium voltage conductor damage curves. (5) Ground fault protective devices, as applicable. (6) Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points, where applicable. f. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is provided, while providing proper protection.

g. Provide the following: (1) Computer printouts shall accompany the log-log plots and will contain descriptions for each of the devices shown, settings of the adjustable devices and device identification numbers to aid in locating the devices on the log-log plots and the system one-line diagram.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 18


(2) The study shall include a separate, tabular printout containing the recommended settings of all adjustable overcurrent protective devices, the equipment designation where the device is located and the device number corresponding to the device on the system one-line diagram. (3) A discussion section which evaluates the degree of system protection and service continuity with overcurrent devices, along with recommendations as required for addressing system protection or device coordination deficiencies. (4) Contractor shall notify Owner in writing of any significant deficiencies in protection and/or coordination. Provide recommendations for improvements.

h. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices. Device shall not operate in response to the following: (1) Inrush current when first energized. (2) Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified for that transformer. (3) Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual loading or emergency conditions. (4) Device settings shall protect transformer according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

i. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

2.10.6.1 Arc Flash Hazard Analysis

The study shall be in accordance with latest applicable NFPA 70E, OSHA 29-CFR, Part 1910 Sub part S, IEEE 1584, and IEEE C2NESC Standards. The study must be performed using IEEE 1584 for equipment rated 120V, 208V, 240V, 480V to 15 kV and NESC for equipment rated above 15 kV. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed in conjunction with the short-circuit analysis and the protective device time-current coordination analysis, but shall not be finalized until the short circuit and protective device coordination studies are completed. All assumptions shall be documented in the report.

In addition the analysis described above provide the following:

a. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at significant locations in the electrical distribution system where work could be performed on energized parts.

b. Circuits 240V or less fed by transformers 112.5 kVA or less shall still be evaluated.

c. Working distances shall be based on IEEE 1584. The calculated arc flash protection boundary shall be determined using those working distances.

d. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 19


short-circuit and coordination study model. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into consideration when determining the clearing time when performing incident energy calculations.

e. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for multiple system scenarios must be compared and the greatest incident energy must be uniquely reported for each equipment location in a single table. Calculations must be performed to represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude for normal and emergency operating conditions. The minimum calculation will assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum. Conversely, the maximum calculation will assume a maximum contribution from the utility. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed utilizing mutually agreed upon facility operational conditions, and the final report shall describe, when applicable, how these conditions differ from worst-case bolted fault conditions.

f. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations must take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors should be decremented as follows: - Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 5 cycles.

g. For each piece of ANSI rated equipment with an enclosed main device, two calculations shall be made. A calculation shall be made for the main cubicle, sides, or rear; and shall be based on a device located upstream of the equipment to clear the arcing fault (some indicate this to be the line or supply side). A second calculation shall be made for the front cubicles and shall be based on the equipment's main device to clear the arcing fault (some indicate this to be the bus or load side). For all other non-ANSI rated equipment, only one calculation shall be required and it shall be based on a device located upstream of the equipment to clear the arcing fault.

h. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker (as required per above), the line side and load side contributions must be included in the fault calculation.

i. Mis-coordination should be checked amongst all devices within the branch containing the immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location and the calculation should utilize the fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding location.

j. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. A maximum clearing time of 2 seconds will be used based on IEEE 1584 section B.1.2. Where it is not physically possible to move outside of the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the specific location shall be utilized.

k. Worst case personal protective equipment (PPE) for each bus/equipment in the model.

l. Working distances for the different scenarios and arcing fault energy levels. Once calculated, a recommendation shall be made to standardize the arc flash protection boundary to a common distance.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 20


This distance shall be broken into two categories: a distance for equipment operating over 600 volts and equipment 600 volts and less. The standardized distance will typically be the larger boundary from each category and round up to the nearest foot.

m. Provide the following: (1) Results of the Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be submitted in tabular form, and shall include device or bus name, bolted fault and arcing fault current levels (100% and 85%), flash protection boundary distances, working distances, personal-protective equipment classes and AFIE (Arc Flash Incident Energy) levels. Flag results where the 85% arcing current provided the worst-case results. (2) The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall report incident energy values based on recommended device settings for equipment within the scope of the study. (3) The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis may include recommendations to reduce AFIE levels and enhance worker safety.

2.10.7 Study report

The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report. A minimum of five (5) bound copies of the complete final report shall be submitted. Electronic and pdf copies of the entire report shall be provided along with the bound copies.

a. The report shall include the following sections:

(1) Executive Summary including Introduction, Scope of Work, list of assumptions made, and Results/Recommendations. (2) Short-Circuit Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations. (3) Short-Circuit Device Evaluation Table. (4) Protective Device Coordination Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations. (5) Protective Device Settings Table. (6) Time-Current Coordination Graphs and Recommendations. (7) Arc Flash Evaluations Summary Spreadsheet (Maximum Energy Calculation). (8) Arc Flash Evaluations Summary Spreadsheet (All Scenarios for each location Energy Calculation). (9) Arc Flash Evaluations Summary Spreadsheet (Dangerous where the incident energy level is 40 Cals/cm2 (HRC>4)). (10) Arc Flash Hazard Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations including the details of the incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations, along with Arc Flash boundary distances, working distances, Incident Energy levels and Personal Protection Equipment levels for each location. (11) The arc flash hazard reports shall list the following items: bus name, scenario, upstream protective device name, type and setting, bus line to line voltage, bus bolted fault, protective device bolted fault current, arcing fault current, protective device trip/delay time, breaker opening time, solidly grounded column, equipment type, gap, arc flash boundary, working distance, incident energy, hazard risk category. (12) Arc Flash Labeling section showing types of labels to be provided. Section will contain descriptive information as well as typical label images. (13) One-line system diagram that shall be computer generated

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 21


and will clearly identify individual equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and bus connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at each bus location, device numbers used in the time-current coordination analysis, and other information pertinent to the computer analysis. (14) Provide photographs of any equipment that is felt needs special attention.

b. The report shall include a narrative describing: the analyses performed; the bases and methods used; and the desired method of coordinated protection of the power system.

c. The study shall include descriptive and technical data for existing devices and new protective devices proposed. The data shall include manufacturers published data, nameplate data, and definition of the fixed or adjustable features of the existing or new protective devices. Tabular format of settings selected for overcurrent protection devices: (1) Device tag. (2) Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup values. (3) Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous settings. (4) Fuse-current rating and type. (5) Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

d. The report shall document existing power system data including time-current characteristic curves and protective device ratings and settings to one (1) level or device ahead of where the new construction begins at the existing load break vault.

e. The report shall contain fully coordinated composite time-current characteristics curves for each bus in the system, as required to ensure coordinated power system protection between protective devices or equipment. The report shall include recommended ratings and settings of all protective devices in tabulated form. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Show the following information: (1) Device tag. (2) Voltage and current ratio for curves. (3) Three-phase damage points for each transformer. (4) No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. (5) Cable damage curves. (6) Transformer inrush points. (7) Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

f. The report shall provide the calculation performed for the analyses, including computer analysis programs utilized. The name of the software package, developer, and version number shall be provided.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 22


3.2 Field Adjustment

Contractor shall adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings table provided by the final approved coordination study.

3.3 Arc Flash Labels

Provide labels of high adhesion polyester or vinyl for each work location analyzed. The labels shall be waterproof and UV resistant. The label size shall be 4" high x 6" wide. Labels shall not be produced or provided until the final study has been approved and all comments incorporated. However, the report shall show examples of the different types of labels proposed to be used. The labels shall be designed according to the following standards:

1. UL 969 - Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems. 2. ANSI Z535.4 - Product Safety Signs and Labels. 3. NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) - Article 110.16.

a. Labels shall be printed by a thermal transfer type printer, with no field markings. The printer software (if different then the software used to perform the arc flash analysis) and the printer shall be provided to the Contracting Officer along with 50 blank labels.

b. Arc flash labels shall be provided for equipment as identified in the study and the respective equipment access areas per the following: (1) Floor Standing Equipment - Labels shall be provided on the front of each individual section. Equipment requiring rear and/or side access shall have labels provided on each individual section access area. Equipment line-ups containing sections with multiple incident energy and flash protection boundaries shall be labeled as identified in the Arc Flash Analysis table.

(2) Wall Mounted Equipment - Labels shall be provided on the front cover or a nearby adjacent surface, depending upon equipment configuration.

c. General Use Safety labels shall be installed on equipment in coordination with the Arc Flash labels. The General Use Safety labels shall warn of general electrical hazards associated with shock, arc flash, and explosions, and instruct workers to turn off power prior to work.

d. The label shall include the following information: (1) General Warning of arc flash hazard. (2) Nominal System Voltage. (3) Shock Hazard Analysis: Limited Approach Boundary, Restricted Approach Boundary, Prohibited Approach Boundary, PPE for shock protection. (4) Study report number and issue date. (5) Equipment Description. (6) Location where report is kept at the installation. (7) Location of protective device either on line (supply) side or on the bus (load) size of the equipment. (8) NFPA 70E requires at least one of the listed items below to be on the label. However, UFC 3-560-01 specifically states that this information will not be on the label, but will only be provided in the report. So the information below shall not be on the label, but

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 23


instead shall state: "Minimum level of PPE or incident energy with corresponding working distance can be found in the report. Verify that all assumptions are still valid prior to performing any work.". (a) Available incident energy and the corresponding working distance. (b) Minimum arc rating of clothing. (c) Required level of PPE. (d) Highest Hazard/Risk Category (HRC) for the equipment.

e. The technician providing the installation of the labels shall have completed an 8-Hour instructor led Electrical Safety Training Course with includes NFPA 70E material including the selection of personal protective equipment.

3.4 Arc Flash Training

The Contractor performing the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall provide training (either by the Contractor or through an instructor led company that specialized in this type of training) on the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment (classroom setting of twenty (20) personnel for a minimum of 4 hours. Provide certificates with the appropriate number of CEU's to each person attending the training.

3.5 Software Training

The Contractor performing the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall provide training on the software used for the short circuit, protective coordination and arc flash hazard analysis (either by the contractor or through an instructor led company that specialized in this type of training) on the use of the software and in particular how to add new data and modify existing data. Training shall be for three (3) personnel. Contractor shall provide a rugged, "industrial" type laptop with the software pre-loaded for each person taking the training. The training shall be for a minimum of 32 hours. The installation will be the final owner of the computers and the licensee of the software programs. Transfer of title to the installation is not acceptable.

3.6 INSTALLATION

Submit procedures including diagrams, instructions, and precautions required to properly install, adjust, calibrate, and test the devices and equipment. Install protective devices in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.

3.7 FIELD TESTING

Prior to field tests, submit the proposed test plan consisting of complete field test procedure, tests to be performed, test equipment required, and tolerance limits, and complete testing and verification of the ground fault protection equipment, where used. Submit performance test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 24


3.7.1 General

Perform field testing in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer 14 days prior to conducting tests. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct field tests. Perform all tests and inspections recommended by the manufacturer unless specifically waived by the Contracting Officer. Maintain a written record of all tests which includes date, test performed, personnel involved, devices tested, serial number and name of test equipment, and test results.

3.7.2 Safety

Provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves, protective barriers, and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the test vicinity. Replace any devices or equipment which are damaged due to improper test procedures or handling.

3.7.3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit breakers shall be visually inspected, operated manually, and connections checked for tightness. Current ratings shall be verified and adjustable settings incorporated in accordance with the coordination study.

3.7.4 Solid-State Circuit Breakers

Circuit breakers shall be visually inspected, operated manually, and connections checked for tightness. Current ratings shall be verified and adjustable settings incorporated in accordance with the coordination study.


SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 25




SECTION 26 29 23

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS

04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.3.1 Performance Requirements 1.3.1.1 Electromagnetic Interference Suppression 1.3.1.2 Electromechanical and Electrical Components 1.3.2 Electrical Requirements 1.3.2.1 Power Line Surge Protection 1.3.2.2 Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Schematic Diagrams 1.5.2 Interconnecting Diagrams 1.5.3 Installation Drawings 1.5.4 Equipment Schedule 1.5.5 Installation instructions 1.5.6 Factory Test Results 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 1.7 WARRANTY 1.8 MAINTENANCE 1.8.1 Spare Parts 1.8.2 Maintenance Support

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) 2.2 ENCLOSURES 2.3 WIRES AND CABLES 2.4 NAMEPLATES 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2.5.1 VFD Factory Test Plan

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.2.1 VFD Test 3.2.2 Performance Verification Tests 3.2.3 Endurance Test 3.3 DEMONSTRATION 3.3.1 Training 3.3.1.1 Instructions to Government Personnel 3.3.1.2 Operating Personnel Training Program 3.3.1.3 Engineering/Maintenance Personnel Training



SECTION 26 29 23

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



IEEE 519 (1992; R 1993; Errata 2004) Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems

IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits




NEMA ICS 3.1 (2009) Guide for the Application, Handling, Storage, Installation and Maintenance of Medium-Voltage AC Contactors, Controllers and Control Centers


NEMA ICS 7 (2006) Adjustable-Speed Drives




MIL-STD-461 (2007; Rev F) Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment




47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices



UL 508C (2002; Reprint Nov 2010) Power Conversion Equipment


Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.


1.3.1 Performance Requirements

1.3.1.1 Electromagnetic Interference Suppression

Computing devices, as defined by 47 CFR 15, MIL-STD-461 rules and regulations, shall be certified to comply with the requirements for class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in part 15.

1.3.1.2 Electromechanical and Electrical Components

Electrical and electromechanical components of the Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall not cause electromagnetic interference to adjacent electrical or electromechanical equipment while in operation.

1.3.2 Electrical Requirements

1.3.2.1 Power Line Surge Protection

IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE 519 Control panel shall have surge protection, included within the panel to protect the unit from damaging transient voltage surges. Surge arrestor shall be mounted near the incoming power source and properly wired to all three phases and ground. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

1.3.2.2 Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection

I/O functions as specified shall be protected against surges induced on control and sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms:

a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Schematic diagrams; G, DO

Interconnecting diagrams; G, DO

Installation drawings; G, DO

Submit drawings for government approval prior to equipment construction or integration. Modifications to original drawings made during installation shall be immediately recorded for inclusion into the as-built drawings.

SD-03 Product Data

Variable frequency drives; G, DO

Wires and cables

Equipment schedule

Include data indicating compatibility with motors being driven.

SD-06 Test Reports

VFD Test; G, PO

Performance Verification Tests: G, PO

Endurance Test;G, PO

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Installation instructions


VFD Factory Test Plan; G, PO

Factory test results; G, PO


Variable frequency drives, Data Package 4

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Provide service and maintenance information including preventive maintenance, assembly, and disassembly procedures. Include electrical drawings from electrical general sections. Submit additional information necessary to provide complete operation, repair, and maintenance information, detailed



to the smallest replaceable unit. Include copies of as-built submittals. Provide routine preventative maintenance instructions, and equipment required. Provide instructions on how to modify program settings, and modify the control program. Provide instructions on drive adjustment, trouble-shooting, and configuration. Provide instructions on process tuning and system calibration.


1.5.1 Schematic Diagrams

Show circuits and device elements for each replaceable module. Schematic diagrams of printed circuit boards are permitted to group functional assemblies as devices, provided that sufficient information is provided for government maintenance personnel to verify proper operation of the functional assemblies.

1.5.2 Interconnecting Diagrams

Show interconnections between equipment assemblies, and external interfaces, including power and signal conductors. Include for enclosures and external devices.

1.5.3 Installation Drawings

Show floor plan of each site, with V.F.D.'s and motors indicated. Indicate ventilation requirements, adequate clearances, and cable routes.

1.5.4 Equipment Schedule

Provide schedule of equipment supplied. Schedule shall provide a cross reference between manufacturer data and identifiers indicated in shop drawings. Schedule shall include the total quantity of each item of equipment supplied. For complete assemblies, such as VFD's, provide the serial numbers of each assembly, and a sub-schedule of components within the assembly. Provide recommended spare parts listing for each assembly or component.

1.5.5 Installation instructions

Provide installation instructions issued by the manufacturer of the equipment, including notes and recommendations, prior to shipment to the site. Provide operation instructions prior to acceptance testing.

1.5.6 Factory Test Results

Document test results and submit to government within 7 working days after completion of test.

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.

1.7 WARRANTY

The complete system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of



one year, or the contracted period of any extended warrantee agreed upon by the contractor and the Government, after successful completion of the acceptance test. Any component failing to perform its function as specified and documented shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Government. Items repaired or replaced shall be warranted for an additional period of at least one year from the date that it becomes functional again, as specified in the FAR CLAUSE 52.246-21.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

1.8.1 Spare Parts

Manufacturers provide spare parts in accordance with recommended spare parts list.

1.8.2 Maintenance Support

During the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide on-site, on-call maintenance services by Contractor's personnel on the following basis: The service shall be on a per-call basis with 36 hour response. Contractor shall support the maintenance of all hardware and software of the system. Various personnel of different expertise shall be sent on-site depending on the nature of the maintenance service required. Costs shall include travel, local transportation, living expenses, and labor rates of the service personnel while responding to the service request. The provisions of this Section are not in lieu of, nor relieve the Contractor of, warranty responsibilities covered in this specification. Should the result of the service request be the uncovering of a system defect covered under the warranty provisions, all costs for the call, including the labor necessary to identify the defect, shall be borne by the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)

Provide frequency drive to control the speed of induction motor(s). The VFD shall include the following minimum functions, features and ratings.

a. Input circuit breaker per UL 489 with a minimum of 10,000 amps symmetrical interrupting capacity and door interlocked external operator.

b. A converter stage per UL 508C shall change fixed voltage, fixed frequency, ac line power to a fixed dc voltage. The converter shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers. Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) are not acceptable. The converter shall be insensitive to three phase rotation of the ac line and shall not cause displacement power factor of less than .95 lagging under any speed and load condition.

c. An inverter stage shall change fixed dc voltage to variable frequency, variable voltage, ac for application to a standard NEMA design B squirrel cage motor. The inverter shall be switched in a manner to produce a sine coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform.

d. The VFD shall be capable of supplying 120 percent of rated full load current for one minute at maximum ambient temperature.

e. The VFD shall be designed to operate from a 480 volt, plus or minus 10



percent, three phase, 60 Hz supply, and control motors with a corresponding voltage rating.

f. Acceleration and deceleration time shall be independently adjustable from one second to 60 seconds.

g. Adjustable full-time current limiting shall limit the current to a preset value which shall not exceed 120 percent of the controller rated current. The current limiting action shall maintain the V/Hz ratio constant so that variable torque can be maintained. Short time starting override shall allow starting current to reach 175 percent of controller rated current to maximum starting torque.

h. The controllers shall be capable of producing an output frequency over the range of 3 Hz to 60 Hz (20 to one speed range), without low speed cogging. Over frequency protection shall be included such that a failure in the controller electronic circuitry shall not cause frequency to exceed 110 percent of the maximum controller output frequency selected.

i. Minimum and maximum output frequency shall be adjustable over the following ranges: 1) Minimum frequency 3 Hz to 50 percent of maximum selected frequency; 2) Maximum frequency 40 Hz to 60 Hz.

j. The controller efficiency at any speed shall not be less than 96 percent.

k. The controllers shall be capable of being restarted into a motor coasting in the forward direction without tripping.

l. Protection of power semiconductor components shall be accomplished without the use of fast acting semiconductor output fuses. Subjecting the controllers to any of the following conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for fuse replacement:

1. Short circuit at controller output

2. Ground fault at controller output

3. Open circuit at controller output

4. Input undervoltage

5. Input overvoltage

6. Loss of input phase

7. AC line switching transients

8. Instantaneous overload

9. Sustained overload exceeding 115 percent of controller rated current

10. Over temperature

11. Phase reversal

m. Solid state motor overload protection shall be included such that



current exceeding an adjustable threshold shall activate a 60 second timing circuit. Should current remain above the threshold continuously for the timing period, the controller will automatically shut down.

n. A slip compensation circuit shall be included which will sense changing motor load conditions and adjust output frequency to provide speed regulation of NEMA B motors to within plus or minus 0.5 percent of maximum speed without the necessity of a tachometer generator.

o. The VFD shall be factory set for manual restart after the first protective circuit trip for malfunction (overcurrent,undervoltage, overvoltage or overtemperature) or an interruption of power. The VFD shall be capable of being set for automatic restart after a selected time delay. If the drive faults again within a specified time period (adjustable 0-60 seconds), a manual restart will be required.

p. The VFD shall include external fault reset capability. All the necessary logic to accept an external fault reset contact shall be included.

q. Provide critical speed lockout circuitry to prevent operating at frequencies with critical harmonics that cause resonant vibrations. The VFD shall have a minimum of three user selectable bandwidths.

r. Provide the following operator control and monitoring devices mounted on the front panel of the VFD:

1. Manual speed potentiometer.

2. Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) switch.

3. Power on light.

4. Drive run power light.

5. Local display.

s. Provide properly sized NEMA rated by-pass and isolation contactors to enable operation of motor in the event of VFD failure. Mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be installed between the by-pass and isolation contactors. Provide a selector switch and transfer delay timer.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

Provide equipment enclosures conforming to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 6.


All wires and cables shall conform to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NFPA 70.

2.4 NAMEPLATES

Nameplates external to NEMA enclosures shall conform with the requirements of Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. Nameplates internal to enclosures shall be manufacturer's standard, with the exception that they must be permanent.




2.5.1 VFD Factory Test Plan

To ensure quality, each VFD shall be subject to a series of in-plant quality control inspections before approval for shipment from the manufacturer's facilities. Provide test plans and test reports.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Per NEMA ICS 3.1, install equipment in accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed installation drawings, instructions, wiring diagrams, and as indicated on project drawings and the approved shop drawings. A field representative of the drive manufacturer shall supervise the installation of all equipment, and wiring.


Specified products shall be tested as a system for conformance to specification requirements prior to scheduling the acceptance tests. Contractor shall conduct performance verification tests in the presence of Government representative, observing and documenting complete compliance of the system to the specifications. Contractor shall submit a signed copy of the test results, certifying proper system operation before scheduling tests.

3.2.1 VFD Test

A proposed test plan shall be submitted to the contracting officer at least 28 calendar days prior to proposed testing for approval. The tests shall conform to NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 7, and all manufacturer's safety regulations. The Government reserves the right to witness all tests and review any documentation. The contractor shall inform the Government at least 14 working days prior to the dates of testing. Contractor shall provide video tapes, if available, of all training provided to the Government for subsequent use in training new personnel. All training aids, texts, and expendable support material for a self-sufficient presentation shall be provided, the amount of which to be determined by the contracting officer.

3.2.2 Performance Verification Tests

"Performance Verification Test" plan shall provide the step by step procedure required to establish formal verification of the performance of the VFD. Compliance with the specification requirements shall be verified by inspections, review of critical data, demonstrations, and tests. The Government reserves the right to witness all tests, review data, and request other such additional inspections and repeat tests as necessary to ensure that the system and provided services conform to the stated requirements. The contractor shall inform the Government 14 calendar days prior to the date the test is to be conducted.

3.2.3 Endurance Test

Immediately upon completion of the performance verification test, the endurance test shall commence. The system shall be operated at varying rates for not less than 192 consecutive hours, at an average effectiveness



level of .9998, to demonstrate proper functioning of the complete PCS. Continue the test on a day-to-day basis until performance standard is met. During the endurance test, the contractor shall not be allowed in the building. The system shall respond as designed.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

3.3.1 Training

Coordinate training requirements with the Contracting Officer.

3.3.1.1 Instructions to Government Personnel

Provide the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in operation, maintenance, calibration, configuration, and programming of the complete control system. Orient the training specifically to the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with the subject matter they are to teach. The Government personnel designated to attend the training will have a high school education or equivalent. The number of training days of instruction furnished shall be as specified. A training day is defined as eight hours of instruction, including two 15-minute breaks and excluding lunch time; Monday through Friday. Provide a training manual for each student at each training phase which describes in detail the material included in each training program. Provide one additional copy for archiving. Provide equipment and materials required for classroom training. Provide a list of additional related courses, and offers, noting any courses recommended. List each training course individually by name, including duration, approximate cost per person, and location of course. Unused copies of training manuals shall be turned over to the Government at the end of last training session.

3.3.1.2 Operating Personnel Training Program

Provide one 2 hour training session at the site at a time and place mutually agreeable between the Contractor and the Government. Provide session to train 4 operation personnel in the functional operations of the system and the procedures that personnel will follow in system operation. This training shall include:

a. System overview

b. General theory of operation

c. System operation

d. Alarm formats

e. Failure recovery procedures

f. Troubleshooting

3.3.1.3 Engineering/Maintenance Personnel Training

Accomplish the training program as specified. Training shall be conducted on site at a location designated by the Government. Provide a one day training session to train 4 engineering personnel in the functional operations of the system. This training shall include:



a. System overview

b. General theory of operation

c. System operation

d. System configuration

e. Alarm formats

f. Failure recovery procedures

g. Troubleshooting and repair

h. Maintenance and calibration

i. System programming and configuration






SECTION 26 41 00

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

11/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1 Verification of Dimensions 1.2.2 System Requirements 1.2.3 Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Installation Drawings 1.4.1.1 Overall System Drawing 1.4.1.2 Major Components 1.4.2 Component UL Listed and Labeled 1.4.3 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan 1.4.4 Lightning Protection System Inspection Certificate 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Main and Bonding Conductors 2.1.2 Copper Only 2.2 COMPONENTS 2.2.1 Air Terminals 2.2.2 Ground Rods 2.2.3 Connections and Terminations 2.2.4 Connector Fittings

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INTEGRAL SYSTEM 3.1.1 Roof-Mounted Components 3.1.1.1 Air Terminals 3.1.1.2 Roof Conductors 3.1.2 Down Conductors 3.1.3 Ground Connections 3.1.4 Grounding Electrodes 3.2 APPLICATIONS 3.2.1 Nonmetallic Exterior Walls with Metallic Roof 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER STRUCTURES 3.3.1 Fences 3.3.2 Exterior Overhead Systems 3.4 RESTORATION 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5.1 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test



SECTION 26 41 00

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM11/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES






NFPA 780 (2014) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF)

AFI 32-1065 (1998) Grounding Systems



UL 96 (2005; Reprint Sep 2013) Standard for Lightning Protection Components

UL Electrical Constructn (2012) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory


1.2.1 Verification of Dimensions

Confirm all details of work, verify all dimensions in field, and advise Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work. Obtain prior approval of Contracting Officer before making any departures from the design.

1.2.2 System Requirements

Provide a system furnished under this specification consisting of the latest UL Listed products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in production of lightning protection system components. Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 780, and UL 96.



1.2.3 Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation

Provide documentation showing that the installer is certified with a commercial third-party inspection company whose sole work is lightning protection, or is a UL Listed Lightning Protection Installer. In either case, the documentation must show that they have completed and passed the requirements for certification or listing, and have a minimum of 2 years documented experience installing lightning protection systems for DoD projects of similar scope and complexity.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Overall lightning protection system; G, DO

Each major component; G, DO

SD-06 Test Reports

Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan; G, PO

Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test; G, PO

SD-07 Certificates

Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation; G, PO

Component UL Listed and Labeled

Lightning protection system inspection certificate; G, PO

Roof manufacturer's warranty; G, PO


In each standard referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" or "must" has been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these standards to "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean Contracting Officer.

1.4.1 Installation Drawings

1.4.1.1 Overall System Drawing

Submit installation shop drawing for the overall lightning protection system. Include on the drawings the physical layout of the equipment (plan view and elevations), mounting details, relationship to other parts of the work, and wiring diagrams.



1.4.1.2 Major Components

Submit detail drawings for each major component including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions.

1.4.2 Component UL Listed and Labeled

Submit proof of compliance that components are UL Listed and Labeled. Listing alone in UL Electrical Constructn, which is the UL Electrical Construction Directory, is not acceptable evidence. In lieu of Listed and Labeled, submit written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that items have been tested and conform to requirements and testing methods of Underwriters Laboratories.

1.4.3 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan

Provide a lightning protection and grounding system test plan. Detail both the visual inspection and electrical testing of the system and components in the test plan. Identify (number) the system test points/locations along with a listing or description of the item to be tested and the type of test to be conducted. As a minimum, include a sketch of the facility and surrounding lightning protection system as part of the specific test plan for each structure. Include the requirements specified in paragraph, "Testing of Integral Lightning Protection System" in the test plan.

1.4.4 Lightning Protection System Inspection Certificate

Provide certification from a commercial third-party inspection company whose sole work is lightning protection, stating that the lightning protection system complies with NFPA 780. Third party inspection company cannot be the system installer or the system designer. Alternatively, provide a UL Lightning Protection Inspection Master Label Certificate for each facility indicating compliance to NFPA 780.

Inspection must cover every connection, air terminal, conductor, fastener, accessible grounding point and other components of the lightning protection system to ensure 100% system compliance. This includes witnessing the tests for the resistance measurements for ground rods with test wells, and for continuity measurements for bonds. It also includes verification of proper surge protective devices for power, data and telecommunication systems. Random sampling or partial inspection of a facility is not acceptable.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

Confirm all details of work, verify all dimensions in field, and advise Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work. Obtain prior approval of Contracting Officer before changing the design.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Do not use a combination of materials that forms an electrolytic couple of such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. Where unusual conditions exist which would cause corrosion of conductors,



provide conductors with protective coatings, such as tin or lead, or oversize conductors. Where a mechanical hazard is involved, increase conductor size to compensate for the hazard or protect conductors. When metallic conduit or tubing is provided, electrically bond conductor to conduit or tubing at the upper and lower ends by clamp type connectors or welds (including exothermic). All lightning protection components, such as bonding plates, air terminals, air terminal supports and braces, chimney bands, clips, connector fittings, and fasteners are to comply with the requirements of UL 96 classes as applicable.

2.1.1 Main and Bonding Conductors

NFPA 780 and UL 96 Class I, Class II, or Class II modified materials as applicable.

2.1.2 Copper Only

Provide copper conductors, except where aluminum conductors are required for connection to aluminum equipment.

2.2 COMPONENTS

2.2.1 Air Terminals

Provide solid air terminals with a blunt tip. Tubular air terminals are not permitted. Support air terminals more than 24 inches in length by suitable brace, supported at not less than one-half the height of the terminal.

2.2.2 Ground Rods

Provide ground rods made of copper-clad steel conforming to conform to UL 467. Provide ground rods that are not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length. Do not mix ground rods of copper-clad steel or solid copper on the job.

2.2.3 Connections and Terminations

Provide connectors for splicing conductors that conform to UL 96, class as applicable. Conductor connections can be made by clamps or welds (including exothermic). Provide style and size connectors required for the installation.

2.2.4 Connector Fittings

Provide connector fittings for "end-to-end", "Tee", or "Y" splices that conform to NFPA 780 and UL 96.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INTEGRAL SYSTEM

Provide a lightning protection system that meets the requirements of NFPA 780. Lightning protection system consists of air terminals, roof conductors, down conductors, ground connections, grounding electrodes and ground ring electrode conductor. Expose conductors on the structures except where conductors are required to be in protective sleeves. Bond secondary conductors with grounded metallic parts within the building. Make interconnections within side-flash distances at or below the level of the grounded metallic parts.



3.1.1 Roof-Mounted Components

Coordinate with the roofing manufacturer and provide certification that the roof manufacturer's warranty is not violated by the installation methods for air terminals and roof conductors.

3.1.1.1 Air Terminals

In areas of snow or constant wind, ensure that a section of roofing material (minimum dimensional area of 1 square foot) is first glued to the roof and then the air terminal is glued to it unless the roof manufacturer recommends another solution. Use a standing seam base for installation of air terminals on a standing seam metal roof that does not produce any roof penetrations.

3.1.1.2 Roof Conductors

Use a standing seam base for installation of roof conductors on a standing seam metal roof that does not produce any roof penetrations.

3.1.2 Down Conductors

Protect exposed down conductors from physical damage as required by NFPA 780. Use Schedule 80 PVC to protect down conductors. Paint the Schedule 80 PVC to match the surrounding surface with paint that is approved for use on PVC.

3.1.3 Ground Connections

Attach each down conductor and ground ring electrode to ground rods by welding (including exothermic), brazing, or compression. All connections to ground rods below ground level must be by exothermic weld connection or with a high compression connection using a hydraulic or electric compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Accessible connections above ground level and in test wells can be accomplished by mechanical clamping.


Extend driven ground rods vertically into the existing undisturbed earth for a distance of not less 10 feet. Set ground rods not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet, from the structure foundation, and at least beyond the drip line for the facility. After the completed installation, measure the total resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Maximum allowed resistance of a driven ground rod is 25 ohms, under normally dry conditions . Contact the Contracting Officer for direction on how to proceed when two of any three ground rods, driven not less than 10 feet into the ground, a minimum of 10 feet apart, and equally spaced around the perimeter, give a combined value exceeding 50 ohms immediately after having driven. For ground ring electrode, provide continuous No. 4/0 bare stranded copper cable. Lay ground ring electrode around the perimeter of the structure in a trench not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet from the nearest point of the structure foundation, and at least beyond the drip line for the facility. Install ground ring electrode to a minimum depth of 30 inches. Install a ground ring electrode in earth undisturbed by excavation, not earth fill, and do not locate beneath roof overhang, or wholly under paved areas or roadways where rainfall cannot penetrate to keep soil moist in the vicinity of the cable.



3.2 APPLICATIONS

3.2.1 Nonmetallic Exterior Walls with Metallic Roof

Bond metal roof sections together which are insulated from each other so that they are electrically continuous, having a surface contact of at least 3 square inches.

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER STRUCTURES

3.3.1 Fences

Bond metal fence and gate systems to the lightning protection system whenever the fence or gate is within 6 feet of any part of the lightning protection system in accordance with ANSI C2.

3.3.2 Exterior Overhead Systems

Bond to the nearest down conductor as close to grade as possible. This includes overhead pipes, conduits, cable trays, or any other metallic objects on the exterior of the building that enter a building. In addition, bond pipes, conduits and to any metallic objects (such as steel structural support of air handling units or cooling towers) that are within 6 feet.

3.4 RESTORATION

Where sod has been removed, place sod as soon as possible after completing the backfilling. Restore, to original condition, the areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Overfill to accommodate for settling. Include necessary topsoil, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging or mulching in any restoration. Maintain disturbed surfaces and replacements until final acceptance.


3.5.1 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test

Test the lightning protection and grounding system to ensure continuity is not in excess of 1 ohm and that resistance to ground is not in excess of 10 ohms. Provide documentation for the measured values at each test point. Test the ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to the rod. Tie the grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Include in the written report: locations of test points, measured values for continuity and ground resistances, and soil conditions at the time that measurements were made. Submit results of each test to the Contracting Officer.






SECTION 26 42 14.10 10

FORT CARSON CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)

10/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.3.1 Services of "Corrosion Expert" 1.3.2 Contractor's Modifications 1.3.3 Summary of Services Required 1.3.4 Nonmetallic Pipe System 1.3.4.1 Coatings 1.3.4.2 Tracer Wire 1.3.5 Drawings 1.3.6 Achievement of Criteria for Protection 1.3.7 Metallic Components and Typicals 1.3.8 Metallic Component Coating

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MAGNESIUM ANODES 2.1.1 Anode Composition 2.1.2 Dimensions and Weights 2.1.3 Packaged Anodes 2.1.4 Anode Connecting Wire 2.1.4.1 Wire Requirements 2.1.4.2 Anode Header Cable 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 2.2.1 Electrical Wire 2.2.1.1 Wire Splicing 2.2.2 Test Boxes and Junctions Boxes 2.2.3 Joint, Patch, Seal, and Repair Coating 2.2.4 Backfill Shields 2.2.5 Epoxy Potting Compound 2.2.6 Test Stations 2.2.7 Joint and Continuity Bonds 2.2.8 Underground Structure Coating 2.2.8.1 Field Joints 2.2.9 Electrical Connections 2.2.10 Electrical Tape 2.2.11 Permanent Reference Electrodes

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CRITERIA OF PROTECTION 3.1.1 Iron and Steel 3.1.2 Copper Piping 3.2 ANODE STORAGE AND INSTALLATION

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 1


3.2.1 Anode Storage 3.2.2 Anode Installation 3.2.2.1 Single Anodes 3.2.2.2 Welding Methods 3.2.3 Anode Placement - General 3.2.4 Underground Metallic Component 3.2.5 Installation Details 3.2.6 Lead Wire Connections 3.2.6.1 Underground Metallic Components 3.2.7 Location of Test Stations 3.3 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION OF STRUCTURES 3.3.1 Gas Distribution Piping 3.4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 3.5 TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS 3.5.1 Baseline Potentials (Initial Testing) 3.5.2 Anode Output 3.5.3 Reference Electrode Potential Measurements (Final Testing) 3.5.4 Location of Measurements 3.5.4.1 Piping or Conduit 3.5.4.2 Holiday Test 3.5.4.3 Recording Measurements 3.6 TRAINING COURSE 3.7 CLEANUP 3.8 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION AND TESTING 3.8.1 Excavation 3.9 SPARE PARTS 3.10 SEEDING 3.11 SYSTEM TESTING


SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 2


SECTION 26 42 14.10 10

FORT CARSON CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)10/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM B418 (2009) Standard Specification for Cast and Wrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes

ASTM B843 (2007) Standard Specification for Magnesium Alloy Anodes for Cathodic Protection

ASTM D1248 (2012) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable

NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE RP0193 (2001) External Cathodic Protection of On-Grade Carbon Steel Storage Tank Bottoms

NACE RP0285 (2002) Corrosion Control of Underground Storage Tank Systems by Cathodic Protection

NACE SP0169 (1992; R 2007) Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

NACE SP0177 (2007) Mitigation of Alternating Current and Lightning Effects on Metallic Structures and Corrosion Control Systems

NACE SP0188 (1999; R 2006) Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates

NACE TM0497 (1997; R2002) Standard Test Method Measurement Techniques Related To Criteria For Cathodic Protection On Underground Or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems


NEMA TC 2 (2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 3





40 CFR 280 Technical Standards and Corrective Action Requirements for Owners and Operators of Underground Storage Tanks (UST)

49 CFR 192 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards

49 CFR 195 Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by Pipeline





1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings; G, DOContractor's Modifications; G, DO

SD-03 Product Data

Equipment; G, DOSpare Parts; G, RO

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests and Measurements[; G, PO]Contractor's Modifications; G, DO

SD-07 Certificates

Cathodic Protection System; G, DOServices of "Corrosion Expert"; G, DO

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 4



Cathodic Protection System; G, POTraining Course; G, PO

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete, operating, sacrificial anode cathodic protection system in complete compliance with NFPA 70, with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations and with minimum requirements of this contract. This specification covers cathodic protection for non-metallic underground utilities (i.e. water, sewer, industrial waste, gas, & storm drainage) that have metal fittings with contact with the earth. Cathodic protection limits surface corrosion by producing a continuous flow of direct current from sacrificial anodes to the metal fitting to be protected. The contractor shall furnish and install a complete, operating, magnesium sacrificial anode cathodic protection system. The services require planning, installation, adjusting, and testing of the system. If there are opportunities outside of the utility systems listed above (i.e. fire protection lines, their connectors, & lines / fittings under the slab or foundation) the contractor shall be responsible for analyzing and development of a Cathodic Protection Plan the will meet the protection requirements for that specific applications. The cathodic protection system shall include anodes, cables, connectors, corrosion protection test stations, and any other equipment required for a complete operating system providing the NACE criteria of protection as specified.

a. Within 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed, submit an itemized list of equipment and materials including item number, quantity, and manufacturer of each item. The list shall be accompanied by a description of procedures for each type of testing and adjustments, including testing of coating for thickness and holidays. Installation of materials and equipment shall not commence until this submittal is approved. The manufacturer's catalog data shall be submitted for the following items: anodes, electrical wire, electrical connections, CP test stations (boxes), and coatings (Wax-tape primer #1 wax-tape).

b. Submit proof that the materials and equipment furnished under this section conform to the specified requirements contained in the referenced standards or publications. The label or listing by the specified agency will be acceptable evidence of such compliance.

c. Before final acceptance of the cathodic protection system, submit six copies of operating manuals outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, adjustment of current flow, and shutdown. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features.

d. Submit Six copies of maintenance manual, listing routine maintenance procedures, recommendation for maintenance testing, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. The manuals shall include single-line diagrams for the system as installed; instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell and tank-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of monitoring; instructions for dielectric connections,

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 5


interference and sacrificial anode bonds; instructions shall include precautions to ensure safe conditions during repair of pipe or other metallic systems. The instructions shall be neatly bound between permanent covers and titled "Operating and Maintenance Instructions." These instructions shall be submitted for the Contracting Officer's approval. The instructions shall include the following Installation Documentation:

1. As-built drawings, to scale of the entire system, showing the locations of the piping, location of all anodes and test stations, location of protected fitting(s)/structure, locations of all insulating joints, and structure-to-reference cell potentials as measured during the tests required by Paragraph: TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS, of this section.

2. Recommendations for maintenance testing, including instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of testing.

3. All maintenance and operating instructions and nameplate data shall be in English.

4. Instructions shall include precautions to insure safe conditions during repair of pipe system.

5. Identify each protected fitting(s)/structure with a GPS coordinate.

6. Drawings shall show also show the unique alphanumeric number for each protected fitting(s)/structure.

7. Photographs shall be provided for each installation of protected fitting(s)/structure and shall show the following: i. Location of the anode in reference to the protected fitting/structure (both items should be visible in a single digitial photograph). ii. Alphanumberic Reference number; (that can be related to an exact location on the drawings). iii. Date of installation. iv. Contract description. v. Contract number.

8. Conduct and document soil resistivity testing. Soil resistivity testing must be performed to help verify the assumptions made in the calculations. Provide information in the report on where the soil sample was obtained and show soil resistivity locations on the scaled CADD drawings.

9. Provide a test report with the readings for each location. This shall include the date, time, native, instant off and connected.

10. Provide a scaled CADD drawing showing the protected fitting(s)/structure with its unique alphanumeric number, structure layout and route, location of anodes, GPS coordinates, and location of soil samples. Provide sufficient landmark information to easily find the items.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 6


1.3.1 Services of "Corrosion Expert"

The Contractor shall obtain the services of a "corrosion expert" to supervise, inspect, and test the installation and performance of the cathodic protection system. "Corrosion expert" refers to a person, who by thorough knowledge of the physical sciences and the principles of engineering and mathematics, acquired by professional education and related practical experience, is qualified to engage in the practice of corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic surfaces. Such a person must be accredited or certified by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) as a NACE Accredited Corrosion Specialist or a NACE certified Cathodic Protection (CP) Specialist or be a registered professional engineer who has certification or licensing that includes education and experience in corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic piping and tank systems, if such certification or licensing includes 5 years experience in corrosion control on underground metallic surfaces of the type under this contract. The "corrosion expert" shall make at least 3 visits to the project site. The first of these visits shall include reviewing the requirements with the installation contractor, conduct initial soil resistivity testing of the areas, review and approve the equipment and materials to be used, and review or prepare installation drawings for the cathodic protection required. Once the submittals are approved and the materials delivered, the "corrosion expert" shall revisit the site to ensure the Contractor understands installation practices, conduct onsite training of contractor personnel, laying out the components and initial testing. The third visit shall involve testing the installed cathodic protection systems and training applicable personnel on proper maintenance techniques. The "corrosion expert" shall monitor the installation; verify the contractor's installation procedures, and complete the final testing of all cathodic protection.

Submit evidence of qualifications of the "corrosion expert."

a. The "corrosion expert's" name and qualifications shall be certified in writing to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction.

b. Certification shall be submitted giving the name of the firm, the number of years of experience, and a list of not less than five (5) of the firm's installations three (3) or more years old that have been tested and found satisfactory.

1.3.2 Contractor's Modifications

a. The specified system is based on a complete system with magnesium sacrificial anodes. The Contractor may modify the cathodic protection system after review of the project, site verification, and analysis, if the proposed modifications include the anodes specified and will provide better overall system performance. The modifications shall be fully described, shall be approved by the Contracting Officer's representative, and shall meet the following criteria. The proposed system shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts with reference to a saturated copper-copper sulfate reference cell on the underground components of the piping or other metallic surface. The Contractor shall take resistivity measurements of the soil in the vicinity of the pipes and ground bed sites. Based upon the measurements taken, the current and voltage shall be required to produce a minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the structure being tested and the reference cell. The anode system shall be designed for a life of

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 7


twenty-five (25) years of continuous operation.

b. Submit six copies of detail drawings showing proposed changes in location, scope of performance indicating any variations from, additions to, or clarifications of contract drawings. The drawings shall show proposed changes in anode arrangement, anode size and number, anode materials and layout details, conduit size, wire size, mounting details, wiring diagram, method for electrically-isolating each pipe, and any other pertinent information to proper installation and performance of the system.

c. Submit final report regarding Contractor's modifications. The report shall include pipe-to-soil measurements throughout the affected area, indicating that the modifications improved the overall conditions, and current measurements for anodes. The following special materials and information are required: taping materials and conductors; zinc grounding cell, installation and testing procedures, and equipment; coating material; system design calculations for anode number, life, and parameters to achieve protective potential; backfill shield material and installation details showing waterproofing; bonding and waterproofing details; insulated resistance wire; exothermic weld equipment and material.

1.3.3 Summary of Services Required

The scope of services shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

a. Cathodic Protection Systems.

b. System testing.

c. Training.

d. Operating and maintenance manual.

e. Coating and holiday testing shall be submitted within 45 days of notice to proceed.

1.3.4 Nonmetallic Pipe System

All metallic components on a nonmetallic pipe system shall be protected with cathodic protection. Detailed drawings of cathodic protection for each component shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval within 45 days after date of receipt of notice to proceed, and before commencement of any work.

1.3.4.1 Coatings

Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic fittings. Protective covering (coating and taping) shall be completed and tested on each metallic component (such as valves, hydrants and fillings). This covering shall be as required for underground metallic pipe. Each test shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected as specified in these specifications. The use of nonmetallic pipe does not change other requirements of the specifications. Any deviations due to the use of nonmetallic pipe shall be submitted for approval.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 8


1.3.4.2 Tracer Wire

When a nonmetallic pipe line is used to extend or add to an existing metallic line, an insulated No. 8 AWG copper wire shall be thermit-welded to the existing metallic line and run the length of the new nonmetallic line. This wire shall be used as a locator tracer wire and to maintain continuity to any future extensions of the pipe line. Protect underground utility tracer wires with a 1-lb anode for every 400-feet of wire (no test station is needed for this situation).

1.3.5 Drawings

Detailed drawings shall be provided showing location of anodes, insulated fittings, test stations, and bonding. Submit six copies of detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and material including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, results of system design calculations including soil-resistivity, installation instructions and certified test data stating the maximum recommended anode current output density. Detail drawings shall contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a unit. Drawings shall show all test station locations and protected fittings and structures along with a corresponding GPS coordinate for each test station/fitting/structure. Drawings shall show all protected fitting(s)/structures with its unique alphanumeric number.

1.3.6 Achievement of Criteria for Protection

All conductors, unless otherwise shown or specified herein, shall be routed to or through the test stations. Each system provided shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolt potentials with reference to a saturated copper-copper-sulfate reference cell on all underground components of the piping. Based upon the measurements taken, the current and voltage of the anodes should be adjusted as required to produce a minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the structure being tested and the reference cell. This must be achieved without the "instant off" potential exceeding 1150 millivolts. Testing will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Additional anodes shall be provided by the Contractor if required to achieve the minus 850 millivolts "instant off". Although acceptance criteria of the cathodic protection systems are defined in NACE SP0169, for this project the "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts is the only acceptable criteria.

1.3.7 Metallic Components and Typicals

Each metallic water line appurtenances shall be cathodically protected with magnesium anode(s) with calculations that show at least a 25-year continuous life expectancy or greater. Additional anodes shall be added to meet the minimum 25-year life where necessary. The "corrosion expert" may combine protected fittings to one single anode; provided the calculations show at least a 25-year continuous life expectancy or greater is met. No more than three fittings shall be protected by a single anode. The following are typical installation configurations.

1.3.8 Metallic Component Coating

Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic fittings as indicated. This will include fire hydrants, T's, elbows, valves, etc.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 9


Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected as specified in these specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MAGNESIUM ANODES

2.1.1 Anode Composition

Anodes shall be of high-potential magnesium alloy, made of primary magnesium obtained from sea water or brine, and not made from scrap metal. Magnesium anodes shall conform to ASTM B843 and to the following analysis (in percents) otherwise indicated:

Aluminum, max. 0.010Manganese, max. 0.50 to 1.30Zinc 0.05Silicon, max. 0.05Copper, max. 0.02Nickel, max. 0.001Iron, Max. 0.03Other impurities, max. 0.05 each or 0.3 max. totalMagnesium Remainder

The Contractor shall furnish spectrographic analysis on samples from each heat or batch of anodes used on this project.

2.1.2 Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions and weights of anodes shall be approximately as follows:

TYPICAL MAGNESIUM ANODE SIZE

(Cross sections may be round, square, or D shaped)

NOMINAL GROSS NOMINAL APPROX. WT lb PACKAGED NOMINAL PACKAGE WT. LBS. SIZE (IN) IN BACKFILL DIMENSIONS (IN) _________________________________________________________________________

3 3 X 3 X 5 8 5-1/4 X 5-1/4 X 8 5 3 X 3 X 8 13 5-1/4 X 5-1/4 X 11-1/4 9 3 X 3 X 14 27 5-1/4 X 20 12 4 X 4 X 12 32 7-1/2 X 18 17 4 X 4 X 17 45 7-1/2 X 24

2.1.3 Packaged Anodes

Anodes shall be provided in packaged form with the anode surrounded by specially-prepared quick-wetting backfill and contained in a water permeable cloth or paper sack. Anodes shall be centered by means of spacers in the backfill material. The backfill material shall have the following composition, unless otherwise indicated:

Material Approximate Percent by Weight

Gypsum 75Bentonite 20

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 10


Sodium Sulphate 5

Total 100

2.1.4 Anode Connecting Wire

2.1.4.1 Wire Requirements

Wire shall be at a minimum No. 12 AWG type TW, RHW, RHW-2, THHW, THW, XHHW-2 or HMWPE solid copper wire, color black or white, not less than 10-feet long, un-spliced, complying with NFPA 70, Direct Bury insulation. Connecting wires for magnesium anodes shall be factory installed with the place of emergence from the anode in a cavity sealed flush with a dielectric-sealing compound. Connecting wires for magnesium anodes shall be factory installed with the place or emergence from the anode in a cavity sealed flush with a dielectric sealing compound.

2.1.4.2 Anode Header Cable

Cable for anode header and distribution shall be No. 10 AWG stranded copper wire with type CP high molecular weight polyethylene, 7/64 inch thick insulation, 600-volt rating.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

2.2.1 Electrical Wire

Wire shall be at a minimum No. 12 AWG type TW, RHW, RHW-2, THHW, THW, XHHW-2 or HMWPE, two (2) solid copper wires, color red, cad-welded (or approved method) to each fitting, not less than 10-feet long, un-spliced, and complying with NFPA 70. A statistical/representative sample of metal fitting electrical wires shall be installed and connected through a test station to provide continued maintenance data and represent all cathodic protection installed in that area. The metal fitting wires shall be brought through a small pvc conduit with adequate slack in the connecting wire to compensate for movement during backfill operation and future maintenance testing.

2.2.1.1 Wire Splicing

Connecting wire splicing shall be made with copper compression connectors or exothermic welds, following instructions of the manufacturer. Single split-bolt connections shall not be used. Sheaths for encapsulating electrical wire splices to be buried underground shall fit the insulated wires entering the spliced joints and epoxy potting compound shall be as specified below.

2.2.2 Test Boxes and Junctions Boxes

Boxes shall be outdoor type conforming to UL 514A.

2.2.3 Joint, Patch, Seal, and Repair Coating

Coating compound shall be cold-applied wax base material. Wax-tape primer and #1 wax-tape shall be used to cover bolts and exposed uncoated metal fittings. (Trenton Corporation, 313-426-3955, Wax-tape primer / #1 Wax-tape or approved equal)Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to UL 510.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 11


2.2.4 Backfill Shields

Shields shall consist of approved pipeline wrapping or fiberglass-reinforced, coal-tar impregnated tape, or plastic weld caps, specifically made for the purpose and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. When joint bonds are required, due to the use of mechanical joints, the entire joint shall be protected by the use of a kraft paper joint cover. The joint cover shall be filled with poured-in, hot coat-tar enamel.

2.2.5 Epoxy Potting Compound

Compound for encapsulating electrical wire splices to be buried underground shall be a two package system made for the purpose.

2.2.6 Test Stations

Stations shall be of the flush-curb-box type; H-20 rated, and shall be the standard product of a recognized manufacturer (HANDLEY or equal). They are to be installed in a 12 to 18-inch concrete ring 4-inch thick at final grade. The test station shall be provided with a lockable cover and shall have an embossed legend, "C.P. Test." Test stations shall be complete with an insulated terminal block having the required number of terminals. A minimum of two (2) leads are required to the metallic object from each test station. Other conductors shall be provided for each anode. Contractor shall splice wires together from the anode to the metallic object at one point connection inside the test station. Contractor shall coil 18-inches of extra wire into the station for maintenance.

The location of the test station shall not be greater that (10) ten feet from the anode.

Stations shall be maintenance free and all hardware such as machine screws, washers, and hex nuts shall be brass or stainless steel.

2.2.7 Joint and Continuity Bonds

Continuity Bonds: In cases where a restraining devices (Meg-a-lug) is used in conjunction with a hydrant, valve, or coupling; two No. 8 AWG type TW, RHW, RHW-2, THHW, THW, XHHW-2 or HMWPE stranded copper, coated for direct bury wires shall be cad-welded (or approved method) between the restraining device and the fitting.

2.2.8 Underground Structure Coating

This coating specification shall take precedence over any other project specification and drawing notes, whether stated or implied, and shall also apply to the pipeline or tank supplier. No variance in coating quality shall be allowed by the Contractor or Base Construction Representative without the written consent of the designer. All underground metallic pipelines and tanks to be cathodically protected shall be afforded a good quality factory-applied coating. This includes all carbon steel, cast-iron and ductile-iron pipelines or vessels. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected as specified. If non-metallic pipelines are installed, all metallic fittings on pipe sections shall be coated in accordance with this specification section.

The nominal thickness of the metallic pipe joint or other component coating shall be 8 mils, plus or minus 5 percent.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 12


Pipe and joint coating for factory applied or field repair material shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be one of the following:

a. Continuously extruded polyethylene and adhesive coating system. b. Polyvinyl chloride pressure-sensitive adhesive tape. c. High density polyethylene/bituminous rubber compound tape. d. Butyl rubber tape. e. Coal tar epoxy.

2.2.8.1 Field Joints

All field joints shall be coated with materials compatible with the pipeline coating compound. The joint coating material shall be applied to an equal thickness as the pipeline coating. Unbonded coatings shall not be used on these buried metallic components. This includes the elimination of all unbonded polymer wraps or tubes. Once the pipeline or vessel is set in the trench, an inspection of the coating shall be conducted. This inspection shall include electrical holiday detection. Any damaged areas of the coating shall be properly repaired. The Contracting Officer shall be asked to witness inspection of the coating and testing using a holiday detector.

2.2.9 Electrical Connections

Electrical connections shall be done as follows:

a. Exothermic welds shall be "Cadweld", " Bundy", "Thermoweld", or an approved equal. Use of this material shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The connection area shall be cleaned to bare metal by means of scraping, filing or other approved methods.

2.2.10 Electrical Tape

Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to UL 510.

2.2.11 Permanent Reference Electrodes

Permanent reference electrodes shall be Cu-CuS04 electrodes suitable for direct burial. Electrodes shall be guaranteed by the supplier for 15 years' service in the environment in which they shall be placed. Electrodes shall be installed directly beneath pipe, or metallic component.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CRITERIA OF PROTECTION

Acceptance criteria for determining the adequacy of protection on a buried underground metallic component shall be in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as specified below. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All uncoated flange bolts, uncoated mechanical fitting bolts, any other uncoated bolts and uncoated flanges or fittings with metallic composition shall be protected with wax-tape primer and #1 wax-tape. (Trenton Corporation, 313-426-3955, Wax-tape primer / #1 Wax-tape or approved equal) Do not wrap plastic around any metallic water line appurtenances for corrosion protection.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 13


3.1.1 Iron and Steel

The following method a. shall be used for testing cathodic protection voltages. If more than one method is required, method b. shall be used.

a. A negative voltage of at least minus 850 millivolts as measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode connecting the earth (electrolyte) directly over the underground component. Determination of this voltage shall be made with the cathodic protection system in operation. Voltage drops shall be considered for valid interpretation of this voltage measurement. A minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the underground component being tested and the reference cell shall be achieved. Adequate number of measurements shall be obtained over the entire metallic component to verify and record achievement of minus 850 millivolts "instant off."

b. A minimum polarization voltage shift of 100 millivolts as measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth directly over the underground component. This polarization voltage shift shall be determined by interrupting the protective current and measuring the polarization decay. When the protective current is interrupted, an immediate voltage shift will occur. The voltage reading, after the immediate shift, shall be used as the base reading from which to measure polarization decay.

3.1.2 Copper Piping

Copper water lines and associated fittings do not require any cathodic protection.

3.2 ANODE STORAGE AND INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Anode Storage

Storage area for magnesium anodes will be designated by the Contracting Officer. If anodes are not stored in a building, tarps or similar protection should be used to protect anodes from inclement weather. Packaged anodes, damaged as a result of improper handling or being exposed to rain, shall be resacked by the Contractor and the required backfill added.

3.2.2 Anode Installation

Each metallic water line appurtenances shall be cathodically protected with magnesium anode(s) with calculations that show at least a 25-year continuous life expectancy or greater. Additional anodes shall be added to meet the minimum 25-year life where necessary. The "corrosion expert" may combine protected fittings to one single anode; provided the calculations show at least a 25-year continuous life expectancy or greater is met. No more than three fittings shall be protected by a single anode.

Anodes shall be installed at all locations where metal components are installed on any underground utility system (i.e. hydrant, valve, tee, one-bolt, and mechanical fitting). Anode locations may be changed to clear obstructions if approved.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 14


3.2.2.1 Single Anodes

A statistical/representative sample of anodes shall be installed and connected through a test station to provide continued maintenance data and represent all cathodic protection installed in that area. Instead of bringing every anode system into a test station some will be permanently buried (see paragraph 3.2.7). The anode wire and metal fitting electrical wires shall be brought through a small pvc conduit with adequate slack in the connecting wire to compensate for movement during backfill operation and future maintenance testing.

3.2.2.2 Welding Methods

Connections to metallic components and ferrous pipe shall be made by exothermic weld methods manufactured for the type of component or pipe supplied.

3.2.3 Anode Placement - General

Packaged anodes shall be installed completely dry, in native soil, installed horizontally to a depth at least as deep as the bottom of the pipe, and shall be lowered into holes by rope sling or by grasping the cloth gather. The anode lead wire shall not be used in lowering the anodes. The hole shall be backfilled with fine native soil in 6-inch layers and each layer shall be hand-tamped around the anode. Care must be exercised not to strike the anode or lead wire with the tamper. If immediate testing is to be performed, water shall be added only after backfilling and tamping has been completed to a point 6-inches above the anode (leaving a pocket above the anode). Approximately 5-gallons of water may be poured into the hole. After the water has been absorbed by the soil, backfilling and tamping may be completed to the top of the hole. In the event a rock strata is encountered prior to achieving specified augered-hole depth, anodes may be installed horizontally to a depth at least as deep as the bottom of the pipe, with the approval of the Contracting Officer.

3.2.4 Underground Metallic Component

Anodes shall be installed at a minimum of 3 feet and a maximum of 10 feet from the line to be protected. The anode may be laid in the same trench adjacent to the Plastic Pipe, in native soil, and at a depth below the pipeline but no closer than 6-inches to the pipe.

3.2.5 Installation Details

Details shall conform to the requirements of this specification. Details shown on the drawings are indicative of the general type of material required, and are not intended to restrict selection to material of any particular manufacturer.

3.2.6 Lead Wire Connections

3.2.6.1 Underground Metallic Components

The contractor shall Cad-weld two red No. 12 AWG type TW, RHW, RHW-2, THHW, THW, XHHW-2 or HMWPE (minimum) coated for direct bury, solid copper wires, to each fitting, not less than 10 feet long, un-spliced, and complying with NFPA 70.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 15


Bonding wire for restraining devices (Meg-a-lug) (see section 2.2.7 Joint and Continuity Bonds).

After the wire lead or test lead to the fitting connections have been made, they shall be capped with petroleum caps (Handi-caps by Roystom) and or covered with wax sealant.

The metallic fitting and anode test leads shall be installed in pvc conduit and connected through a test station allowing adequate slack (18 to 24-inches) in the wire to compensate for movement during backfill operation and future maintenance testing.

3.2.7 Location of Test Stations

Test stations shall be of the type and location shown and shall be curb box mounted. A statistical/representative sample of Cathodic Protection Test Stations shall be installed to provide continued maintenance data and represent all cathodic protection installed in that area. Instead of bringing every anode system into a test station some will be permanently buried. The contractor shall ensure that adequate protection has been provided as specified by this specification, under the guidance of the "Corrosion Expert" and proper Quality Control has been conducted.

In situations where you have a cluster of fittings provide one statistical/representative reference test station for the below situations:

a. Tee with valves (1-2 or 3 valves) b. Tee with valve and hydrant within 50-feet c. Tee with valve to one service line d. Mechanical joint and valve (same location)

Test station shall be of the type indicated in paragraph 2.2.6, installed at anode locations, and shall be flush mounted in concrete (12 to 18-inch ring). Where possible combine the Cathodic Test Station, Valve Box, and Tracer Wire Test Stations in the same concrete pad.

Test stations shall be installed with color-coded covers to identify the system on which it is installed as specified in this specification. Color codes shall be:

Color UtilityRed; ElectricYellow; Gas, Oil, Dangerous MaterialsOrange; Telephone & Other CommunicationsBlue; Water SystemsGreen; Sewer Systems

Identify the fitting and control wires in the test station. Flush mount test stations shall be installed in low or no traffic areas.

3.3 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION OF STRUCTURES

3.3.1 Gas Distribution Piping

Electrical isolation shall be provided at each building riser pipe to the pressure regulator, at all points where a short to another structure or to a foreign structure may occur, and at other locations as indicated on the drawings.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 16


3.4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Trenching and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK .

3.5 TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS

Submit test reports in booklet form tabulating all field tests and measurements performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system and including close interval potential survey, casing and interference tests, final system test verifying protection, insulated joint and bond tests, and holiday coating test. A certified test report showing that the connecting method has passed a 120-day laboratory test without failure at the place of connection, wherein the anode is subjected to maximum recommended current output while immersed in a three percent sodium chloride solution. Booklet shall have the testing data separated by into two groups: Initial Testing and Final Testing.

3.5.1 Baseline Potentials (Initial Testing)

Calculations shall be provided to show at least a 25 year life for the cathodic protection system(s) prior to the installation and again after testing. Design and installation shall meet the requirements of NACE SP0169for metallic piping and metallic components and NACE RP0285 for underground storage tanks. Proper protection shall be provided by showing that one of the criterions in NACE TM0497 is met. The measurements shall be cross referenced to each test station. Each test station shall have a unique alphanumeric identification, photographs of the installation, and shall have GPS coordinates.

The Contractor shall take a measurement at the time of installation to ensure continuity between the test wire at the fitting and test wire at the anode.

Each test and measurement will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of five (5) working days prior to each test. After backfill of the pipe/metallic component, the static potential-to-soil of the metallic component shall be measured. The location of the measurements shall include a measurement near the metallic compent, but away from the anode. The initial measurements shall be recorded.

3.5.2 Anode Output

As the anodes or groups of anodes are connected to the pipe/metallic component, current output shall be measured with an approved clamp-on milliammeter, calibrated shunt with a suitable millivoltmeter or multimeter, or a low resistance ammeter. (Of the three methods, the low-resistance ammeter is the least desirable and most inaccurate. The clamp-on milliammeter is the most accurate.) The values obtained and the date, time, and location shall be recorded.

3.5.3 Reference Electrode Potential Measurements (Final Testing)

Upon completion of the installation and with the entire cathodic protection system in operation, electrode potential measurements shall be made using a copper-copper sulphate reference electrode and a potentiometer-voltmeter, or a direct-current voltmeter having an internal resistance (sensitivity)

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 17


of not less than 10 megohms per volt and a full scale of 10 volts. The locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations used for baseline potentials. The values obtained and the date, time, and locations of measurements shall be recorded.

The "corrosion expert" verifies the contractor's installation procedures, and completes the final testing of all cathodic protection. Values obtained, date, time, and location shall be recorded and submitted with the documentation shown in paragraph ANODE STORAGE AND INSTALLATION. Final potential readings shall meet NACE criteria for cathodic protection.

3.5.4 Location of Measurements

3.5.4.1 Piping or Conduit

For coated metallic component, measurements shall be taken from the reference electrode located in contact with the earth, directly over the metallic component.

3.5.4.2 Holiday Test

Any damage to the protective covering during transit and handling shall be repaired before installation. After field-coating and wrapping has been applied, the entire pipe shall be inspected by an electric holiday detector with impressed current in accordance with NACE SP0188 using a full-ring, spring-type coil electrode. The holiday detector shall be equipped with a bell, buzzer, or other type of audible signal which sounds when a holiday is detected. Holidays in the protective covering shall be repaired upon detection. Occasional checks of holiday detector potential will be made by the Contracting Officer to determine suitability of the detector. Labor, materials, and equipment necessary for conducting the inspection shall be furnished by the Contractor. The coating system shall be inspected for holes, voids, cracks, and other damage during installation.

3.5.4.3 Recording Measurements

All pipe- or metallic component- to-soil potential measurements, including initial potentials where required, shall be recorded. The Contractor shall locate, correct and report to the Contracting Officer any short circuits to foreign pipes encountered during checkout of the installed cathodic protection system.

3.6 TRAINING COURSE

The Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total of 2 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. Submit the proposed Training Course Curriculum (including topics and dates of discussion) indicating that all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions, are to be covered. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions. At least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of the training course, the training course curriculum shall be submitted for approval, along with the proposed training date. Training shall consist of demonstration of

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 18


test equipment, providing forms for test data and the tolerances which indicate that the system works.

3.7 CLEANUP

The Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup of the construction site. All paper bags, wire clippings, etc., shall be disposed of as directed. Paper bags, wire clippings and other waste shall not be put in bell holes or anodes excavation.

3.8 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION AND TESTING

3.8.1 Excavation

In the event rock is encountered in providing the required depth for anodes, the Contractor shall determine an alternate approved location and, if the depth is still not provided, an alternate plan shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer. Alternate techniques and depths must be approved prior to implementation.

3.9 SPARE PARTS

After approval of shop drawings, and not later than three (3) months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy, the Contractor shall furnish spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. In addition, the Contractor shall supply information for material and equipment replacement for all other components of the complete system, including anodes, cables, splice kits and connectors, corrosion test stations, and any other components not listed above.

Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than three (3) months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. One (1) spare anode of each type shall be furnished.

3.10 SEEDING

Seeding shall be done by the Contractor, as directed, in all unsurfaced locations disturbed by this construction. In areas where grass cover exists, it is possible that sod can be carefully removed, watered, and stored during construction operations, and replaced after the operations are completed since it is estimated that no section of pipeline should remain uncovered for more than two (2) days. The use of sod in lieu of seeding shall require approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.11 SYSTEM TESTING

The Contractor shall submit a report including potential measurements taken at adequately-close intervals to establish that minus 850 millivolts potential, "instant-off" potential, is provided, and that the cathodic protection is not providing interference to other foreign pipes causing damage to paint or pipes. The report shall provide a narrative describing how the criteria of protection is achieved without damaging other pipe or structures in the area.

SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 19



SECTION 26 42 14.10 10 Page 20

NO CP Number and Description Test Station # Anode 1 Anode 2 Anode 3 Anode 4 Installation Detail

1 CP-1 = 10"X8"X6" T & 8" Valve TS # 1 17lb 17lb 17lb # 1A2 CP-2 = 8" Fire Sprinkler Riser none 17lb 17lb

3 CP-3 = 4" Domestic Water Riser TS # 3 17lb # 3A 4 CP-4 = 6" 90 Degree Bend TS # 4 17lb 17lb

5 CP-5 = 10" 90 Degree Bend none 17lb

6 CP-6 = 10"X10" T & Valve TS # 6 17lb 17lb # 27 CP-7 = 6"X6" T & Valve none 17lb 17lb

8 CP-8 = 4" T TS # 8 17lb # 119 CP-9 = 6" Fire Hydrant & Valve none 17lb 17lb 17lb

10 CP-10 = 6" Fire Hydrant, Valve & T TS # 10 17lb 17lb 17lb

11 CP-11

12 CP-12

13 CP-13

14 CP-14

15 CP-15

16 CP-16

17 CP-17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Typical Cathodic Protection Installation detail schedule

2/6/2015

26 42 14.10 10 Attachment - Sample CP Installation Schedule (1).xls 1 of 1

2/6/2015

STRUCTURE/LOCATION: Ft. Carson DATE OBTAINED: SURVEYED BY:

NO CP Number and Description Test Station #

1 CP-1 #DIV/0!

2 CP-2 #DIV/0!

3 CP-3 #DIV/0!

4 CP-4 #DIV/0!

5 CP-5 #DIV/0!

6 CP-6 = 8" Valve TS # 6 23 1234 1234 1234 1234 45 22 38 38' 43.501 104' 45.766

7 CP-7 #DIV/0!

8 CP-8 = 8" 90 elobw 0 #DIV/0! 38' 43.508 104' 45.813

9 CP-9 #DIV/0!

10 CP-10 #DIV/0!

11 CP-11 #DIV/0!

12 CP-12 #DIV/0!

13 CP-13 #DIV/0!

14 CP-14 #DIV/0!

15 CP-15 = Deleted #DIV/0!

16 CP-16 #DIV/0!

17 CP-17 #DIV/0!

18 #DIV/0!

19 #DIV/0!

20 #DIV/0!

21 #DIV/0!

22 #DIV/0!

23 #DIV/0!

Fitting deleted from -------

Anode direct connected

GPS WEST

(Longitude)

TABLE A PAGE 1 OF 3

TEST STATION/WIRE IDENTIFICATION NTV SSP ANODE 1 ANODE 2 "ON"

SSP

STRUCTURE TO SOIL POTENTIALS (SSP )

SSP = - (NEG) DC MILLiVOLTS NTV = NATIVE; CRI = CRITERIA; IAO = ANODE CURRENT)

"OFF" SSP COMMENTSCRI IAO

(MA'S)ANODE

LIFEGPS NORTH

(Latitude)

26 42 14.10 10 Attachment - Sample CP Installation Schedule (2).xls 1 OF 3

23 #DIV/0!

24 #DIV/0!

AVERAGES 23 1234 1234 1234 1234 45 22.0 #DIV/0!

0

5

10

15

20

25

0 200 400 600 800

1000 1200 1400

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

CATHODIC PROTECTION EVALUATION NATIVE "ON" SSP "OFF" SSP CRITERIA ANODE OUTPUT mAs


2/6/2015

STRUCTURE/LOCATION: DATE OBTAINED: SURVEYED BY:


25 #DIV/0!

26 #DIV/0!

27 #DIV/0!

28 #DIV/0!

29 #DIV/0!

30 #DIV/0!

31 #DIV/0!

32 #DIV/0!

33 #DIV/0!

34 #DIV/0!

35 #DIV/0!

36 #DIV/0!

37 #DIV/0!

38 #DIV/0!

39 #DIV/0!

40 #DIV/0!

41 #DIV/0!

42 #DIV/0!

43 #DIV/0!

44 #DIV/0!

45 #DIV/0!

46 #DIV/0!

47 #DIV/0!

STRUCTURE TO SOIL POTENTIALS (SSP )TABLE A

PAGE 2 OF 3 SSP = - (NEG) DC MILLiVOLTS NTV = NATIVE; CRI = CRITERIA; IAO = ANODE CURRENT)


SSP"OFF" SSP CRI IAO

(MA'S)ANODE

LIFEGPS NORTH

(Latitude)

GPS WEST

(Longitude)COMMENTS


47 #DIV/0!

48 #DIV/0!

AVERAGES #### #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ##### #DIV/0! #### #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

0

5

10

15

20

25

0 200 400 600 800

1000 1200 1400

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24



2/6/2015

STRUCTURE/LOCATION: DATE OBTAINED: SURVEYED BY:


4950515253545556575859606162636465666768697071

STRUCTURE TO SOIL POTENTIALS (SSP )TABLE A

PAGE 3 OF 3 SSP = - (NEG) DC MILLiVOLTS NTV = NATIVE; CRI = CRITERIA; IAO = ANODE CURRENT)


SSP"OFF" SSP CRI IAO

(MA'S)ANODE

LIFEGPS NORTH

(Latitude)

GPS WEST

(Longitude)COMMENTS


7172

AVERAGES #### #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ##### #DIV/0! #### #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

ALL AVERAGE 23 1234 1234 1234 1234 45 22 #DIV/0!

0

5

10

15

20

25

0

500

1000

1500

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24






SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING

07/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4.1 Lighting Control System 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6.1 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts 1.6.2 Lighting Fixtures, Complete With Lamps and Ballasts 1.6.3 Regulatory Requirements 1.6.4 Standard Products 1.6.4.1 Alternative Qualifications 1.6.4.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date 1.6.4.3 Energy Efficiency 1.7 WARRANTY 1.7.1 Electronic Ballast Warranty 1.8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE 1.9 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1.9.1 Local/Regional Materials 1.9.2 Environmental Data

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.1.1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts 2.1.1.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast 2.1.1.2 F17T8 Lamp Ballast 2.1.2 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Dimming Ballast 2.1.2.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast 2.1.3 Dimming Ballast Controls 2.1.4 Light Level Sensor 2.1.5 Fluorescent Lamps 2.1.6 Compact Fluorescent Fixtures 2.2 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES 2.3 SUSPENDED FIXTURES 2.4 SWITCHES 2.4.1 Toggle Switches 2.4.2 Incandescent Dimmer Switch 2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTOR 2.6 TIME SWITCH 2.7 PHOTOCELL SWITCH 2.8 EXIT SIGNS 2.8.1 Self-Powered LED Type Exit Signs (Battery Backup) 2.8.2 Remote-Powered Exit Signs



2.9 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 2.10 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS 2.10.1 Wires 2.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.11.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate 2.11.2 Labels 2.12 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Lamps 3.1.2 Lighting Fixtures 3.1.3 Suspended Fixtures 3.1.4 Ballasts 3.1.4.1 Electronic Dimming Ballasts 3.1.5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units 3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming 3.1.7 Occupancy Sensor 3.1.8 Light Level Sensor 3.2 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.3.1 Electronic Dimming Ballast 3.3.2 Occupancy Sensor




SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING07/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A1008/A1008M (2013) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened

ASTM A580/A580M (2013b) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM A641/A641M (2009a) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

ASTM A653/A653M (2013) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B164 (2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire

ASTM B633 (2013) Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

ASTM E2129 (2010) Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products

CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)

CEC Title 24 (2008; Effective Jan 2010) California's Energy Efficiency Standards for Residential and Nonresidential Buildings

GREEN SEAL (GS)

GS-12 (1997) Occupancy Sensors

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IES)

IES HB-10 (2011) IES Lighting Handbook









ANSI ANSLG C78.41 (2006) For Electric Lamps--Guidelines for Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps

ANSI ANSLG C78.42 (2009) For Electric Lamps: High-Pressure Sodium Lamps

ANSI C78.1381 (1998) American National Standard for Electric Lamps - 250-Watt, 70 Watt, M85 Metal-Halide Lamps

ANSI C78.901 (2005) American National Standard for Electric Lamps - Single Base Fluorescent Lamps--Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics

ANSI C82.1 (2004) American National Standard for Electric Lamp Ballasts - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

ANSI C82.2 (2002) American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts--Methods of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

ANSI C82.4 (2002) American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)

ANSI/ANSLG C78.43 (2013) American National Standard for Electric Lamps - Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps


NEMA ANSLG C78.81 (2013) American National Standard for Electric Lamps--Double-Capped Fluorescent Lamps--Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics

NEMA ANSLG C82.11 (2011) Lamp Ballasts - High-Frequency



Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

NEMA C136.10 (2010) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles--Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing



NEMA LL 1 (1997; R 2002) Procedures for Linear Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and the TCLP Extraction


NFPA 101 (2012; Amendment 1 2012) Life Safety Code


NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems


Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System (FEMP)


UL 1029 (1994; Reprint Dec 2013) High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts


UL 20 (2010; Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap Switches

UL 595 (1985) Marine-Type Electric Lighting Fixtures

UL 773 (1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

UL 773A (2006; Reprint Nov 2013) Standard for Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

UL 844 (2012) Standard for Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations



UL 924 (2006; Reprint Feb 2011) Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

UL 935 (2001; Reprint Dec 2013) Standard for Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts


Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in this section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal conditions.

c. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.


1.4.1 Lighting Control System

Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment shall include, if indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming ballasts, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications, and methods prescribed by the IES HB-10, as applicable, for the lighting system specified.

SD-03 Product Data

Fluorescent lighting fixtures; G, DO

Fluorescent electronic ballasts; G, DO

Fluorescent lamps; G, DO

Dimmer switch; G, DO

Lighting contactor; G, DO

Time switch; G, DO



Photocell switch; G, DO

Exit signs; G, DO

Emergency lighting equipment; G, DO

Occupancy sensors; G, DO

Electronic dimming ballast; G, DO

Dimming ballast controls; G, DO

Light Level Sensor ; G, DO

Local/Regional Materials

Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Environmental Data

Energy Efficiency

SD-04 Samples

Lighting fixtures, complete with lamps and ballasts; G, RO

SD-06 Test Reports

Operating test; G, PO

Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."


Lighting Control System, Data Package 5; G, PO

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein, showing all light fixtures, control modules, control zones, occupancy sensors, light level sensors, power packs, dimming ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control wire, conduit, and associated hardware.

Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.




1.6.1 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts

Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" contained herein. As an option, submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic ballast specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's catalog data. This information shall include published specifications and sketches, which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This information may be supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of vendors with vendor part numbers.

1.6.2 Lighting Fixtures, Complete With Lamps and Ballasts

Submit one sample of each fixture type for inspection, review, and approval. The sample shall be retained for comparison against the remainder of the fixtures. The sample may be used in the final fixture installation.











1.6.4.3 Energy Efficiency

Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for lighting products. Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications for equipment provided under this section. Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.

1.7 WARRANTY


1.7.1 Electronic Ballast Warranty

Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer's warranty. The warranty period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the electronic ballast. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby permitting 4 years of the ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.

1.8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE

Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement . Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement options, and submit to Contracting Officer. Services shall reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. Services shall not landfill or burn reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.

1.9 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.9.1 Local/Regional Materials

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.

1.9.2 Environmental Data

Provide mercury content information for low mercury content LEED calculation purposes. Submit lamp documentation showing TCLP compliance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES

UL 1598. Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts .

2.1.1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts

The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:



a. Ballast shall comply with UL 935, NEMA ANSLG C82.11, NFPA 70, and CEC Title 24 unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100 percent electronic high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil components. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum).

c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum). Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.

d. Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation. Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum) using any compatible lamp.

e. Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).

f. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."

g. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast.

h. Ballasts shall be programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available.

i. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.

j. Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection circuits as required by NEMA ANSLG C78.81 and ANSI C78.901 as applicable.

k. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.

l. Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic Ballast Warranty" herein.

2.1.1.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 20 percent (maximum).

b. Input wattage.

1. 32 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp

2. 62 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps

3. 92 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps



4. 114 watts (maximum) when operating four F32T8 lamps

d. Provide three and four lamp fixtures with two ballasts per fixture where multilevel switching is indicated.

2.1.1.2 F17T8 Lamp Ballast

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 25 percent (maximum).

b. Input wattage:

1. 34 watts (maximum) when operating two F17T8 lamps.

2.1.2 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Dimming Ballast

The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:

a. Ballast shall comply with NEMA ANSLG C82.11, UL 935, and NFPA 70, unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast dimming capability range shall be from 100 to 5 percent (minimum range) of light output, flicker free. Ballast shall start lamp at any preset light output setting without first having to go to full light output. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum) at full light output, and 0.90 (minimum) over the entire dimming range.

c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum). Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.

d. Ballast factor at full light output shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).

e. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A".

f. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast.

g. Ballast shall be programmed start. Ballast may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available.

h. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.

i. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.

j. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 20 percent (maximum) over the entire dimming range.

k. Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection circuits as required by NEMA ANSLG C78.81 and ANSI C78.901 as



applicable.

2.1.2.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast

Input wattage, for indicated lamp quantity shall be:

a. 35 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp.

b. 70 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps.

c. 104 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps.

2.1.3 Dimming Ballast Controls

The dimming ballast controls shall be a slide dimmer with on/off control. The slide dimmer shall be compatible with the ballast and control the ballast light output over the full dimming range. Dimming ballast controls shall be approved by the ballast manufacturer.

2.1.4 Light Level Sensor

UL listed. Light level sensor shall be capable of detecting changes in ambient lighting levels, shall provide a dimming range of 20 percent to 100 percent, minimum, and shall be designed for use with dimming ballast and voltage system to which they are connected. Sensor shall be capable of controlling 40 electronic dimming ballast, minimum. Sensor light level shall be adjustable and have a set level range from 10 to 100 footcandles, minimum. Sensor shall have a bypass function to electrically override sensor control.

2.1.5 Fluorescent Lamps

Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start.

2.1.6 Compact Fluorescent Fixtures

Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Providing assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures is prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures. Fixtures shall use lamps as indicated, with a minimum CRI of 80.

2.2 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES

Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom. Access to ballast shall be from the bottom. Trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted fixtures shall be as indicated.

2.3 SUSPENDED FIXTURES

Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation. Hangers shall be cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to limit swinging. Single-unit suspended fixtures shall have twin-stem hangers. Multiple-unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. Rods



shall be a minimum 0.18 inch diameter.

2.4 SWITCHES

2.4.1 Toggle Switches

Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.4.2 Incandescent Dimmer Switch

UL 20, single-pole, 600 watt, 120 volt ac, full-range rotary on-off type with built-in electromagnetic interference filter.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTOR

NEMA ICS 2, electrically held contactor. Rate contactor as indicated. Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have silver alloy double-break contacts. Provide contactor with on-off selector switch.

2.6 TIME SWITCH

Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 277 volts, having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 15 hours following power failure. Provide time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time switch shall be surface-mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.

2.7 PHOTOCELL SWITCH

UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated 277 volts ac, 60 Hz with single-throw contacts. Switch shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 2 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Provide switch:

d. In a cast weatherproof aluminum housing with adjustable window slide, rated 1800 VA, minimum.

2.8 EXIT SIGNS

UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Exit signs shall be self-powered type. Exit signs shall use no more than 5 watts.

2.8.1 Self-Powered LED Type Exit Signs (Battery Backup)

Provide with automatic power failure device, test switch, pilot light, and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type, shall operate unattended, and require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not less than 5 years. LED exit sign shall have emergency run time of 1 1/2 hours (minimum). The light emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of 70,000 hours (minimum).



2.8.2 Remote-Powered Exit Signs

Provide remote ac/dc exit signs with provisions for wiring to external ac and dc power sources. Provide signs with a minimum of two ac lamps for normal illumination and a minimum of two dc lamps for emergency lighting.

2.9 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

UL listed. Comply with GS-12. Occupancy sensors and power packs shall be designed to operate on the voltage indicated. Sensors and power packs shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero current crossing of supply voltage. Occupancy sensor mounting as indicated. Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator. Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed-off time range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes. Wall mounted sensors shall match the color of adjacent wall plates as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, ceiling mounted sensors shall be white. Ceiling mounted sensors shall have 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.

a. Ultrasonic sensor shall be crystal controlled and shall not cause detection interference between adjacent sensors.

b. Infrared sensors shall have a daylight filter. Sensor shall have a fresnel lens that is applicable to space to be controlled.

c. Ultrasonic/Infrared Combination Sensor

Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic and infrared sensor detection. Lights shall remain on if either the ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement. Infrared sensor shall have lens selected for indicated usage and daylight filter to prevent short wavelength infrared interference. Ultrasonic sensor frequency shall be crystal controlled.

2.10 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS

2.10.1 Wires

ASTM A641/A641M, galvanized regular coating, soft temper, 0.1055 inches in diameter (12 gage).

2.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

2.11.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate


2.11.2 Labels

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":

a. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and



compact fluorescent luminaires.

b. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

d. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.

e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires.

All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.


Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


3.1.1 Lamps

Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project completion. Lamps installed and used for working light during construction shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15 percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for proper operation prior to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with new lamps from the original manufacturer. Provide 10 percent spare lamps of each type from the original manufacturer.

3.1.2 Lighting Fixtures

Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported light fixtures. Round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than the ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture spaced approximately equidistant



around the fixture. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support such fixtures independently and provide at least two 3/4 inch metal channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture. Provide wires for lighting fixture support in this section. Lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings shall also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.

3.1.3 Suspended Fixtures

Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45 degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree separation. Suspended fixtures in continuous rows shall have internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and shall be properly aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light leaks or filler pieces. Aligning splines shall be used on extruded aluminum fixtures to assure hairline joints. Steel fixtures shall be supported to prevent "oil-canning" effects. Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and shall match the color and gloss specified. Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable shall be stainless steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and shall be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less.

3.1.4 Ballasts

3.1.4.1 Electronic Dimming Ballasts

All electronic dimming ballasts controlled by the same controller shall be of the same manufacturer. All fluorescent lamps on electronic dimming ballast control shall be seasoned or burned in at full light output for 100 hours before dimming.

3.1.5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units

Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the switch to the normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.

3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.7 Occupancy Sensor

Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage. Set sensor "on" duration to 15 minutes.



3.1.8 Light Level Sensor

Locate light level sensor as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust sensor for 50 footcandles or for the indicated light level at the typical work plane for that area.




Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.

3.3.1 Electronic Dimming Ballast

Test for full range of dimming capability. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range.

3.3.2 Occupancy Sensor

Test sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire area being covered.






SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

05/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Drawing Requirements 1.5.1.1 Luminaire Drawings 1.5.1.2 Poles 1.5.2 Photometric Plan 1.5.3 Design Data for Luminaires 1.5.4 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report 1.5.5 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report 1.5.5.1 Test Laboratories 1.5.6 Regulatory Requirements 1.5.7 Standard Products 1.5.7.1 Alternative Qualifications 1.5.7.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date 1.6 WARRANTY 1.6.1 LED Luminaire Warranty 1.6.2 Electronic Ballast Warranty 1.7 OPERATIONAL SERVICE

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION 2.2 LED LUMINAIRES 2.2.1 General Requirements 2.2.2 Luminaire Light Sources 2.2.2.1 High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Light Sources 2.2.2.2 Metal Halide (MH) Light Sources 2.2.2.3 LED Light Sources 2.2.3 Luminaire Ballasts, Power Supply Units (Drivers) 2.2.3.1 HID Ballasts 2.2.3.1.1 Electronic HID Ballasts 2.2.3.2 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) 2.2.4 LED Luminaire Surge Protection 2.3 OBSTRUCTION MARKER LUMINAIRES 2.4 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS 2.4.1 Photocell 2.4.2 Lighting Contactor 2.5 POLES 2.5.1 Aluminum Poles 2.6 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS 2.7 POLE FOUNDATIONS



2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.8.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate 2.8.2 Labels 2.9 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Aluminum Poles 3.1.2 Pole Setting 3.1.3 Photocell Switch Aiming 3.1.4 GROUNDING 3.1.5 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL




SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING05/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS (ATIS)

ATIS ANSI O5.1 (2008) Wood Poles -- Specifications & Dimensions

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO LTS (2013; Errata 2013) Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 189.1 (2011; Errata 1-2 2012; INT 1 2013; Errata 3-8 2013) Standard for the Design of High-Performance Green Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2010; Errata 1-4 2011; INT 1-12 2011; Addenda A, B, C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y, Z, BZ, CG, CI and DS 2012; Errata 5-9 2012; INT 13-16 2012; Errata 10-12 2013; INT 17-18 2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

ASHRAE 90.1 - SI (2010; Errata 1-2 2011; INT 2-12 2011; Addenda A, B, C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y, Z, BZ, CG, CI and DS 2012; Errata 3-9 2012; INT 13-16 2012; Errata 10-15 2013; INT 17 2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

AWPA U1 (2013) Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood


ASTM A123/A123M (2013) Standard Specification for Zinc



(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products


ASTM B108/B108M (2012; E 2012) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM C1089 (2013) Standard Specification for Spun Cast Prestressed Concrete Poles

ASTM G154 (2012a) Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)

CEC Title 24 (2008; Effective Jan 2010) California's Energy Efficiency Standards for Residential and Nonresidential Buildings

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IES)

IES HB-10 (2011) IES Lighting Handbook

IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

IES LM-80 (2008) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

IES RP-16 (2010; Addendum A 2008; Addenda B & C 2009) Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering

IES RP-8 (2000; Errata 2004; R 2005; Errata 2007) Roadway Lighting

IES TM-15 (2011) Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires

IES TM-21 (2011) Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources




IEEE C62.41 (1991; R 1995) Recommended Practice on



Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits




ANSI ANSLG C78.41 (2006) For Electric Lamps--Guidelines for Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps

ANSI ANSLG C78.42 (2009) For Electric Lamps: High-Pressure Sodium Lamps

ANSI C136.13 (2004; R 2009) American National Standard for Roadway Lighting Equipment, Metal Brackets for Wood Poles

ANSI C136.21 (2004; R 2009) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Vertical Tenons Used with Post-Top-Mounted Luminaires

ANSI C136.3 (2005; R 2009) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Luminaire Attachments

ANSI C78.1381 (1998) American National Standard for Electric Lamps - 250-Watt, 70 Watt, M85 Metal-Halide Lamps

ANSI C82.4 (2002) American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)

ANSI/ANSLG C78.43 (2013) American National Standard for Electric Lamps - Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps

ANSI/NEMA C78.LL 1256 (2003) Procedures for Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)


NEMA ANSLG C78.377 (2011) American National Standard for Electric Lamps— Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products

NEMA ANSLG C78.380 (2007) Electric Lamps - High Intensity Discharge Lamps, Method of Designation



NEMA ANSLG C78.44 (2008) For Electric Lamps - Double-Ended Metal Halide Lamps

NEMA ANSLG C82.11 (2011) Lamp Ballasts - High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

NEMA ANSLG C82.14 (2006) Lamp Ballasts Low-Frequency Square Wave Electronic Ballasts -- for Metal Halide Lamps

NEMA C136.10 (2010) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles--Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing

NEMA C136.20 (2012) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Fiber Reinforced Composite (FRC) Lighting Poles

NEMA C136.31 (2010) American National for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire Vibration

NEMA C78.LL 3 (2003) Electric Lamps - Procedures for High Intensity Discharge Lamp Sample Preparation and the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure

NEMA C82.77 (2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment



NEMA IEC 60529 (2004) Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)

NEMA WD 7 (2011) Occupancy Motion Sensors Standard



U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

RUS Bull 1728F-700 (2011) Specification for Wood Poles, Stubs, and Anchor Logs





47 CFR 18 (2011) Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment


UL 1029 (1994; Reprint Dec 2013) High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts

UL 1310 (2011; Reprint Oct 2013) UL Standard for Safety Class 2 Power Units


UL 773 (1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

UL 773A (2006; Reprint Nov 2013) Standard for Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

UL 8750 (2009; Reprint Sep 2013) UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products

UL 916 (2007; Reprint Dec 2013) Standard for Energy Management Equipment

UL 935 (2001; Reprint Dec 2013) Standard for Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts


Materials not considered to be luminaires or lighting equipment are specified in Section(s) 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION . Luminaires and accessories installed in interior of buildings are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING .

1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16.

b. For HID, fluorescent, and induction luminaire light sources, "Average Rated Life" is the time after which 50 percent of a large group of light sources will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal operating conditions.

c. For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This is also known as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in IES LM-80.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Photometric Plan; G, DO

LED Luminaire Warranty; G, PO

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire drawings; G, DO

Poles; G, DO

SD-03 Product Data

LED Luminaires; G, DO

Luminaire Light Sources; G, DO

Luminaire Ballasts, and Power Supply Units (Drivers); G, DO

Lighting contactor; G, DO

Photocell; G, DO

Aluminum poles; G, DO

Brackets

Obstruction Marker Luminaires; G, DO

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for luminaires; G, DO

SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report; G, DO

LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report; G, DO

Operating test; G, PO

Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."

SD-07 Certificates

Luminaire Useful Life Certificate

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life shall be



directly correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures outlined in IES TM-21. Thermal properties of the specific luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions shall be taken into consideration.


Concrete poles

Submit instructions prior to installation.

Fiberglass poles

Submit instructions prior to installation.


Electronic Ballast Warranty; G, PO

Operational Service; G, PO

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.


1.5.1 Drawing Requirements

1.5.1.1 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.

1.5.1.2 Poles

Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS, pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.

1.5.2 Photometric Plan

For LED luminaires, include computer-generated photometric analysis of the "designed to" values for the "end of useful life" of the luminaire installation using a light loss factor of 0.7. For LED and all other types of luminaires, the submittal shall include the following:

Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade, taken at a maximum of every 10 feet.

Vertical illuminance measurements at 5 feet above finished grade.

Minimum and maximum footcandle levels.

Average maintained footcandle level.

Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only.



1.5.3 Design Data for Luminaires

a. Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as defined in IES HB-10.

b. Shielding as defined by IES RP-8 or B.U.G. rating for the installed position as defined by IES TM-15.

c. Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family. Include listing, labeling and identification per NFPA 70 (NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL (Underwriters Laboratories).

d. Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire in accordance with IES TM-21. Data used for projections shall be obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.

e. Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles. Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in particular wind zone area.

1.5.4 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire. Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements, as well as all other pertinent data outlined under "14.0 Test Report" in IES LM-79.

1.5.5 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Submit report on manufacturer's standard production LED package, array, or module. Submittal shall include:

a. Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light source being tested.

b. All data required by IES LM-80.

1.5.5.1 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be one of the following:

a. National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program.

b. One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - Energy Efficiency & Renewable Energy, Solid-State Lighting web site.

c. A manufacturer's in-house lab that meets the following criteria:

1. Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires and the manufacturer's lab has been successfully certifying these



fixtures for a minimum of 15 years.

2. Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology.






Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15 years. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 15 years prior to bid opening. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 15-year period.


Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.6 WARRANTY


1.6.1 LED Luminaire Warranty

Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate.

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis



during the warranty period of the contract.

a. Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material, fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal, and installation of new products.

1. Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.

2. Material warranty shall include:

(a) All power supply units (drivers).

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.

b. Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty certificates prior to final payment.

1.6.2 Electronic Ballast Warranty

Furnish the electronic ballasts manufacturer's warranty. The warranty period shall not be less than five (5) years from the date of manufacture. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed twelve (12) months, thereby permitting four (4) years of the five (5) year warranty to be in service and energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.

1.7 OPERATIONAL SERVICE

Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement . Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement options, and submit to Contracting Officer. Services shall reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. Services shall not deposit materials in landfills or burn reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products and materials not considered to be luminaires, equipment or accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Luminaires and associated equipment and accessories for interior applications are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.

2.2 LED LUMINAIRES

UL 1598, NEMA C82.77 and UL 8750. Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and XL plates or details on project plans. Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage



indicated. All luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

2.2.1 General Requirements

a. LED luminaire housings shall be die cast or extruded aluminum. Housings for luminaires other than LED shall be die cast, extruded, or fabricated aluminum. Fabricated aluminum housings shall have all seams and corners internally welded to resist weathering, moisture and dust.

b. LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient temperature range of minus 22 degrees F to 104 degrees F.

c. Luminaires shall be UL listed for wet locations per UL 1598. Optical compartment for LED luminaires shall be sealed and rated a minimum of IP65 per NEMA IEC 60529.

d. LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy as shown in the following table, tested per IES LM-79. Theoretical models of initial raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable.

Application Luminaire Efficacy in Lumens per Watt

Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Area and Roadway Luminaires

86

Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Decorative Luminaires

82

Exterior Wall-Mounted Area Luminaires 80

Canopy-Mounted Luminaires 84

e. Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans per IES HB-10.

f. Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel, anodized, or baked-on powder coat paint. Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or peeling.

g. Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight, Uplight and Glare (B.U.G.) ratings:

1. Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed.

2. Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0.

3. Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed.

h. Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to



shipment from factory.

i. The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule or detail on the project plans.

j. Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel.

k. Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of clear tempered glass or UV-resistant acrylic.

l. The wiring compartment on pole-mounted, street and area luminaires must be accessible without the use of hand tools to manipulate small screws, bolts, or hardware.

m. Incorporate modular electrical connections, and construct luminaires to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics, heat sinks, power supply units, ballasts, surge suppressors and other electrical components using only a simple tool, such as a manual or cordless electric screwdriver.

n. Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

o. Roadway and area luminaires shall have an integral tilt adjustment of plus or minus 5 degrees to allow the unit to be leveled in accordance with ANSI C136.3.

p. Luminaire must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with NEMA C136.31.

q. All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp, locking, or latching style connectors. Twist-style wire nuts are not acceptable.

2.2.2 Luminaire Light Sources

2.2.2.1 High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Light Sources

ANSI ANSLG C78.42 and NEMA ANSLG C78.380. HPS light sources shall have a minimum average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum color rendering index (CRI) of 21, and a minimum correlated color temperature (CCT) of 1900 degrees K. Provide type and wattage as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans. Light sources shall be compliant with the most current TCLP test procedure per NEMA C78.LL 3 at the time of manufacture.

Lamps shall have Luminaire Effeciency Ratings (LER) as follows:

a. Upward efficiency of 0 percent

1. 150-399 watts: minimum 58 LER for closed fixture; minimum 68 for open fixture


b. Upward efficiency of 1 percent - 10 percent





3. 1000 plus watts: minimum 109 LER for open fixture

c. Upward efficiency of 11 percent to 20 percent

1. 150-399 watts: minimum 78 LER for open fixture

2. 400-999 watts: minimum 94 for open fixture

d. Upward efficiency greater than 20 percent

150-399 watts: minimum 75 LER for closed fixture; minimum 77 for open fixture

2.2.2.2 Metal Halide (MH) Light Sources

ANSI/ANSLG C78.43, NEMA ANSLG C78.44, ANSI C78.1381, and NEMA ANSLG C78.380. Provide type and wattage as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans. Open fixtures are prohibited unless provided with a mechanism to utilize only Type O light sources and prohibit the use of Type E or S light sources. Light sources shall be specifically suited to operate in the burning position which they are installed, and shall be compliant with the most current TCLP test procedure per NEMA C78.LL 3 at the time of manufacture.Provide Luminaires with tempered glass lens.

Lamps shall have Luminaire Efficiency Ratings (LER) as follows:

a. Upward efficiency of 0 percent

1. 150-399 watts: minimum 41 LER for closed fixture


3. 1000 plus watts: minimum 77 LER for closed fixture

b. Upward efficiency of 1 percent - 10 percent



3. 1000 plus watts: minimum 88 LER for open fixture

c. Upward efficiency greater than 20 percent



2.2.2.3 LED Light Sources

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with



NEMA ANSLG C78.377:

Nominal CCT: 4000 degrees K: 3985 plus or minus 275 degrees K

b. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be:

Greater than or equal to 65 for 4000 degrees K light sources.

c. Color Consistency:

Manufacturer shall utilize a maximum 4-step MacAdam ellipse binning tolerance for color consistency of LEDs used in luminaires.

2.2.3 Luminaire Ballasts, Power Supply Units (Drivers)

2.2.3.1 HID Ballasts

2.2.3.1.1 Electronic HID Ballasts

NEMA ANSLG C82.14, IEEE C62.41, 47 CFR 18 and shall meet the following requirements:

a. Minimum power factor shall be greater than 90 percent.

b. Input voltage shall be 120-277 volts plus or minus 10 percent.

c. Shall have end of life circuitry to prevent ballast from operating if light source is inoperable.

d. Shall have a sound rating of A and a lamp current crest factor less than 1.5.

e. Input current total harmonic distortion shall be less than 15 percent.

f. Minimum starting temperature shall be minus 22 degrees F.

g. Shall be thermally protected to prevent overheating.

h. Shall be UL listed and RoHS compliant.

2.2.3.2 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)

UL 1310. LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) shall meet the following requirements:

a. Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent.

b. Drive current to each individual LED shall not exceed 600 mA, plus or minus 10 percent.

c. Shall be rated to operate between ambient temperatures of minus 22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

d. Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected, typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V nominal.

e. Operating frequency shall be: 50 or 60 Hz.



f. Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 0.90.

g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to 20 percent.

h. Shall meet requirements of 47 CFR 15, Class B.

i. Shall be RoHS-compliant.

j. Shall be mounted integral to luminaire. Remote mounting of power supply is not allowed.

k. Power supplies in luminaires mounted under a covered structure, such as a canopy, or where otherwise appropriate shall be UL listed with a sound rating of A.

l. Where applicable per luminaire schedule, shall be dimmable, and compatible with a standard dimming control circuit of 0 - 10V or other approved dimming system.

m. Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns light source off until normal operating temperature is achieved.

2.2.4 LED Luminaire Surge Protection

Provide surge protection integral to luminaire to meet C Low waveforms as defined by IEEE C62.41.2, Scenario 1, Location Category C.

2.3 OBSTRUCTION MARKER LUMINAIRES

Provide obstruction marker luminaires for facilities as required by the FAA and as shown on the drawings .

2.4 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS

Controls shall comply with ASHRAE 189.1.Exterior lighting shall be incorporated into facility lighting control system. See drawings for system and control device information.

The obstruction lighting shall be provided with a stand-alone control system separate from the facility lighting control system. This paragraph and the devices described herein shall apply to the obstruction lighting system.

2.4.1 Photocell

UL 773 or UL 773A. Photocells shall be hermetically sealed, cadmium sulfide or silicon diode light sensor type, rated at 120 volts, 50/60 Hz with single-pole, single-throw contacts. Photocell shall be designed to fail to the ON position. Housing shall be constructed of die cast aluminum , rated to operate within a temperature range of minus 40 to 158 degrees F. Photocell shall have a 1/2 in threaded base for mounting to a junction box or conduit. Provide swivel base type housing. Photocell shall turn on at 3 footcandles and turn off at 4 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition.



2.4.2 Lighting Contactor

NEMA ICS 2. Provide a electrically-held lighting contactor housed in a NEMA 4 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Coil operating voltage shall be 120 volts. Contactor shall have silver cadmium oxide double-break contacts and shall require no arcing contacts. Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.

2.5 POLES

Provide poles designed for wind loading of 100 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated. The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole. Poles shall be anchor-base type designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws. Metal poles shall have an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the bottom of each pole. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.

2.5.1 Aluminum Poles

Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought alloys and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for cast alloys. Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188 inch wall thickness. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Tops of shafts shall be fitted with a round or tapered cover. Base shall be anchor bolt mounted, made of cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M and shall be machined to receive the lower end of shaft. Joint between shaft and base shall be welded. Base cover shall be cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M. Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be either 2024-T4 anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel. Aluminum poles and brackets for lighting shall have a dark anodic bronze finish to match fixtures and shall not be painted. Manufacturer's standard provision shall be made for protecting the finish during shipment and installation. Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.

2.6 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS

ANSI C136.3, ANSI C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. Pole brackets shall be not less than 1 1/4 inch aluminum secured to pole. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated. Mount brackets not less than 24 feet above street. Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head.

2.7 POLE FOUNDATIONS

Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00.00 10



CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

2.8.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate


2.8.2 Labels

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources and ballasts according to proper light source type. The following light source characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":

b. Light source type, wattage, bulb type (e.g. ED17, BD56) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires.

Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.


Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


3.1.1 Aluminum Poles

Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide ornamental covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts. Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and ground rods shall be as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location.

3.1.2 Pole Setting

Poles in straight runs shall be in a straight line. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 6 inch maximum layers and thoroughly tamp. Place



surplus earth around the pole in a conical shape and pack tightly to drain water away.

3.1.3 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.4 GROUNDING

Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.1.5 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING



Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test after 100 hours of burn-in time to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section.






SECTION 26 56 20.00 10

AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTING AND VISUAL NAVIGATION AIDS

10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Code Compliance 1.3.2 Qualifications 1.3.3 Protection Plan 1.3.4 Prevention of Corrosion 1.3.4.1 Metallic Materials 1.3.4.2 Ferrous Metal Hardware 1.3.5 As-Built Drawings 1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 1.4.1 Altitude 1.4.2 Other

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.3 NAMEPLATES 2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 2.4.1 Electrical Tape 2.4.2 Conduit, Conduit Fittings, and Boxes 2.4.2.1 Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) and Fittings 2.4.2.2 Flexible Metal Conduit 2.4.2.3 Outlet Boxes for Use with Steel Conduit, Rigid or Flexible 2.4.2.4 Plastic Duct for Concrete Encased Burial 2.4.2.5 Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial 2.4.2.6 Frangible Couplings and Adapters 2.4.3 Wire and Cable 2.4.3.1 Conductor Sizes 2.4.3.2 Low Voltage Wire and Cable 2.4.3.3 Power Cables for Airfield and Heliports 2.4.3.4 Wire and Cable for Airfield and Heliports 2.4.3.5 Cable Tags 2.4.3.6 Concrete Markers for Direct Buried Cable Systems 2.4.4 Ground Rods 2.4.5 Lightning Arresters 2.4.6 Surge Protection 2.4.7 Cable Connectors and Splices 2.4.8 Transformers 2.4.8.1 Encapsulated Isolation Transformers 2.4.8.2 Power Transformers 2.4.9 Light Bases 2.4.10 Sealant for Fixtures and Wires in Drilled Holes

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 1


2.4.11 Lamps and Filters 2.4.12 Control Panel 2.4.13 Lighting Fixtures 2.4.14 Painting 2.5 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND MARKING 2.6 TAXIWAY LIGHTING SYSTEMS 2.6.1 Taxiway Edge Lights 2.6.2 Taxiway Centerline Lights 2.7 EXPLOSION-PROOF FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 2.8 FACTORY COATINGS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.3 CABLES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3.3.1 Duct Line Installation 3.3.2 Direct-Burial Installation 3.3.2.1 Trenching 3.3.2.2 Cable Installation 3.3.2.3 Other Requirements 3.3.2.4 Medium-Voltage Cable Joints or Low-Voltage Cable Splices 3.3.2.5 Surface Markers 3.3.3 Connection to Buildings 3.4 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 3.4.1 Cable Joints 3.4.1.1 Types 3.4.1.2 Requirements 3.4.2 Terminations 3.4.2.1 Factory Preformed Type 3.4.2.2 Taped Terminations 3.5 LOW-VOLTAGE CABLES 3.6 DUCT LINES 3.6.1 Requirements 3.6.2 Treatment 3.6.3 Concrete Encasement 3.6.4 Non-encased Direct-Burial 3.6.5 Installation of Couplings 3.6.5.1 Plastic Duct 3.7 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES 3.8 WELDING 3.9 CABLE MARKERS 3.10 FRANGIBLE REQUIREMENTS 3.11 ELEVATED AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTS 3.12 SEMIFLUSH AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTS 3.13 ENCLOSURES IN DRILLED HOLES 3.13.1 Holes for Light Fixtures 3.13.2 Holes for Transformer Enclosures 3.14 FIXTURES AND WIRES INSTALLATION 3.14.1 General 3.15 SPLICES FOR AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTING CABLE 3.15.1 Connectors 3.16 GROUNDING SYSTEMS 3.16.1 Counterpoise Installation 3.16.2 Fixture Grounding 3.17 MARKING AND LIGHTING OF AIRWAY OBSTRUCTIONS 3.17.1 Painting of Airway Obstructions 3.17.2 Obstruction Marker Lights 3.18 ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 2


3.19 RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY LIGHTING SYSTEMS 3.19.1 Runway and Taxiway Edge Lights 3.19.2 Runway and Taxiway Centerline Lights 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.20.1 Operating Test 3.20.2 Distribution Conductors, 600-Volt Class 3.20.3 Counterpoise System Test and Inspection 3.20.4 Progress Testing for Series Lighting Circuits 3.20.5 Electrical Acceptance Tests 3.20.5.1 Low-Voltage Continuity Tests 3.20.5.2 High-Voltage Insulation Resistance Tests 3.20.5.2.1 Test Procedure 3.20.5.2.2 Leakage Current 3.21 FINISHING 3.22 TRAINING 3.23 FINAL OPERATING TESTS 3.24 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS


SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 3


SECTION 26 56 20.00 10

AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTING AND VISUAL NAVIGATION AIDS10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)

AEIC CS8 (2007) specification for Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV


ASTM A123/A123M (2013) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products


ASTM A780/A780M (2009) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM D1248 (2012) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable

ASTM D1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments


FM GLOBAL (FM)



IEEE 48 (2009) Standard for Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 4


Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 500 kV


IEEE C57.12.50 (1981; R 1998) Ventilated Dry-Type Distribution Transformers, 1 to 500 kVA, Single-Phase, and 15 to 500 kVA, Three-Phase, with High-Volt 601 to 34,500 Volts





ANSI C119.1 (2011) Electric Connectors - Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts




NEMA LA 1 (2009) Standard for Surge Arresters

NEMA PB 1 (2011) Panelboards

NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

NEMA TC 3 (2013) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA TC 6 & 8 (2013) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installations

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 5




THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC Paint 20 (2002; E 2004) Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, Inorganic, and Type II, Organic)

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

RUS Bull 345-67 (1998) REA Specification for Filled Telephone Cables, PE-39

U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)

FAA 6850.19 (1978) Frangible Coupling

FAA AC 150/5345-10 (2005; Rev F) Specification for Constant Current Regulators Regulator Monitors

FAA AC 150/5345-12 (2005; Rev E) Specification for Airport and Heliport Beacon

FAA AC 150/5345-13 (2007; Rev B) Specification for L-841 Auxiliary Relay Cabinet Assembly for Pilot Control of Airport Lighting Circuits

FAA AC 150/5345-26 (2008; Rev D) FAA Specification for L-823 Plug and Receptacle, Cable Connectors

FAA AC 150/5345-27 (2013; Rev E) Specification for Wind Cone Assemblies

FAA AC 150/5345-28 (2005; Rev F) Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI) Systems

FAA AC 150/5345-3 (2007; Rev F) Specification for L-821 Panels for Control to Airport Lighting

FAA AC 150/5345-42 (2013; Rev G) Specification for Airport Light Bases, Transformer Housings, Junction Boxes and Accessories

FAA AC 150/5345-43 (2006; Rev F) Specification for Obstruction Lighting Equipment

FAA AC 150/5345-44 (2007; Rev H) Specification for Runway and Taxiway Signs

FAA AC 150/5345-45 (2007; Rev C) Low-Impact Resistant (LIR) Structures

FAA AC 150/5345-46 (2009; Rev D) Specification for Runway and Taxiway Light Fixtures

FAA AC 150/5345-47 (2005; Rev B) Specification for Series to

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 6


Series Isolation Transformers for Airport Lighting Systems

FAA AC 150/5345-5 (2006; Rev B) Specification for Airport Lighting Circuit Selector Switch

FAA AC 150/5345-51 (2005; Rev A) Specification for Discharge-Type Flashing Light Equipment

FAA AC 150/5345-7 (2013; Rev F) Specification for L-824 Underground Electrical Cable for Airport Lighting Circuits

FAA AC 150/5370-10 (2009; Rev E) Standards for Specifying Construction of Airports

FAA AC 70/7460-1 (2007; Rev K) Obstruction Marking and Lighting

FAA E-2159 (2004; Rev E) Runway End Identifier Lighting System (REIL)

FAA E-2519 (1972; Rev A) Types I and II

FAA E-2628 (1979; Rev B) Sequenced Flashing Lighting System, Elevated and Semiflush with Dimming and Monitoring

FAA E-2702 (2007; Rev A)Low Impact Resistant (LIR) Structures

FAA E-2756 (2004; Rev B) Four Box Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI) without Remote Monitoring Subsystem (RMS)

FAA E-2980 (2005) Medium Intensity Approach Lighting System with Runway Alignment Indicator Lights (MALSR)

FAA E-982 (2003; Rev J) PAR-56 Lampholder


UL 1 (2005; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel

UL 360 (2013; Reprint May 2013) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

UL 44 (2010) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 486A-486B (2013; Reprint Dec 2013) Wire Connectors

UL 489 (2013) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 7


Enclosures




UL 797 (2007; Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel

UL 83 (2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 854 (2004; Reprint Sep 2011) Standard for Service-Entrance Cables


1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Lighting and Visual Navigation Aids; G, DO

SD-03 Product Data

Materials and Equipment; G, DOList of Parts; G, DOMaintenance and Repair; G, DO

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality ControlVisual Inspection

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications; G, POMaterials and Equipment


Operation and Maintenance Procedures

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 8



1.3.1 Code Compliance

The installation shall comply with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and local codes where required.


a. Submit certification containing the names and the qualifications of persons recommended to perform the splicing and termination of medium-voltage cables approved for installation under this contract. The certification shall indicate that any person recommended to perform actual splicing and termination has been adequately trained in the proper techniques and has had at least 3 recent years of experience in splicing and terminating the same or similar types of cables approved for installation. Any person recommended by the Contractor may be required to perform a dummy or practice splice and termination, in the presence of the Contracting Officer, before being approved as a qualified installer of medium-voltage cables. If that additional requirement is imposed, provide short sections of the approved types of cables with the approved type of splice and termination kits, and detailed manufacturer's instruction for the proper splicing and termination of the approved cable types. The certification shall be prepared in conformance with paragraph CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE in the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, and shall be accompanied by satisfactory proof of the training and experience of persons recommended by the Contractor as cable installers.

1.3.3 Protection Plan

Submit detailed procedures to prevent damage to existing facilities or infrastructures. If damage does occur, the procedures shall address repair and replacement of damaged property at the Contractor's expense.

1.3.4 Prevention of Corrosion

1.3.4.1 Metallic Materials

Protect metallic materials against corrosion as specified. Aluminum shall not be used in contact with earth or concrete. Where aluminum conductors are connected to dissimilar metal, use fittings conforming to UL 486A-486B.

1.3.4.2 Ferrous Metal Hardware

Ferrous metal hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M.

1.3.5 As-Built Drawings

Submit as-built drawings that provide current factual information including deviations from, and amendments to the drawings and changes in the work, concealed and visible, as instructed. The as-built drawings shall show installations with respect to fixed installations not associated with the systems specified herein. Cable and wire shall be accurately identified as to direct-burial or in conduit and shall locate the connection and routing to and away from bases, housings, and boxes.

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 9


1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

Items furnished under this section shall be specifically suitable for the following unusual service conditions:

1.4.1 Altitude

Any equipment shall be suitable for operation up to an altitude of 6,000 ft.

1.4.2 Other

Material or equipment to be installed underground; ; or in light bases, shall be suitable for submerged operation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Provide airfield and heliport lighting and visual navigation aids consisting of taxiway lights apron lights and the lighting power supply and control.

a. Submit composite drawings showing coordination of work of one trade with that of other trades and with the structural and architectural elements of the work. Drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show overall dimensions of related items, clearances, and relative locations of work in allotted spaces. Drawings shall indicate where conflicts or clearance problems exist between the various trades.

b. Luminaires fabricated from ferrous metals, unless hot-dip galvanized or of porcelain enamel finish, shall be factory finished with a weather-resistant finish in accordance with paragraphs FACTORY COATING and FINISHING, except exposure shall be 200 hours. Finish color shall be the manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.


Provide materials and equipment which are the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Items of the same classification shall be identical including equipment, assemblies, parts, and components.

a. Submit a complete itemized listing of equipment and materials proposed for incorporation into the work. Each itemization shall include an item number, the quantity of items proposed, and the name of the manufacturer.

b. Submit data composed of catalog cuts, brochures, circulars, specifications and product data, and printed information in sufficient detail and scope to verify compliance with requirements of the contract documents.

c. When equipment or materials are specified to conform to the standards or publications and requirements of AASHTO, ANSI, ASTM, AEIC, FM, IEEE, IES, NEMA, NFPA, or UL, or to an FAA, FS, or MS, submit proof that the items furnished under this section conform to the specified requirements.

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 10


d. The label or listing in UL Electrical Constructn or in FM APP GUIDE or the manufacturer's certification or published catalog specification data statement that the items comply with applicable specifications, standards, or publications and with the manufacturer's standards will be acceptable evidence of such compliance.

e. Certificates shall be prepared by the manufacturer when the manufacturer's published data or drawings do not indicate conformance with other requirements of these specifications.

2.3 NAMEPLATES

Each major component of equipment shall have as a minimum the manufacturer's name, address, and catalog or style number on a nameplate securely attached to the item of equipment. Laminated plastic nameplates shall be provided for equipment, controls, and devices to identify function, and where applicable, position. Nameplates shall be 1/8 inch thick laminated cellulose paper base phenolic resin plastic conforming to ASTM D709 sheet type, grade ES-3, white with black center core. Surface shall be a matte finish with square corners. Lettering shall be engraved into the black core. Size of nameplates shall be 1 by 2-1/2 inches minimum with minimum 1/4 inch high normal block lettering. Nameplates provided as indicated. Nameplates shall be fastened to the device with a minimum of two sheet metal screws or two rivets.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

Equipment and materials shall be new unless indicated or specified otherwise. Materials and equipment shall be labeled when approved by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual (FM) System. Askarel and insulating liquids containing polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's) will not be allowed in any equipment. Equipment installed below grade in vaults, manholes, and handholes shall be the submersible type.

2.4.1 Electrical Tape

Electrical tape shall be UL 510 plastic insulating tape.

2.4.2 Conduit, Conduit Fittings, and Boxes

2.4.2.1 Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) and Fittings

The metal conduit and fittings shall be UL 6 and UL 1242, respectively, coated with a polyvinylchloride (PVC) sheath bonded to the galvanized exterior surface, nominal 40 mils thick, conforming to NEMA RN 1.

2.4.2.2 Flexible Metal Conduit

Flexible metal conduit shall be UL 1, zinc-coated steel. UL 360liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used in wet locations.

2.4.2.3 Outlet Boxes for Use with Steel Conduit, Rigid or Flexible

These outlet boxes shall be UL 514A, cast metal with gasket closures.

2.4.2.4 Plastic Duct for Concrete Encased Burial

These ducts shall be provided as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 11


2.4.2.5 Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial

This plastic conduit shall be provided as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.4.2.6 Frangible Couplings and Adapters

These frangible couplings shall be in accordance with FAA 6850.19 and FAA E-2519. Provide upper section of frangible coupling with one of the following:

a. Unthreaded for slip-fitter connections.

b. 2-13/32 inch 16N-1A modified thread for nut and compression ring to secure 2 inch EMT.

c. 2 inch 11-1/2-N.P.T. (tapered) with 7/32 inch nominal wall thickness to accept rigid conduit coupling.

d. Frangible Couplings for specialized applications as approved.

e. Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 797, where indicated for use with frangible couplings and adapters.

2.4.3 Wire and Cable

Conductors shall be copper except as otherwise indicated.

2.4.3.1 Conductor Sizes

Conductor size shall conform to American Wire Gage (AWG). Conductor sizes larger than No. 8 AWG shall be stranded. No. 8 AWG and smaller may be solid or stranded unless otherwise indicated.

2.4.3.2 Low Voltage Wire and Cable

UL 854, Type USE, 600 volts shall be used for underground low voltage power cables.

2.4.3.3 Power Cables for Airfield and Heliports

Power cables shall be rated 5 kV, 133 percent insulation level, with shield and jacket conforming to FAA AC 150/5345-7 for crosslinked polyethylene or for ethylene-propylene rubber insulated cables.

2.4.3.4 Wire and Cable for Airfield and Heliports

a. Airfield and heliport lighting cable shall be FAA AC 150/5345-7, Type L-824 for crosslinked polyethylene Type C -volt cable. Series airfield and heliport lighting cable shall be unshielded. Lighting cable for multiple type lighting circuits shall be shielded .

b. Counterpoise Wire. No. 4 AWG bare stranded copper, annealed or soft drawn.

2.4.3.5 Cable Tags

Install cable tags for each cable or wire at duct entrances entering or

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 12


leaving manholes, handholes, and at each terminal within the lighting vault. Cable tags shall be stainless steel, bronze, or copper strip, approximately 1/16 inch thick or hard plastic 1/8 inch thick suitable for immersion in salt water and impervious to petroleum products and shall be of sufficient length for imprinting the legend on one line using raised letters. Cable tags shall be permanently marked or stamped with letters not less than 1/4 inch in height as indicated. Two-color laminated plastic is acceptable. Plastic tags shall be dark colored with markings of light color to provide contrast so that identification can be easily read. Fastening material shall be of a type that will not deteriorate when exposed to water with a high saline content and to petroleum products.

2.4.3.6 Concrete Markers for Direct Buried Cable Systems

Concrete markers shall be as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.4.4 Ground Rods

Ground rods shall be sectional copper-clad steel with diameter adequate to permit driving to full length of the rod, but not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and not more than 10 feet long, unless indicated otherwise.

2.4.5 Lightning Arresters

These lightning arresters shall be in accordance with IEEE C62.11, IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2 as applicable with ratings as indicated.

2.4.6 Surge Protection

Surge protection shall be metal oxide varistors (MOV) in accordance with NEMA LA 1 for power and signal circuits with ratings as recommended by the system manufacturer.

2.4.7 Cable Connectors and Splices

Cable connectors in accordance with FAA AC 150/5345-26, Item L-823 shall be used for connections and splices appropriate for the type of cable. Other types of cable connectors and splices shall be of copper alloys for copper conductors, aluminum alloys for aluminum-composition conductors and a type designed to minimize galvanic corrosion for copper to aluminum-composition conductors. For FAA Type L-824 lighting cable, connectors shall be FAA AC 150/5345-26, Type L-823.

2.4.8 Transformers

2.4.8.1 Encapsulated Isolation Transformers

These transformers shall be FAA AC 150/5345-47, Type L-830. Each transformer shall be provided with rating as shown on the contract drawings.

2.4.8.2 Power Transformers

These transformers shall be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.50 as indicated.

2.4.9 Light Bases

Light bases shall be as indicated on drawings.

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 13


2.4.10 Sealant for Fixtures and Wires in Drilled Holes

The sealant shall be in accordance with FAA AC 150/5370-10, Type P-606. Use FAA AC 150/5370-10, Type P-606 sealant for use in asphaltic concrete (AC) or Portland cement concrete (PCC) pavement compatible with AC pavement and having a minimum elongation of 50 percent. Formulations of Type P-606 which are compatible with PCC pavement only are prohibited.

2.4.11 Lamps and Filters

Lamps shall be of size and type indicated, or as required by fixture manufacturer for each lighting fixture required under this contract. Filters shall be of colors as indicated and conforming to the specification for the light concerned or to the standard referenced.

2.4.12 Control Panel

Update touch screen controls installed under Air Navigation Building Project PN77304. Touch Screen Control stations located in the Control Tower and within Room 102 - Workshop inside the Air Navigation Building. PLC Interface Panel located in Room 101 inside the Air Navigation Building.

This system shall be capable of controlling CCR#19 UAS Taxiway from both control stations. CCR #19 shall have the ability to be switched on and off independently of all other CCR's. This system shall be capable of controlling CCR #19's current output (3 step levels). Coordinate with COR for final configuration of controls.

2.4.13 Lighting Fixtures

Provide lighting fixtures for the airfield and heliport lighting as shown in the contract drawings or as required in other contract documents.

2.4.14 Painting

As specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS and Section 32 17 24.00 10, PAVEMENT MARKINGS.

2.5 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND MARKING

Obstructions on or near the heliport shall be marked and/or lighted as shown on the contract drawings. Obstruction marker lights shall emit aviation red flashing and/or steady burning light as required. The light fixtures, shall be multiple-socket assembly FAA AC 150/5345-43, Type L-810 . For multiple flashing lights on a circuit, the lights shall flash in unison. Obstruction marker lights shall be double-unit type as shown in the contract drawings. The obstruction lights shall be energized from series or multiple circuits as shown on the contract drawings or other contract documents.

2.6 TAXIWAY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Taxiway lighting systems shall include edge lights, centerline lights, , and hold position lights and signs. These systems shall also include the associated equipment, power supplies and controls, mounting devices, and interconnecting wiring to provide complete systems as specified.

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 14


2.6.1 Taxiway Edge Lights

Taxiway edge light shall emit aviation blue light provided by filters or globes for both airfields and heliports. The edge lights shall meet the requirements of FAA AC 150/5345-46, Type L-861, elevated, lights.

2.6.2 Taxiway Centerline Lights

Taxiway centerline lights shall be semiflush fixtures using filters to provide aviation green light. These centerline light fixtures shall meet the requirements of FAA AC 150/5345-46, Type L-852A on straight sections Type L-852B on curved sections.

2.7 EXPLOSION-PROOF FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

Fixtures to be installed in explosive hazardous locations shall meet the requirements of and be listed by UL Electrical Constructn or FM APP GUIDE as defined in NFPA 70 for the hazard and application. The explosion-proof fixtures are located as indicateds or otherwise specified herein.

2.8 FACTORY COATINGS

Equipment and component items, including but not limited to transformer stations and ferrous metal luminaries not hot-dip galvanized or porcelain enamel finish shall be provided with corrosion-resistant finishes which shall withstand 200 hours of exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 without loss of paint or release of adhesion of the paint primer coat to the metal surface in excess of 1/16 inch from the test mark. The scribed test mark and test evaluation shall be in accordance with ASTM D1654 with a rating of not less than 7 in accordance with TABLE 1, (Procedure A). Cut edges or otherwise damaged surfaces of hot-dip galvanized sheet steel or mill galvanized sheet steel shall be coated with zinc rich paint conforming to SSPC Paint 20 in accordance with ASTM A780/A780M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Circuits installed underground shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION, except as required herein. Steel conduits installed underground shall be installed and protected from corrosion in conformance with the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Except as covered herein, excavation, trenching, and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.3 CABLES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The type of installation, size and number of cables shall be as indicated. Conductors larger than No. 8 AWG shall be stranded. Loads shall be divided as evenly as practicable on the various phases of the system. Furnish manufacturer's written recommendations for each type of splice and

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 15


medium-voltage cable joint and termination, and for fireproofing application methods, approved before any work is done. Medium-voltage cable joints and terminations shall be the standard product of a manufacturer and shall be either of the factory preformed type or of the kit type containing tapes and other required parts. Medium-voltage cable joints shall be made by qualified cable splicers. Compounds and tapes shall be electrical grade suitable for the cable insulation provided and shall use design materials and techniques recommended by the manufacturer. Maximum length of cable pull and cable pulling tensions shall not exceed the cable manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3.1 Duct Line Installation

Install cables in duct lines where indicated. Cable splices in low-voltage cables shall be made in manholes and handholes only, except as otherwise noted. Cable joints in medium-voltage cables shall be made in manholes only. Neutral and ground conductors shall be installed in the same duct with their associated phase conductors. Counterpoise cable shall be installed in a separate duct or direct-burial not less than inches above the uppermost duct containing electrical cable. Electrical metallic tubing shall not be installed underground or enclosed in concrete.

3.3.2 Direct-Burial Installation

Cables shall be buried directly in the earth as indicated. Minimum cover from the top of a cable to finished grade shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. Counterpoise cable shall be not less than 6 inches above the uppermost electrical cable but not less than the depth of the frost line.

3.3.2.1 Trenching

Trenches for direct-burial cables shall be excavated to depths required to provide the minimum necessary cable cover. Bottoms of trenches shall be smooth and free of stones and sharp objects. Where bottoms of trenches comprise materials other than sand or stone-free earth, 3 inch layers of sand or stone-free earth shall be laid first and compacted to approximate densities of surrounding firm soil.

3.3.2.2 Cable Installation

Cables shall be unreeled along the sides of or in trenches and carefully placed on sand or earth bottoms. Pulling cables into direct-burial trenches from a fixed reel position will not be permitted, except as required to pull cables through conduits under paving or railroad tracks. Where cables cross or are installed in layers at different depths, a separation of at least 3 inches vertically and 2 inches horizontally shall be provided, unless each cable circuit is protected by a nonmetallic conduit sleeve at the crossing. Where single-conductor cable is installed for three-phase circuits, all three phases and the neutral shall be installed in the same sleeve. Bend radius of any cable shall be not less than 10 times the diameter of the cable. In no case shall cables be left under longitudinal tension. The first 4 inch layer of backfill shall be of sand or stone-free earth. Selected backfill of sand or stone-free earth shall be provided to a minimum depth of 3 inches above cables.

3.3.2.3 Other Requirements

Where direct-burial cables cross under roads or other paving exceeding 5

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 16


feet in width, such cables shall be installed in concrete-encased ducts. Where direct-burial cables cross under railroad tracks, such cables shall be installed in reinforced concrete encased ducts. Ducts shall extend at least 1 foot beyond each edge of any paving and at least 5 feet beyond each side of any railroad tracks. Cables may be pulled into conduit from a fixed reel where suitable rollers are provided in the trench. Direct-burial cables shall be centered in duct entrances. A suitable waterproof nonhardening mastic compound shall be used to facilitate such centering. If paving or railroad tracks are in place where cables are to be installed, coated rigid steel conduits driven under the paving or railroad tracks may be used in lieu of concrete-encased ducts. Damage to conduit coatings shall be prevented by providing ferrous pipe jackets or by suitable predrilling. Where cuts are made in any paving, the paving and sub-base shall be restored to their original condition.

3.3.2.4 Medium-Voltage Cable Joints or Low-Voltage Cable Splices

Cable joints or splices in direct-burial cables are not permitted in runs of 1000 feet or less, nor at intervals of less than 1000 feet in longer runs, except as required for taps. Locations of cable joints or splices in shorter intervals, where required to avoid obstructions or damage to cables, shall be approved. Cable joints or splices shall be installed in cable boxes, except that medium-voltage separable connectors or low-voltage sealed insulated connectors do not require cable boxes.

3.3.2.5 Surface Markers

Locate markers near the ends of cable runs, at each cable joint or splice, at approximately every 500 feet along cable runs, and at changes in direction of cable runs.

3.3.3 Connection to Buildings

Cables shall be extended into the various buildings as indicated, and shall be properly connected to the first applicable termination point in each building. Interfacing with building interior conduit systems shall be at conduit stubouts terminating 5 feet outside of a building and 2 feet below finished grade as specified and provided under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. After installation of cables, conduits shall be sealed with caulking compound to prevent entrance of moisture or gases into buildings.

3.4 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES

Medium-voltage cables shall be suitable for a rated circuit voltage of 5 kV . Other parts of the cable system such as joints and terminations shall have ratings not less than the rating of the cables on which they are installed. Separable insulated connectors shall have nominal voltage ratings coordinated to associated apparatus ratings rather than cable ratings when used to connect cable to apparatus. Cables shall be provided with 133 percent insulation level and 28 kV and 35 kV insulation thicknesses shall be in accordance with either AEIC CS8 as applicable. Neutral conductors of grounded neutral systems shall be of the same insulation material as phase conductors, except that a 600-volt insulation rating is acceptable.

3.4.1 Cable Joints

Apply shields as required to continue the shielding system through each

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 17


entire cable joint. Shields may be integrally molded parts of preformed joints. Shields shall be grounded at each joint.

3.4.1.1 Types

Separable insulated connectors of suitable construction or standard splice kits shall be used for single-conductor and two-conductor cables. The connectors shall be of FAA AC 150/5345-26 type. Cable joints for which acceptable separable connector kits are not available may use factory preformed splices if approved.

3.4.1.2 Requirements

Cable joints shall provide insulation and jacket equivalent to that of the associated cable. Lead sleeves shall be provided for lead-covered cables. Armored cable joints shall be enclosed in compound-filled, cast-iron or alloy, splice boxes equipped with stuffing boxes and armor clamps of a suitable type and size for the cable being installed.

3.4.2 Terminations

Terminations shall be IEEE 48, Class 1 or Class 2, of the molded elastomer, wet-process porcelain, prestretched elastomer, heat-shrinkable elastomer, or taped type. Acceptable elastomers are track-resistant silicone rubber or track-resistant ethylene propylene compounds, such as ethylene propylene rubber or ethylene propylene diene monomer. Separable insulated connectors may be used for apparatus terminations, when such apparatus is provided with suitable bushings. Terminations shall be of the outdoor type, except that where installed inside outdoor equipment housings which are sealed against normal infiltration of moisture and outside air, indoor, Class 2 terminations are acceptable. Class 3 terminations are not acceptable. Terminations, where required, shall be provided with mounting brackets suitable for the intended installation and with grounding provisions for the cable shielding, metallic sheath, and armor.

3.4.2.1 Factory Preformed Type

Molded elastomer, wet-process porcelain, prestretched, and heat-shrinkable terminations shall utilize factory preformed components to the maximum extent practicable rather than tape build-up. Terminations shall have basic impulse levels as required for the system voltage level. Leakage distances shall pass the wet withstand voltage test required by IEEE 48 for the next higher BIL level.

3.4.2.2 Taped Terminations

Taped terminations shall use standard termination kits providing suitable terminal connectors, field-fabricated stress cones, and rain hoods. Terminations shall be at least 20 inches long from the end of the tapered cable jacket to the start of the terminal connector, or not less than the kit manufacturer's recommendations, whichever is greater.

3.5 LOW-VOLTAGE CABLES

Cable shall be rated 600 volts, except that secondaries of isolation transformer to in-pavement lights installed in pavement saw kerf and 48 volt DC control cables may be 300 volts. Other parts of cable systems such as splices and terminations shall be rated at not less than 600 volts. Splices in wires No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be made with an insulated,

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 18


solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B. Splices in wires No. 8 AWG single conductor cable shall be made with FAA AC 150/5345-26 Type L-823 connectors Splices below grade or in wet locations shall be sealed type conforming to ANSI C119.1 or shall be waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that surrounds the joined conductors.

3.6 DUCT LINES

Duct lines shall be concrete-encased, thin-wall type for duct lines between manholes and for other medium-voltage lines. Low-voltage lines run elsewhere may be non-encased direct-burial, thick-wall type.

3.6.1 Requirements

Numbers and sizes of ducts shall be as indicated. Duct lines shall be laid with a minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet. Depending on the contour of the finished grade, the high point may be at a terminal, a manhole, a handhold, or between manholes or handholes. Manufactured 90 degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers, unless specifically indicated as acceptable. The minimum manufactured bend radius shall be 18 inches for ducts of less than 3 inches diameter, and 36 inches for ducts 3 inches or greater in diameter. Otherwise, long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet shall be used for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or vertically. Both curved and straight sections may be used to form long sweep bends as required, but the maximum curve shall be 30 degrees and manufactured bends shall be used. Ducts shall be provided with end bells when duct lines terminate in manholes or handholes. Duct line markers shall be provided as indicated at the ends of long duct line stubouts or for other ducts whose locations are indeterminate because of duct curvature or terminations at completely below-grade structures. In lieu of markers, a 5 mil brightly colored plastic tape not less than 3 inches in width and suitably inscribed at not more than 10 feet on centers with a continuous metallic backing and a corrosion-resistant 1 mil metallic foil core to permit easy location of the duct line, shall be placed approximately 12 inches below finished grade levels of such lines.

3.6.2 Treatment

Ducts shall be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during construction. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with proper tools and match factory tapers. After a duct line is completed, a standard flexible mandrel shall be used for cleaning followed by a brush with stiff bristles. Mandrels shall be at least 12 inches long and shall have diameters 1/4 inch less than the inside diameter of the duct being cleaned. Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in lead wires. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer shall be used when an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape. Ducts shall be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of water or solid substances. Ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned before being laid. Plastic ducts shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun.

3.6.3 Concrete Encasement

Each single duct shall be completely encased in concrete with a minimum of 3 inches of concrete around each duct, except that only 2 inches of

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 19


concrete are required between adjacent electric power or adjacent communication ducts, and 4 inches of concrete shall be provided between adjacent electric power and communication ducts. Duct line encasements shall be monolithic construction. Where a connection is made to a previously poured encasement, the new encasement shall be well bonded or doweled to the existing encasement. At any point, except railroad crossings, tops of concrete encasements shall be not less than 18 inches below finished grade or paving. At railroad crossings, duct lines shall be encased with concrete, reinforced as indicated. Tops of concrete encasements shall be not less than 5 feet below tops of rails, unless otherwise indicated. Separators or spacing blocks shall be made of steel, concrete, plastic, or a combination of these materials placed not further apart than 4 feet on centers. Ducts shall be securely anchored to prevent movement during the placement of concrete and joints shall be staggered at least 6 inches vertically.

3.6.4 Non-encased Direct-Burial

Top of duct lines shall be below frost line but not less than 24 inches below finished grade. Ducts shall be buried below frost line but in the earth and shall be installed with a minimum of 3 inches of earth around each duct, except that between adjacent electric power and communication ducts, 12 inches of earth is required. Bottoms of trenches shall be graded toward manholes or handholes and shall be smooth and free of stones, soft spots, and sharp objects. Where bottoms of trenches comprise materials other than sand or stone-free earth, 3 inch layers of sand or stone-free earth shall be laid first and compacted to approximate densities of surrounding firm soil before installing ducts in direct-contact tiered fashion. Joints in adjacent tiers of duct shall be vertically staggered at least 6 inches. The first 4 inch layer of backfill cover shall be sand or stone-free earth compacted as previously specified. Duct banks may be held in alignment with earth. However, high-tiered banks shall use a wooden frame or equivalent form to hold ducts in alignment prior to backfilling. Selected earth at duct banks shall be thoroughly tamped in 4 to 6 inch layers.

3.6.5 Installation of Couplings

Joints in each type of duct shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the particular type of duct and coupling selected and as approved. In the absence of specific recommendations, various types of duct joint couplings shall be made watertight as specified.

3.6.5.1 Plastic Duct

Duct joints shall be made by brushing a plastic solvent cement on insides of plastic coupling fittings and on outsides of duct ends. Each duct and fitting shall then be slipped together with a quick one-quarter-turn twist to set the joint tightly.

3.7 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

The manholes and handholes shall be as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

3.8 WELDING

Perform the welding of supports and metallic ducts and welding or brazing of electrical connections by using qualified welders.

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 20


3.9 CABLE MARKERS

Provide cable markers or tags for each cable at duct entrances entering or leaving manholes or handholes and at each termination within the lighting vault. Cables in each manhole or handhole shall have not less than two tags per cable, one near each duct entrance hole. Immediately after cable installation, tags shall be permanently attached to cables and wires so that they cannot be accidentally detached.

3.10 FRANGIBLE REQUIREMENTS

Install frangible supports, couplings, and adapters as indicated or specified. At the 1000 foot cross bar and beyond, approach lights shall be mounted up to 6 feet above concrete foundation on threaded frangible couplings and 2 inch electrical metallic tubing (EMT). For mounting heights greater than 6 feet, approach lights shall be mounted on low-impact resistant frangible towers as indicated.

3.11 ELEVATED AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTS

Elevated lights shall be frangibly mounted, not to exceed 14 inches in height except where higher mounting is permitted in snow accumulation areas. Equipment exceeding 14 inches in height shall be frangibly mounted as indicated.

3.12 SEMIFLUSH AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTS

Remove water, debris, and other foreign substances prior to installing semiflush light base and light. Use positioning jigs to hold the light bases and/or lights to ensure correct orientation and leveling until the concrete, adhesive, or sealant can provide permanent support.

3.13 ENCLOSURES IN DRILLED HOLES

3.13.1 Holes for Light Fixtures

Holes shall be bored in existing pavement to the dimensions indicated with a diamond-edged bit to provide a smooth, straight cut. Bottom of hole shall be flat or slightly concave, except that an area at least 1 inch wide around the perimeter shall be flat. Surfaces deeper than the prescribed depth shall be filled with sealant to the level of the flat area and allowed to cure before further placement.

3.13.2 Holes for Transformer Enclosures

Holes shall be drilled or excavated through concrete pavement and loose material removed. Hole shall be filled with concrete to depth indicated. A minimum of 3 inches of concrete shall be provided at bottom of hole.

3.14 FIXTURES AND WIRES INSTALLATION

3.14.1 General

Sides and bottom of each light base shall be sandblasted immediately prior to installation. Inside faces of bored hole and bottom and sides of light base shall be covered with a coating of sealant that will completely fill the void between concrete and base. A jig or holding device shall be used when installing each light fixture to ensure positioning to the proper

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 21


elevation, alignment, level control, and azimuth control. Light fixture shall be oriented with the light beams parallel to the runway or taxiway centerline and facing in the required direction. Outermost edge of fixture shall be level with the surrounding pavement. Surplus sealant or flexible embedding material shall be removed. The holding device shall remain in place until sealant has reached its initial set. Fixture lead wires shall be properly arranged with respect to their connecting position. The wireway entrance into the light recess shall be blocked to retain the sealant material during curing.

3.15 SPLICES FOR AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTING CABLE

3.15.1 Connectors

Kit type connectors shall be used to splice 5 kV single-conductor series lighting cables. During installation and prior to covering with earth, mating surfaces of connectors shall be covered until connected and clean when plugged together. At joint where connectors come together, heat shrinkable tubing shall be installed with waterproof sealant with two half-lapped layers of tape over the entire joint. Joint shall prevent entrapment of air which might subsequently loosen the joint.

3.16 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

3.16.1 Counterpoise Installation

Counterpoise wire shall be laid for entire length of circuits supplying airfield lighting. Wire shall be in one piece, except where distance exceeds the length usually supplied. Counterpoise shall be installed on top of the envelope of concrete-encased duct and approximately 6 inches above direct burial cables and duct lines. Where trenches or duct lines intersect, counterpoise wires shall be electrically interconnected by exothermic welding or brazing. Counterpoise to earth ground shall be connected at every 2,000 feet of cable run, at lighting vault, and at feeder connection to light circuit by means of ground rods as specified. Counterpoise shall be installed in a separate duct under roads, railroads, and paved areas above the highest duct containing electrical or communications circuits.

3.16.2 Fixture Grounding

Each fixture or group of adjacent fixtures shall be grounded by a grounding circuit separate from the counterpoise system unless required otherwise or by driven ground rods if permitted. Fixtures, steel light bases or grounding bushings on steel conduits shall be connected to an independent ground rod by a No. 6 AWG bare stranded copper wire. Semiflush fixtures for direct mounting in pavement need not be grounded. Copper wire shall be connected to ground rods by exothermic weld or brazing.

3.17 MARKING AND LIGHTING OF AIRWAY OBSTRUCTIONS

Towers, poles, smokestacks, buildings of certain shapes and sizes, and other obstructions shall be marked and lighted in accordance with FAA AC 70/7460-1 and as indicated in or required otherwise.

3.17.1 Painting of Airway Obstructions

Patterns and colors to mark obstructions shall conform to FAA AC 70/7460-1 and shall be as indicated.

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 22


3.17.2 Obstruction Marker Lights

Obstruction marker lights shall be installed on radio towers, elevated water tanks, smokestacks, buildings, and similar structures with 1 inchzinc-coated rigid steel conduit stems using standard tees and elbows, except that lowering devices, when required, shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

3.18 ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS

Transformer lead connections shall conform to FAA AC 150/5345-26. Transformer secondary connectors shall plug directly into a mating connector on the transformer secondary leads. During installation, mating surfaces of connectors shall be covered until connected and clean when plugged together. At joint where connectors come together, heat shrinkable tubing shall be installed with waterproof sealant or with two half-lapped layers of tape over the entire joint. Joint shall prevent entrapment of air which might subsequently loosen the joint.

3.19 RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

3.19.1 Runway and Taxiway Edge Lights

Edge lights shall be elevated type lights except in paved areas where semiflush lights are required. Threshold and runway end lights shall be semiflush type as indicated on the contract drawings. Elevated lights shall be frangibly mounted and each light supplied power through an isolation transformer. The taxiway lights shall be omnidirectional and only require leveling. The runway lights require leveling and alignment of the beams for the correct toe-in of the beams.

3.19.2 Runway and Taxiway Centerline Lights

These lights may be mounted on light bases or in drilled holes as indicated on contract drawings. A transformer shall be provided for each group of four 45-watt or three 65-watt centerline lights and installed in a handhole as indicated on the contract drawings. Each light shall be provided with lamp failure shorting device to allow the other lights to operate if one lamp fails. Lights shall be connected to secondary circuit wires at fixture leads using preinsulated watertight connector sleeves crimped with a tool that requires a complete crimp before tool can be removed. Connection shall be at staggered locations and wrapped with one layer of half-lapped plastic electrical insulating tape. Light fixtures shall be installed in holes drilled in the pavement as indicated.


Notify the Contracting Officer five working days prior to each test. Submit performance test reports, upon completion and testing of the installed system, in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to provide compliance with the specified performance criteria. Each test shall indicate the final position of controls. Deficiencies found shall be corrected and tests repeated. Field test reports shall be written, signed and provided as each circuit or installation item is completed. Field tests shall include resistance-to-ground and resistance between conductors, and continuity measurements for each circuit. For each series circuit the input voltage and output current of the constant current regulator at each

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 23


intensity shall be measured. For multiple circuits the input and output voltage of the transformer for each intensity setting shall be measured. A visual inspection of the lights operation, or of the markings appearance, or of the installation of fixtures or units installed shall be reported.

3.20.1 Operating Test

Test each completed circuit installation for operation. Equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this Section. One day and one night test shall be conducted for the Contracting Officer.

3.20.2 Distribution Conductors, 600-Volt Class

Test shall verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist using an instrument which applies a voltage of approximately 500 volts providing a direct reading in resistance.

3.20.3 Counterpoise System Test and Inspection

Continuity of counterpoise system shall be checked by visual inspection at accessible locations. Continuity of counterpoise system to the vault grounding system shall be tested in manhole closest to the vault.

3.20.4 Progress Testing for Series Lighting Circuits

A megger test shall be conducted on each section of circuit or progressive combinations of sections as they are installed. Each section or progressive combination of sections shall be tested with a megohmmeter providing a voltage of approximately 1000 volts, a direct reading in resistance. Results shall be documented. Faults indicated by these tests shall be eliminated before proceeding with the circuit installation.

3.20.5 Electrical Acceptance Tests

Acceptance tests shall be performed for series and multiple airfield and heliport lighting circuits only on complete lighting circuits. Each series and multiple lighting circuit shall receive a high voltage insulation test.

3.20.5.1 Low-Voltage Continuity Tests

Each series circuit shall be tested for electrical continuity. Faults indicated by this test shall be eliminated before proceeding with the high-voltage insulation resistance test.

3.20.5.2 High-Voltage Insulation Resistance Tests

Each series lighting circuit shall be subjected to a high-voltage insulation resistance test by measurement of the insulation leakage current with a suitable high-voltage test instrument which has a steady, filtered direct current output voltage and limited current. High-voltage tester shall include an accurate voltmeter and microammeter for reading voltage applied to the circuit and resultant insulation leakage current. Voltages shall not exceed test values specified below.

3.20.5.2.1 Test Procedure

Both leads shall be disconnected from regulator output terminals and support so that air gaps of several inches exist between bare conductors

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 24


and ground. Cable sheaths shall be cleaned and dried for a distance of 1 foot from ends of cables and exposed insulation at ends of cables. Ends of both conductors of the circuit shall be connected together and to high-voltage terminals of test equipment, and test voltage applied as specified in the following tabulation between conductors and ground for a period of 5 minutes.

Test Voltage, dcSeries Lighting Circuits First Test on

New CircuitsTest on Existing

CircuitsHigh Intensity Series Lighting Circuits (5,000-Volt Leads, 500- and 200-Watt Transformers)

9000 5000

Medium Intensity Series Lighting Circuits (5,000-Volt Leads, 30/45-Watt Transformers)

6000 3000

600-Volt Circuits 1800 6000

When additions are made to existing circuits, only new sections shall be tested in accordance with "First Test on New Circuits" in this table. To ensure reliable operation, complete circuit shall be tested at reduced voltages indicated.

3.20.5.2.2 Leakage Current

Insulation leakage current shall be measured and recorded for each circuit after a 1 minute application of the test voltage. If leakage current exceeds values specified below, the circuit shall be sectionalized and retested and the defective parts shall be repaired or replaced. Leakage current limits include allowances for the normal number of connectors and splices for each circuit as follows:

a. Three microamperes for each 1000 feet of cable.

b. Two microamperes for each 200 watt and each 500 watt 5,000-volt series transformer.

c. Two microamperes for each 30/45-Watt 5,000 volt series transformer.

d. If measured value of insulation leakage current exceeds calculated value, the circuit shall be sectionalized and tested as specified for each section. Defective components shall be repaired or replaced until repeated tests indicate an acceptable value of leakage current for the entire circuit.

3.21 FINISHING

Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified and finish painting of items only primed at the factory shall be as required in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.22 TRAINING

Submit requirements of training one weeks before training is scheduled to begin. Submit information describing training to be provided, training aids to be used, samples of training materials, and schedules; a list of parts and components for the system by manufacturer's name, part number,

SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 25


nomenclature, and stock level required for maintenance and repair necessary to ensure continued operation with minimal delays; instructions necessary to checkout, troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the systems, including integrated electrical and mechanical schematics and diagrams and diagnostic techniques necessary to enable operation and troubleshooting after acceptance of the system.

a. Provide training on the proper operation and maintenance procedures for the system. Submit a list of special tools and test equipment required for maintenance and testing of the products supplied by the Contractor.

b. Submit 6 copies of operation for the equipment furnished. One complete set shall be furnished prior to performance testing and the remainder shall be furnished upon acceptance. Operating manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. Operating manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features.

c. Submit 6 copies of maintenance manuals listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. Maintenance manuals shall include conduit and equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed.

3.23 FINAL OPERATING TESTS

After completion of installations and the above tests, circuits, control equipment, and lights covered by the contract shall be demonstrated to be in acceptable operating condition. Each switch in the control tower lighting panels shall be operated so that each switch position is engaged at least twice. During this process, lights and associated equipment shall be observed to determine that each switch properly controls the corresponding circuit. Telephone or radio communication shall be provided between the operator and the observer. Tests shall be repeated from the alternate control station, from the remote control points, and again from the local control switches on the regulators. Each lighting circuit shall be tested by operating the lamps at maximum brightness for not less than 30 minutes. At the beginning and at the end of this test the correct number of lights shall be observed to be burning at full brightness. One day and one night operating test shall be conducted for the Contracting Officer.

3.24 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS

Submit a typed copy of the proposed posted instructions showing wiring, control diagrams, complete layout and operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system.


SECTION 26 56 20.00 10 Page 26



DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 27 05 14.00 10

CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS 1.4.1 Minimum Contractor Qualifications 1.4.2 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.1.1 Coaxial Cable 2.1.2 Outlets 2.1.3 Outlet Boxes

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Horizontal Cable Installation 3.1.2 Riser Cable Installation 3.1.3 Cables 3.1.4 Pull Cords 3.2 TERMINATIONS 3.3 GROUNDING 3.4 TESTING 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS


SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 1


SECTION 27 05 14.00 10

CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




1.2 SUMMARY

Provide a cable TV premises distribution system consisting of coaxial cables and connecting hardware to transport television signals throughout the building to user locations as indicated. Submit detail drawings including a complete list of equipment and material and containing complete wiring and schematic diagrams and other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a system. Drawings shall include vertical riser diagrams, equipment rack and panel details, elevation drawings of telecommunications closet walls, outlet face plate details for each outlet configuration, and descriptions and types of cables, conduits, and cable trays, if used. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Cable TV Premises Distribution System; G, DO

Detail drawings including a complete list of equipment and material and containing complete wiring and schematic diagrams and other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a system. Drawings shall include vertical riser diagrams, equipment rack and panel details, elevation drawings of telecommunications closet walls, outlet face plate details for each outlet configuration, and descriptions and types of cables, conduits, and cable trays, if used. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of

SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 2


equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation.Installation

Record drawings for the installed cable system showing the locations of cable terminations, including outlets, and location and routing of cables. The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings.

SD-03 Product Data

Spare Parts.Test Plan; G, PO

Test plan defining the tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational and performance specifications, 60 days prior to the proposed test date. The test plan must be approved before testing begins. The test plan shall identify the capabilities and functions to be tested, and include detailed instructions for the setup and execution of each test and procedures for evaluation and documentation of the results.

Qualifications; G, PO

Proof of the qualifications of the Contractor, Installers, and Manufacturers that will perform the work, and provide the specified products.

SD-06 Test Reports

Testing, G, PO

Test reports in booklet form with witness signatures verifying execution of tests shall be provided. The cable system testing documentation shall include the physical routing and a test report for each cable (end-to-end) from the installed outlet to the main termination point. Test reports shall be submitted within 14 days after completion of testing.

SD-07 Certificates

Materials and Equipment

Where materials or equipment are specified to conform, be constructed or tested to meet specific requirements, certification that the items provided conform to such requirements. Certification by a nationally recognized testing laboratory that a representative sample has been tested to meet the requirements, or a published catalog specification statement to the effect that the item meets the referenced standard, is acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. Compliance with these requirements does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with other requirements of the specifications.


SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 3


Manufacturer's Recommendations; G, PO

Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be provided prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received and approved.


Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G, PO

Commercial, off-the-shelf manuals for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the cable television premises distribution system. Specification sheets for cable, connectors, and other equipment shall be provided.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

Submit proof of the qualifications of the Contractor, Installers, and Manufacturers that will perform the work, and provide the specified products.

1.4.1 Minimum Contractor Qualifications

Work under this section shall be performed, and equipment shall be furnished and installed, by a qualified Contractor as defined herein. The Contractor shall have a minimum of two years of experience in the installation and testing of coaxial cable-based TV distribution systems and equipment. Installers assigned to the installation of this system or its components shall have a minimum of two years of experience in the installation of the specified coaxial cable and components.

1.4.2 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications

The equipment and hardware provided under this contract shall be products of manufacturers that have a minimum of two years of experience in producing the types of systems and equipment specified.


Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust or other contaminants.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of detail drawings, not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts, tools, test equipment and supplies, with current unit prices

SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 4


and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking. Provide the following additional materials required for facility startup:

a. 10 of each type of connector used.b. 10 of each type of cover plate, with connector.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that are the manufacturer's latest standard design that has been in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to installation. Where materials or equipment are specified to conform, be constructed or tested to meet specific requirements, submit certification that the items provided conform to such requirements. Certification by a nationally recognized testing laboratory that a representative sample has been tested to meet the requirements, or a published catalog specification statement to the effect that the item meets the referenced standard, is acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. Compliance with these requirements does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with other requirements of the specifications. Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements specified below and to the applicable requirements of NFPA 70. Cables shall be labeled on both ends with circuit number, room number, or other appropriate marking allowing for correct identification of the cable and its destination. Each faceplate shall be labeled with its function and a unique number to identify the cable run.

2.1.1 Coaxial Cable

Coaxial cable shall be RG-6/U, quad shield. Cable shall be label-verified. Cable jacket shall be factory marked at regular intervals identifying cable type. Cable shall be rated CMP in accordance with NFPA 70. Interconnecting cables shall be cable assemblies consisting of RG-6/U coaxial cable with male connectors at each end, provided in lengths determined by equipment locations as shown.

2.1.2 Outlets

Cable television outlets, including wall outlet plates, shall be equipped with a female connector to accept the connecting coaxial cable from the user's television set. Provide flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlet rated from 5 to 1000 MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes with mounting frame. Provide modular faceplates for mounting of CATV Outlets. Faceplate shall include designation labels and label covers for circuit identification. Faceplate color shall match outlet and switch coverplates.Faceplates provided shall be impact resistant plastic.

2.1.3 Outlet Boxes

Electrical boxes for cable television outlets shall be 4-11/16 inch square by 2-1/8 inches deep with minimum 3/8 inch deep single or two gang plaster ring as shown. Conduits shall be minimum 1 inch.

SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 5


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install system components and appurtenances in accordance with NFPA 70, manufacturer's instructions and as shown. Submit record drawings for the installed cable system showing the locations of cable terminations, including outlets, and location and routing of cables. The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Provide necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete cable television distribution system, ready to connect to external television signal sources. Penetrations in fire-rated construction shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. Install conduits, outlets, raceways, and wiring in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Cables and outlets shall be individually labeled and marked. Cables shall not be installed in the same cable tray, utility pole compartment, or floor trench compartment with ac power cables. Cables not installed in conduit or wireways shall be properly secured and neat in appearance and, if installed in plenums or other spaces used for environmental air, shall comply with NFPA 70 requirements for this type of installation.

3.1.1 Horizontal Cable Installation

The rated cable pulling tension shall not be exceeded. Cable shall not be stressed such that twisting, stretching or kinking occurs. Cable shall not be spliced. Cable not in a wireway shall be suspended a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports no greater than 60 inches apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Placement of cable parallel to power conductors shall be avoided, if possible; a minimum separation of 12 inches shall be maintained when such placement cannot be avoided. Cables shall be terminated unless shown otherwise. Minimum bending radius shall not be exceeded during installation or once installed. Cable ties shall not be excessively tightened such that the transmission characteristics of the cable are altered. In raised floor areas, cable shall be installed after the flooring system has been installed. Cable 6 feet long shall be neatly coiled not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed point in raised floor areas.

3.1.2 Riser Cable Installation

The rated cable pulling tension shall not be exceeded. Riser cable support intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be provided prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received and approved. Cable bend radius shall not be less than ten times the outside diameter of the cable during installation and once installed. Maximum tensile strength rating of the cable shall not be exceeded. Cable shall not be spliced.

3.1.3 Cables

Cables shall have a minimum of 6 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the cable television outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius shall not be exceeded.

SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 6


3.1.4 Pull Cords

Pull cords shall be installed in conduits serving the cable television premises distribution system which do not initially have cable installed.

3.2 TERMINATIONS

Cables and conductors shall sweep into termination areas; cables and conductors shall not bend at right angles. Manufacturer's minimum bending radius shall not be exceeded. Coaxial cables shall be terminated with appropriate connectors as required. Cable shield conductor shall be grounded to communications ground at only one point and shall not make electrical contact with ground anywhere else.

3.3 GROUNDING

The cable television distribution system ground shall be installed in the cable television entrance facility and in any auxiliary closet identified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM or otherwise indicated. Equipment racks shall be connected to the electrical safety ground.

3.4 TESTING

Submit test reports in booklet form with witness signatures verifying execution of tests. The cable system testing documentation shall include the physical routing and a test report for each cable (end-to-end) from the installed outlet to the main termination point. Test reports shall be submitted within 7 days after completion of testing.Materials and documentation to be furnished under this specification are subject to inspections and tests.

a. Submit a Test Plan defining the tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational and performance specifications, 60 days prior to the proposed test date. The plan shall be approved before testing begins. The test plan shall identify the capabilities and functions to be tested, and include detailed instructions for the setup and execution of each test and procedures for evaluation and documentation of the results.

b. Components shall be terminated prior to testing.

c. Equipment and systems will not be accepted until the required inspections and tests have been made, demonstrating that the cable television premises distribution system conforms to the specified requirements, and that the required equipment, systems, and documentation have been provided.

d. After installation of the cable and before connecting system components, each cable section shall be end-to-end tested using a time domain reflectometer (TDR) to determine shorts, opens, kinks, and other impedance discontinuities and their locations. Cable sections showing adverse impedance discontinuities (greater than 6 dB loss) shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

e. There shall be no cable splices between system components unless approved by the Government.

SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 7


3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Submit commercial, off-the-shelf manuals for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the cable television premises distribution system.


SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 8




SECTION 27 05 29.00 10

PROTECTIVE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (PDS) FOR SIPRNET COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.2 REFERENCES 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.3.1 Conditions 1.3.2 Construction Methods 1.3.3 PDS Design 1.3.4 PDS Design Technical Review 1.3.5 PDS Design Approval Request 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Manufacturer's Qualifications 1.5.2 Installer's Qualifications 1.5.3 Equipment 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PDS CARRIER CONFIGURATION 2.1.1 Secure Raceway Carrier 2.1.1.1 Fittings and Components 2.1.1.2 Mounting Accessories 2.1.1.3 Through Wall Penetrating 2.1.1.4 Pull Points 2.2 USER DROP BOX 2.3 ENCLOSURES

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 PDS CARRIER ROUTING 3.2.1 General 3.2.2 Distribution Topology 3.2.3 Mounting Location Considerations 3.2.4 Adjacent Infrastructure Considerations 3.3 INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Mounting PDS Carrier 3.3.2 Enclosures 3.3.2.1 User Drop Box (UDB) 3.3.2.2 Other Enclosures 3.3.3 Mechanical Security 3.3.4 Carrier Support 3.4 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.4.1 Physical Inspection 3.4.2 Magnetic Test

SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 1


3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION


SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 2


SECTION 27 05 29.00 10

PROTECTIVE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (PDS) FOR SIPRNET COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS08/11

PART 1 GENERAL


1.2 REFERENCES



ANSI C80.3 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)


NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2 2013; Errata 2 2013) National Electrical Code

NATIONAL SECURITY TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND INFORMATION SYSTEMS SECURITY (NSTISS)

NSTISSAM TEMPEST/2-95 (1995; Am A 2000) RED/BLACK Installation Guidance

NSTISSI-7003 (1996) Protective Distribution Systems (PDS)



1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1 Conditions

Notify the Contracting Officer if it is impossible to install SIPRNET PDS that complies with this section and references.

1.3.2 Construction Methods

Methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract will be subject to the control and approval of the Contracting Officer.

SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 3


1.3.3 PDS Design

Include separate plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate PDS carrier route, PDS carrier mounting height above finished floor, user drop box mounting height, and user drop box locations. Submit the PDS design to the cognizant Central TEMPEST Technical Authority (CTTA), for a technical review prior to the acquisition of material, through the installation Network Enterprise Center (NEC) or Directorate of Information Management (DOIM). The current approved systems by CTTA are produced by HOLOCOM INC, Wiremold INC, or approved equal.

1.3.4 PDS Design Technical Review

Coordinate with the installation NEC/DOIM and submit PDS design for technical review to CTTA. Provide PDS carrier shop drawings, List of Material (LOM), and any other documentation required 90-days prior to PDS carrier installation (see NSTISSI-7003, Appendix C).

1.3.5 PDS Design Approval Request

PDS design approving authority is the installation NEC/DOIM Designated Approving Authority (DAA). Submit PDS design and CTTA technical review to the installation NEC/DOIM to obtained PDS design approval from the DAA prior to installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

PDS design; G, DOPDS Design Technical Review; G, DOPDS Design Approval; G, DO

SD-03 Product Data

PDS Hardened Carrier; G, PO

SD-04 Samples

PDS Carrier Surface MountedPull BoxesFittings


User Drop BoxOther Enclosures


1.5.1 Manufacturer's Qualifications

Use firms regularly engaged in manufacture of secure raceway systems,

SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 4


boxes, and fittings of the types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

1.5.2 Installer's Qualifications

Installer is required to obtain certification from the manufacturer of secure raceway system and install secure raceway system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.5.3 Equipment

PDS Hardened Carrier shall meet or exceed guidelines as defined by NSTISSI-7003 and shall be approved for use by DHS, U.S. Army, U.S. Marine Corps, U.S. Navy, and U.S. Air Force. Submit manufacturer's descriptive data.


Deliver secure raceways, conduit, fittings and components in factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PDS CARRIER CONFIGURATION

Use secure raceway carrier system in office environments, Use conduit carrier in Non-office environments, such as hangars, maintenance facilities, warehouse, training areas, industrial areas.

2.1.1 Secure Raceway Carrier

Provide secure raceway, fittings and components manufactured from ferrous material. Submit three 6-inch lengths of exposed type PDS carrier surface mounted conduit material, including component and fitting samples from the manufacturer, along with a LOM to the NEC/DOIM. Show finishes available (if applicable). Contractor shall submit a SIPRNET floor plan labeling scheme to NEC for review at least 45 days before facility cabling installation. PDS carrier that is comprised of Secure Raceway systems shall be:

a. Square or rectangular design with removable top covers or solid construction

b. 2 by 2 inch raceway raceway for horizontal backbone and vertical riser runs

c. 2 by 2 inch raceway for vertical user drops from horizontal backbone

d. Utilize elbows, couplings, fittings and connectors constructed from the same type of ferrous material as the secure raceway

e. Do not exceed 70 percent cable fill capacity of secure raceway with removable top cover in horizontal runs. TIA-569 cable fill standards do not apply.

f. Do not exceed 60 percent fill capacity of secure raceway of solid construction. TIA-569 cable fill standards do not apply.

SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 5


2.1.1.1 Fittings and Components

Fittings and components include flat internal and external elbows, tees, couplings for joining raceway sections, nipples, wire clips, blank end fittings, and device mounting brackets and plates as applicable. Provide full capacity corner elbows and fittings to maintain a controlled 2-inch cable bend radius that meet the TIA-569 specification for Fiber Optic and UTP cabling and exceeding the requirements for communications pathways.

2.1.1.2 Mounting Accessories

Mount secure raceways to the wall partition using 1-inch stand-off mounting brackets or spacers. Do not mount the secure raceways flush with the wall partition.

2.1.1.3 Through Wall Penetrating

a. Use trim plates threaded rigid pipe and locking rings on both the inside and outside of the raceway to secure the thru-wall penetration.

b. Provide dielectric breaks when penetrating secure room wall partitions.

c. Seal space between wall partition and through wall penetration using fire-stop material.

d. Fire-stop vertical risers and through wall penetrations of fire rated wall partitions after pulling cabling. Annotate firewall penetrations on PDS design.

2.1.1.4 Pull Points

a. Provide a pull point for secure raceway with removable top cover every 270 degree change in direction. Provide additional pull points in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

b. Provide a pull point for secure raceway of solid construction every 180 degree change in direction. Provide additional pull points in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2.2 USER DROP BOX

Provide User Drop Box (UDB) (aka Secure User Workstation Enclosure, Drop Box, or Lockbox) that is at least 7-inch high by 6-inch wide by 4-inch deep, tamper-resistant design constructed from 16 gauge steel with welded internal hinges, without pre-punched knockouts; and has a single door that has a built-in steel hasp that accepts a GSA approved changeable combination padlock. UDB shall accommodate a complete line of open connectivity outlets; modular inserts for Category 6 UTP or STP cable; fiber optic cabling with matching faceplates. STP cabling shall use shielded connectors, jacks, and patch panels. UDB with exterior hinges, pre-punched knockouts, and built-in locks are not acceptable.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

Provide equipment and pull-box enclosures constructed from 16 gauge steel; have a single door with a built-in steel hasp or multi-point security hasp that accepts a GSA approved changeable combination padlock; without pre-punched knockouts; and a tamper-resistant design with welded internal

SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 6


hinges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Examine the route and mounting locations of the raceways, boxes, distribution systems, supporting structure and accessories, to determine if conditions exist that will inhibit or prevent proper PDS installation. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work (i.e. that would render the distribution system non-compliant with governing security regulations). Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PDS CARRIER ROUTING

3.2.1 General

Route the PDS carrier in a tree type fashion.

a. Start the PDS horizontal backbone at the TR (SIPRNET TR or at IPS container location) with a single raceway or conduit sized accordingly (70 percent cable fill for secure raceway with removable top cover, 60 percent cable fill for EMT conduit and solid construction secure raceway) to contain CAT6 UTP, CAT6 STP, or fiber optic cable runs.

b. Extend the PDS carrier from the PDS horizontal backbone throughout the facility to areas where SIPRNET access is required. Branch off the PDS horizontal backbone with a horizontal run to an area where the UDB is located.

c. Use vertical carrier runs from the horizontal run to the UDB. TIA-569 change in direction standard does not apply.

d. Use standard under-floor cable distribution methods to distribute SIPRNET cabling within Secure Room and SCIF spaces with raised flooring.

e. Maintain RED/BLACK cable separation in accordance with NSTISSAM TEMPEST/2-95.

f. Remove all burrs from carrier segments prior to installation.

3.2.2 Distribution Topology

Use a distributed topology when designing the PDS carrier. Locating a small secondary network switch in an equipment enclosure mounted in an Uncontrolled Access Area (UAA) space or in a relay or equipment rack within a Controlled Access Area (CAA) space (i.e. SCIF, NOC/BOC, etc.) that has a high concentration of users is acceptable. Interconnect network switches using single-mode fiber optic cable. Increase the capacity of the network switch to provide service to adjacent spaces as required.

3.2.3 Mounting Location Considerations

a. Route the PDS carrier so that it does not cross windows or doorway openings; does not cross ceiling or wall mounted lighting fixtures; does not obscure EXIT signs or fire alarms; and maintains a minimum 3-foot separation from fire sprinkler heads.

SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 7


b. Bend (saddle or offset) conduit to follow wall contours and avoid wall obstacles (columns, pipes, etc.).

c. Use offset raceway to route secure raceway systems around columns and other wall partition obstacles.

d. Route PDS carrier so that it is surface mounted on interior walls wherever possible. Obtain exceptions from NEC/DOIM prior to installation to mount PDS carrier on exterior wall partitions.

e. Route PDS carrier to maximized cable fills in horizontal runs and reduce the number of horizontal runs within the same space.

f. Use all-thread rod to mount the PDS carrier to true ceiling structure when routing across open areas (e.g. large hallways, open office areas, large rooms) that exceed 8 feet. Mounting the PDS carrier directly from suspended ceiling framework is not acceptable.

3.2.4 Adjacent Infrastructure Considerations

Keep conduit a minimum of 6 inches from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. A minimum separation of 6-inches is required between the PDS carrier and water pipes, electrical wires, electrical pipes, plumbing, air conditioning, etc.

3.3 INSTALLATION

Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and compliance with project site manager and NEC/DOIM.

Epox shall be applied on all edges of removable cover and screw tops. Use a two-part, self hardening epoxy equivalent to the 3M DP-420 series, with at least a 20 minute working life onall fitting joints and seams. The epoxy color shall contrast with the PDS finish. Clear (light yellow color when cured) epoxy shall be default for secure raceway (Holocomm, wiremold, or approved other) PDS and gray or black for conduit carrier. Local security personnel may specify the color of epoxy. Epoxy that remains completely clear upon hardening shall not be used. Apply one bead of epoxy to each end of the compression and box connector fittings connected to EMT. The epoxy shall completely encircle connectors and presents a neat appearance without drips.

3.3.1 Mounting PDS Carrier

Surface mount PDS Conduit on the wall using conduit clamps, brackets, or mounts with 0.5 to 1-inch offset spacer from the wall surface. Mount PDS carrier to a wall partition every 5 feet and/or within 18 inches of a section or component connection. Do not mount the PDS Carrier directly to the wall surface.

a. Where wall mounting is unavailable, use appropriately sized all thread rods to mount PDS carrier to ceiling structure.

b. Do not mount PDS carrier to acoustical tile ceiling (ATC) framework.

c. Fasten PDS carrier and component items to building wall partitions using appropriate anchor and fastener for wall partition type.

SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 8


d. Mount PDS carrier so that is is level and plumb along its route. The top edge of the carrier is horizontally level. Whenever possible maintain a minimum of 2-inches below the suspended ceiling line or the true ceiling line, whichever is lower.

e. Use appropriate hanger type to mount PDS Conduit carrier from ceiling structure.

f. Struts are not allowed to be used to mount secure raceway or conduit to wall partitions.

g. No more than 1/4 inch play is allowed on TOP CAP (top cover) and span cut per segment span.

h. Install the PDS carrier to permit visual inspections of its entire run.

i. Do not block doorways or access to emergency exits and do not inhibit the operation of windows.

j. Do not paint or cover the PDS carrier with wallpaper or other covering unless the paint is applied by the carrier manufacturer.

k. Bond PDS carrier to TGB or TMGB at point of origin.

3.3.2 Enclosures

Use of enclosures with pre-punched knockouts or external hinges is not acceptable. Fasten UDB, pull boxes, and enclosures to the wall partition using fasteners appropriate for the wall partition type.

3.3.2.1 User Drop Box (UDB)

a. Indicate UDB locations in the PDS Plan and on as-built drawings.

b. Size the UDB to terminate up to 6 cables.

c. Coordinate drop box location with furniture, fixtures and equipment that will be used in the vicinity. Surface mount drop boxes on the wall partition approximately 4 to 5 feet above final floor line depending on room furniture height and layout.

3.3.2.2 Other Enclosures

Indicate enclosure type (user drop box, equipment, or pull-box) on shop and as-built drawings.

3.3.3 Mechanical Security

Comply with site specific epoxy standards obtained from the installation NEC/DOIM. Apply a continuous bead of epoxy at all component, coupling, and fitting connection joints of an EMT conduit PDS carrier system. Seal pull box covers to the pull boxes around the mating surfaces after installation if they cannot be secured with GSA approved changeable combination padlock.

3.3.4 Carrier Support

Support carrier with mounting brackets at intervals in accordance with manufacturer's installation sheets.

SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 9


3.4 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE

3.4.1 Physical Inspection

Physically inspect all interfaces to ensure that they are tight and cannot turn. Also, physically inspect lock covers to ensure that the lock cap is properly sealed inside the locking mechanism.

3.4.2 Magnetic Test

Perform magnet test on all components (e.g. carrier conduit, carrier raceway, pull boxes, enclosures, conduit bodies, cover plates, etc) and fittings used to construct the carrier. Place a magnet on the carrier component or fitting to verify that construction is from ferrous material. Some alloys will fail the magnet test (e.g. 309 stainless steel) but meet the ferrous material requirements. Provide alloy material property list for components that fail magnet test to the Contracting Officer for approval. Use of components and fittings that fail the magnet test and are not made from ferrous material is not acceptable.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. Protect raceways and boxes until acceptance.


SECTION 27 05 29.00 10 Page 10




SECTION 27 10 00

BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM

08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD) 1.3.2 Building Distributor (BD) 1.3.3 Floor Distributor (FD) 1.3.4 Telecommunications Room (TR) 1.3.5 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications) 1.3.6 Equipment Room (ER) (Telecommunications) 1.3.7 Open Cable 1.3.8 Open Office 1.3.9 Pathway 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6.1 Shop Drawings 1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings 1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Space Drawings 1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications 1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor 1.6.2.2 Key Personnel 1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications 1.6.3 Test Plan 1.6.4 Regulatory Requirements 1.6.5 Standard Products 1.6.5.1 Alternative Qualifications 1.6.5.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.9 WARRANTY 1.10 MAINTENANCE 1.10.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.10.2 Record Documentation 1.10.3 Spare Parts

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS 2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY 2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING 2.3.1 Backbone Cabling 2.3.1.1 Backbone Copper 2.3.1.2 Backbone Optical Fiber 2.3.2 Horizontal Cabling



2.3.2.1 Horizontal Copper 2.3.3 Work Area Cabling 2.3.3.1 Work Area Copper 2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES 2.4.1 Backboards 2.4.2 Equipment Support Frame 2.4.3 Connector Blocks 2.4.4 Cable Guides 2.4.5 Patch Panels 2.4.5.1 Category 6 Patch Cords 2.4.5.2 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel 2.4.5.3 Fiber Optic Patch Panel 2.4.6 Optical Fiber Patch Cords - Multimode 2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES 2.5.1 Outlet/Connector Copper 2.5.2 Jack Body Color Coding 2.5.3 Optical Fiber Adapters(Couplers) 2.5.4 Optical Fiber Connectors 2.5.5 Cover Plates 2.5.6 Weatherproof Industrial Telephone Enclosure 2.6 MULTI-USER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA) 2.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS 2.8 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL 2.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE 2.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES 2.11 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS 2.11.1 Factory Reel Tests

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Cabling 3.1.1.1 Separation from EMI Sources 3.1.1.2 Open Cable 3.1.1.3 Backbone Cable 3.1.1.4 Horizontal Cabling 3.1.2 Pathway Installations 3.1.2.1 Pathway Installation in Telecommunications Rooms 3.1.3 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground 3.1.4 Cable Tray Installation 3.1.5 Work Area Outlets 3.1.5.1 Terminations 3.1.5.2 Cover Plates 3.1.5.3 Cables 3.1.5.4 Pull Cords 3.1.5.5 Multi-User Telecommunications Outlet Assembly (MUTOA) 3.1.6 Telecommunications Space Termination 3.1.6.1 Connector Blocks 3.1.6.2 Patch Panels 3.1.6.3 Equipment Support Frames 3.1.7 Electrical Penetrations 3.1.8 Grounding and Bonding 3.2 LABELING 3.2.1 Labels 3.2.2 Cable 3.2.3 Termination Hardware 3.2.4 Documentation 3.3 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING 3.3.1 Painting Backboards



3.4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING 3.5 TESTING 3.5.1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing 3.5.1.1 Inspection 3.5.1.2 Verification Tests 3.5.1.3 Performance Tests 3.5.1.4 Final Verification Tests




SECTION 27 10 00

BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ASSOCIATION (ECA)

ECA EIA/ECA 310 (2005) Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment



INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

ICEA S-83-596 (2011) Indoor Optical Fiber Cables

ICEA S-90-661 (2012) Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)

NECA/BICSI 568 (2006) Standard for Installing Building Telecommunications Cabling


ANSI/NEMA WC 66 (2013) Performance Standard for Category 6 and Category 7 100 Ohm Shielded and Unshielded Twisted Pairs




TIA-1152 (2009) Requirements for Field Test



Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling

TIA-455-21 (1988a; R 2012) FOTP-21 - Mating Durability of Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices

TIA-526-14 (2010b) OFSTP-14A Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant

TIA-526-7 (2002; R 2008) OFSTP-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant

TIA-568-C.0 (2009; Add 1 2010; Add 2 2012) Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

TIA-568-C.1 (2009; Add 2 2011; Add 1 2012) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

TIA-568-C.2 (2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards

TIA-568-C.3 (2008; Add 1 2011) Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard


TIA-570 (2012c) Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard

TIA-606 (2012b) Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure

TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises

TIA/EIA-598 (2005c) Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding

TIA/EIA-604-10 (2002a) FOCIS 10 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard - Type LC

TIA/EIA-604-12 (2000) FOCIS 12 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type MT-RJ

TIA/EIA-604-2 (2004b; R 2014) FOCIS 2 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard

TIA/EIA-604-3 (2004b; R 2014) Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS), Type SC and SC-APC, FOCIS-3



U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

FCC Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)


UL 1286 (2008; Reprint Sep 2013) Office Furnishings

UL 1666 (2007; Reprint Jun 2012) Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts

UL 1863 (2004; Reprint Nov 2012) Communication Circuit Accessories

UL 444 (2008; Reprint Apr 2010) Communications Cables


UL 50 (2007; Reprint Apr 2012) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations

UL 514C (1996; Reprint Nov 2011) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

UL 723 (2008; Reprint Aug 2013) Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

UL 969 (1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems


Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS, OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP), apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-569, TIA-606 and IEEE 100 and herein.

1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)

A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates. (International expression for main cross-connect (MC).)

1.3.2 Building Distributor (BD)

A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. (International expression for intermediate cross-connect (IC).)



1.3.3 Floor Distributor (FD)

A distributor used to connect horizontal cable and cabling subsystems or equipment. (International expression for horizontal cross-connect (HC).)

1.3.4 Telecommunications Room (TR)

An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable, terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross-connect between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling.

1.3.5 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)

An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables (including wireless) including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the equipment room.

1.3.6 Equipment Room (ER) (Telecommunications)

An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity.

1.3.7 Open Cable

Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by NFPA 70. This refers to cabling that is "open" to the space in which the cable has been installed and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions associated with that space.

1.3.8 Open Office

A floor space division provided by furniture, moveable partitions, or other means instead of by building walls.

1.3.9 Pathway

A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable.


The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include permanently installed backbone and horizontal cabling, horizontal and backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways, telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and hardware for splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport telephone and data (including LAN) between equipment items in a building. The horizontal system shall be wired in a star topology from the telecommunications work area to the floor distributor or campus distributor at the center or hub of the star. The backbone cabling and pathway system includes intrabuilding and interbuilding interconnecting cabling, pathway, and terminal hardware. The intrabuilding backbone provides connectivity from the floor distributors to the building distributors or to the campus distributor and from the building distributors to the campus distributor as required. The backbone system shall be wired in a star topology with the campus distributor at the center or hub of the star. The interbuilding



backbone system provides connectivity between the campus distributors and is specified in Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP). Provide telecommunications pathway systems referenced herein as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Telecommunications drawings; G, DO

Telecommunications Space Drawings; G, DO

In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.

SD-03 Product Data

Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal); G, DO

Patch panels; G, DO

Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies; G, DO

Equipment support frame; G, DO

Connector blocks; G, DO

Spare Parts

Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Include performance and characteristic curves. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references. Should manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification, the supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

SD-06 Test Reports

Telecommunications cabling testing; G, PO

SD-07 Certificates

Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications; G, PO

Key Personnel Qualifications; G, PO

Manufacturer Qualifications; G, PO

Test plan; G, PO




Factory reel tests; G, PO


Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5; G, PO


Record Documentation; G, PO


1.6.1 Shop Drawings

In exception to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submitted plan drawings shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size using a minimum scale of 1/8 inch per foot. Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings

Provide registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved, drawings in accordance with TIA-606. The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in accordance with TIA-606. The drawings should provide details required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity from the EF telecommunications and ER telecommunications, CD's, BD's, and FD's to the telecommunications work area outlets. Provide a plastic laminated schematic of the as-installed telecommunications cable system showing cabling, CD's, BD's, FD's, and the EF and ER for telecommunications keyed to floor plans by room number. Mount the laminated schematic in the EF telecommunications space as directed by the Contracting Officer. The following drawings shall be provided as a minimum:

a. T1 - Layout of complete building per floor - Building Area/Serving Zone Boundaries, Backbone Systems, and Horizontal Pathways. Layout of complete building per floor. The drawing indicates location of building areas, serving zones, vertical backbone diagrams, telecommunications rooms, access points, pathways, grounding system, and other systems that need to be viewed from the complete building perspective.

b. T2 - Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and Cable Identification (ID’S). Shows a building area or serving zone. These drawings show drop locations, telecommunications rooms, access points and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and other congested areas.



c. T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling, Firestopping, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Safety, Department of Transportation (DOT). Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals such as faceplate labeling, faceplate types, faceplate population installation procedures, detail racking, and raceways.

1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Space Drawings

Provide T3 drawings in accordance with TIA-606 that include telecommunications rooms plan views, pathway layout (cable tray, racks, ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and cabinet, rack, backboard and wall elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector assembly, outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and equipment spaces and cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list of equipment and material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation. Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings.

1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications

Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel. Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system contractor, the telecommunications system installer, and the supervisor (if different from the installer). A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel.

1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor

The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation, and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years of similar scope and size. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications contractor.

1.6.2.2 Key Personnel

Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the application, installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years.

Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level. Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key personnel.



In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using optical fiber and copper telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity.

Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the Contracting Officer.

Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval from The Contracting Officer.

1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications

Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of components which comply with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and TIA-568-C.3.

1.6.3 Test Plan

Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the components and accessories for each cable type specified, 60 days prior to the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of



similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.






Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt, dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment placed in storage.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

1.9 WARRANTY


1.10 MAINTENANCE

1.10.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system, Data Package 5. Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than 2



months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS, and RECORD DOCUMENTATION. Ensure that these drawings and documents depict the as-built configuration.

1.10.2 Record Documentation

Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination hardware in accordance with TIA-606. T5 drawings shall include schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management, patch panel layouts and cover plate assignments, cross-connect information and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided on electronic media using Windows based computer cable management software. Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a minimum:

a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in accordance with TIA-606. The cable records shall include the required data fields for each cable and complete end-to-end circuit report for each complete circuit from the assigned outlet to the entry facility in accordance with TIA-606. Include manufacture date of cable with submittal.

b. Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels, cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided in accordance with TIA-606. Documentation shall include the required data fields as a minimum in accordance with TIA-606.

1.10.3 Spare Parts

In addition to the requirements of Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

Components shall be UL or third party certified. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. Provide a complete system of telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology. Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables, connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein.



2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY

Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with TIA-569 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide system furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286.

2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING

Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3 and NFPA 70. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by TIA-606 and UL 969. Ship cable on reels or in boxes bearing manufacture date for for unshielded twisted pair (UTP) in accordance with ICEA S-90-661 and optical fiber cables in accordance with ICEA S-83-596 for all cable used on this project. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used.

2.3.1 Backbone Cabling

2.3.1.1 Backbone Copper

Copper backbone cable shall be solid conductor, 24 AWG, 100 ohm, 100 -pair, Category 3, UTP, in accordance with ICEA S-90-661, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and UL 444, formed into 25 pair binder groups covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket and overall metallic shield. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) at regular length marking intervals in accordance with ICEA S-90-661 . Provide plenum (CMP), riser (CMR), or general purpose (CM or CMG)communications rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted in accordance with NFPA 70.

2.3.1.2 Backbone Optical Fiber

Provide in accordance with ICEA S-83-596, TIA-568-C.3, UL 1666 and NFPA 70. Cable shall be imprinted with fiber count, fiber type and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches.

Provide the number of strands indicated, (but not less than 12 strands between the main telecommunication room and each of the other telecommunication rooms), of single-mode(OS1), tight buffered fiber optic cable.

Provide tight buffered fiber optic multimode, 62.5/125-um diameter(OM1) cable as indicated.

Provide plenum (OFNP), riser (OFNR), or general purpose (OFN or OFNG) rated non-conductive, fiber optic cable in accordance with NFPA 70. Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted in accordance with NFPA 70. The cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA-598.

Provide plenum (OFNP) riser (OFNR) , or general purpose (OFN or OFNG) rated non-conductive, fiber optic cable in accordance with NFPA 70. Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted in accordance with NFPA 70. The cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA-598.



2.3.2 Horizontal Cabling

Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance characteristics in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.

2.3.2.1 Horizontal Copper Provide horizontal copper cable, UTP, 100 ohm in accordance with TIA-568-C.2, UL 444, ANSI/NEMA WC 66, ICEA S-90-661 . Provide four each individually twisted pair, minimum size 24 AWG conductors, Category 6, with a thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) and length marking at regular intervals in accordance with ICEA S-90-661. Provide plenum (CMP), riser (CMR), or general purpose (CM or CMG) communications rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted in accordance with NFPA 70. Cables installed in conduit within and under slabs shall be UL listed and labeled for wet locations in accordance with NFPA 70.

2.3.3 Work Area Cabling

2.3.3.1 Work Area Copper

Provide work area copper cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.2, with a thermoplastic jacket.

The data portion of the standard Voice/Data cabling shall be UTP (unshielded twisted pair) with white jacket

The voice portion of the standard Voice/Data cabling shall be UTP (unshielded twisted pair) with blue jacket.

The SIPRnet cabling shall be STP (Shielded twisted pair) with red jacket.

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the telecommunications entrance facility and telecommunication equipment rooms to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and cross-connecting permanent cabling. Provide telecommunications interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with TIA-606.

2.4.1 Backboards

Provide void-free, interior gradeA-C plywood 3/4 inch thick 4 by 8 feet. Backboards shall be fire rated by manufacturing process. Fire stamp shall be clearly visible. . Backboards shall be provided on a all walls in the telecommunication spaces.

2.4.2 Equipment Support Frame

Provide in accordance with ECA EIA/ECA 310 and UL 50.

a. Bracket, wall mounted, 8 gauge aluminum. Provide hinged bracket compatible with 19 inches panel mounting.

b. Racks, floor mounted modular type, 11 gauge aluminum construction,



minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Provide rack with vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug, and receptacles with dedicated power circuit as indicated on drawings.. Rack shall be compatible with 19 inches panel mounting.

c. Cabinets, freestanding modular type, 11 gauge aluminum construction, minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Cabinet shall have removable and lockable side panels, front and rear doors, and have adjustable feet for leveling. Cabinet shall be vented in the roof and rear door. Cabinet shall have cable access in the roof and base and be compatible with 19 inches panel mounting. Provide cabinet with grounding bar, rack mounted 550 CFM fan with filter, and receptacles with dedicated power circuit as indicated on drawings.. All cabinets shall be keyed alike. Receptacles with dedicated power circuit as indicated on drawings shall be provided within the cabinet

2.4.3 Connector Blocks

Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) Type 110 for Category 6 systems. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare.

2.4.4 Cable Guides

Provide cable guides specifically manufactured for the purpose of routing cables, wires and patch cords horizontally and vertically on 19 inches equipment racks and telecommunications backboards. Cable guides of ring or bracket type devices mounted on rack panelsbackboard for horizontal cable management and individually mounted for vertical cable management. Mount cable guides with screws, and/or nuts and lockwashers.

2.4.5 Patch Panels

Provide ports for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the panel plus 25 percent spare. Provide pre-connectorized optical fiber and copper patch cords for patch panels. Provide patch cords, as complete assemblies, with matching connectors as specified. Provide fiber optic patch cables with crossover orientation in accordance with TIA-568-C.3. Patch cords shall meet minimum performance requirements specified in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and TIA-568-C.3 for cables, cable length and hardware specified.

2.4.5.1 Category 6 Patch Cords

Patch cords shall meet minimum performance requirements specified in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and TIA-568-C.3 for cables, cable length and hardware specified and shall have the following properties:

A. Shall be round, and consist of 8 insulated 24 AWG stranded copper conductors arranged in 4 color-coded twisted-pairs within flame-retardant jacket.

B. Be equipped with modular 8-position plugs on both ends, wired straight through with standards compliant wiring.

C. Use modular plugs, which exceed FCC CFR 47 Part 68 Subpart F and IEC 60603-7 specifications, and have 50 microinches (0.0013 mm) minimum of gold plating over nickel contacts.



D. Be resistant to corrosion from humidity, extreme temperatures, and airborne contaminants.

E. Utilize cable that exhibits power sum NEXT performance.

F. Be available in several colors with or without color strain relief boots providing snagless design.

G. Meet flex test requirements of 1000 cycles with boot5s and 100 cycles without boots.

H. Be available in any custom length and standard lengths.

I. Be made by ISO 9001 certified manufacturer.

J. Electrical Specifications:

1. Input Impedance Without Averaging: 100 ohms plus or minus 15 percent from 1 to 100 MHz.2. One hundred percent transmission tested for performance up to 100 MHz. Manufacturer shall guarantee cords are compatible with Category 6 links.3. Utilize cable that is UL verified (or equivalent) for TIA/EIA proposed Category 6 electrical performance.4. UL listed 1863.

2.4.5.2 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel

Provide in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Panels shall be third party verified and shall comply with EIA/TIACategory 6 requirements. Panel shall be constructed of 0.09 inches minimum aluminum and shall be rack mounted and compatible with an ECA EIA/ECA 310 19 inches equipment rack. Panel shall provide 48 non-keyed, 8-pin modular ports, wired to T568A. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on Type 110 IDCs and shall utilize a printed circuit board interface. The rear of each panel shall have incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each port factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates above each port.

2.4.5.3 Fiber Optic Patch Panel

Provide panel for maintenance and cross-connecting of optical fiber cables. Panel shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel minimum and shall be rack mounted and compatible with a ECA EIA/ECA 310 19 inches equipment rack. Each panel shall provide 12 multimode or single-mode adapters as duplex LC in accordance with TIA/EIA-604-10 with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves, alignment sleeves. Provide dust cover for unused adapters. The rear of each panel shall have a cable management tray a minimum of 8 inches deep with removable cover, incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each adapter factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates above each adapter.

2.4.6 Optical Fiber Patch Cords - Multimode

A. Shall be available in standard lengths of 3.6, 10, and 16.4 feet (1, 3,



and 5 meters), custom lengths shall also be available, and shall meet or exceed standards as defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 and ISO/IEC 11801.

B. Utilize duplex optical fiber cable that is 62.5/125 or 50/125 micron multimode, OFNR riser grade, and meets the requirements of UL 1666.

C. Utilize optical fiber cable where the attenuation shall not exceed 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm wavelength or 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm.

D. Cable Jacket Color:

1. 62.5/125: Orange.2. 50/125: Aqua.

E. Have terminated connectors exhibit maximum insertion loss of 0.25 dB with average of 0.20 dB or better when tested at either 850 nm or 1300 nm wavelengths for 62/125 um.

F. Have terminated connectors exhibit maximum insertion loss of 0.25 dB with average of 0.20 dB or better when tested at either 850 nm or 1300 nm wavelengths for 50/125 um.

G. Have average return loss of 2.5 dB with minimum return loss of 2.0 dB at both 850 nm and 1300 nm.

H. Be made by ISO 9001 certified manufacturer.

I. Be UL 1666 approved.

J. Shall be duplex fiber cable meeting or exceeding transmission characteristics of optical fiber horizontal cable.

2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES

2.5.1 Outlet/Connector Copper

Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68, TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2. UTP outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed, 8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 requirements. Outlet/connectors provided for UTP cabling shall meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors shall be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each outlet/connector shall be wired T568A. UTP outlet/connectors shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 for 200 mating cycles.For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. Flush mount jacks, poisitioning the cord at a 90-degree angle.

2.5.2 Jack Body Color Coding

Voice Jacks - BlueNIPRnet (Data) Jacks - OrangeSIPRnet Jacks - Shielded SilverULLS-A (V-SAT) Jacks - Green



2.5.3 Optical Fiber Adapters(Couplers)

Provide optical fiber adapters suitable for duplex LC in accordance with TIA/EIA-604-10 with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves, . Provide dust cover for adapters. Optical fiber adapters shall comply with TIA-455-21 for 500 mating cycles.

2.5.4 Optical Fiber Connectors

Provide in accordance with TIA-455-21. Optical fiber connectors shall be duplex LC in accordance with TIA/EIA-604-10 with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves compatible with 8/125 single-mode fiber. The connectors shall provide a maximum attenuation of 0.3 dB at 1310 nm with less than a 0.2 dB change after 500 mating cycles.

2.5.5 Cover Plates

Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, and TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3; flush design constructed of high impact thermoplastic material to match color of receptacle/switch cover plates specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide labeling in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

Cover plate labeling shall be either machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tap label or snap-in, clear label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

wall phones shall have stainless steel metal faceplates.

2.5.6 Weatherproof Industrial Telephone Enclosure

Where indicated on the plans, telephone outlets shall be installed in weatherproof industrial telephone enclosures. See 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM for more information.

2.6 MULTI-USER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA)

Provide MUTOA(s) in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.

2.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS Provide in accordance with UL 467, TIA-607, and NFPA 70. Components shall be identified as required by TIA-606. Provide ground rods, bonding conductors, and grounding busbars as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.8 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL

Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.






ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inches thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inches high normal block style.

2.11 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS

2.11.1 Factory Reel Tests

Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-526-7 for single mode optical fiber , and TIA-526-14 for multimode optical fiber cables.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the horizontal and backbone cable, pathway systems, telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with NECA/BICSI 568, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-569, NFPA 70, and UL standards as applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network. Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Install telecommunications cabling with copper media in accordance with the following criteria to avoid potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications equipment. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling. Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

Termination of all 4-pairs from wall-mount 110-type blocks to Telecom racks mount patch panel to permit straight through connection to voice outlet. Wall mounts 100-pair 110-type blocks connection to Telecom racks mount patch panel shall have C4 for first 5 slot and C5 at end of each 25 pair. Wall mounts 100-pair 110-type blocks connection between TRs shall have C5 connector.

3.1.1 Cabling

Install UTP, STP, and Optical fiber telecommunications cabling system as detailed in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, and TIA-568-C.3. Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically indicated on plans. Use an approved insulation displacement connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not exceed manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables. Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension for four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. For UTP cable, bend radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter. Cables shall be terminated; no cable



shall contain unterminated elements. Cables shall not be spliced. Label cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in this section.

Bundle and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use distribution spools.

Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

Install support bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI TDMM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter.

Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

In the telecommunications rooms, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on each end of cable.

Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

3.1.1.1 Separation from EMI Sources

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).



4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm).c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

3.1.1.2 Open Cable

Use only where specifically indicated on plans for use in cable trays, or below raised floors. Install in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and TIA-568-C.3. Do not exceed cable pull tensions recommended by the manufacturer. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Placement of cable parallel to power conductors shall be avoided, if possible; a minimum separation of 12 inches shall be maintained when such placement cannot be avoided.

Plenum cable shall be used where open cables are routed through plenum areas. Cable routed exposed under raised floors shall be plenum rated. Plenum cables shall comply with flammability plenum requirements of NFPA 70.

3.1.1.3 Backbone Cable

a. Copper Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone copper cable, in indicated pathways, between the campus distributor, located in the telecommunications entrance facility or room, the building distributors and the floor distributors located in telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms as indicated on drawings.

b. Optical fiber Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone optical fiber in indicated pathways. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended bending radii and pull tension. Prepare cable for pulling by cutting outer jacket 10 inches leaving strength members exposed for approximately 10 inches. Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye. Vertical cable support intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.1.4 Horizontal Cabling

Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings Do not untwist Category 6 UTP cables more than one half inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide slack cable in the form of a figure eight (not a service loop) on each end of the cable, 10 feet in the telecommunications room, and 12 inches in the work area outlet..



3.1.2 Pathway Installations

Provide in accordance with TIA-569 and NFPA 70. Provide building pathway as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.1.2.1 Pathway Installation in Telecommunications Rooms

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.2. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.3. Extend conduits 4 inches (100 mm) above finished floor.4. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

3.1.3 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground

Provide service entrance underground as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.1.4 Cable Tray Installation

Install cable tray as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Only CMP type cable shall be installed in a plenum.

3.1.5 Work Area Outlets

3.1.5.1 Terminations

Terminate UTP cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and wiring configuration per Fort Carson Network Enterpirse Center (NEC) instructions. Coordinate through COE Contracting Officer. Terminate fiber optic cables in accordance with TIA-568-C.3

3.1.5.2 Cover Plates

As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function and a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

3.1.5.3 Cables

Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not be exceeded.

3.1.5.4 Pull Cords

Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets that do not have cable installed.

3.1.5.5 Multi-User Telecommunications Outlet Assembly (MUTOA)

Run horizontal cable in the ceiling or underneath the floor and terminate each cable on a MUTOA in each individual zone. MUTOAs shall not be located in ceiling spaces, or any obstructed area. MUTOAs shall not be installed



in furniture unless that unit of furniture is permanently secured to the building structure. MUTOAs shall be located in an open work area so that each furniture cluster is served by at least one MUTOA. The MUTOA shall be limited to serving a maximum of twelve work areas. Maximum work area cable length requirements shall also be taken into account. MUTOAs must be labeled to include the maximum length of work area cables. MUTOA labeling is in addition to the labeling described in TIA-606, or other applicable cabling administration standards. Work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area device must also be uniquely identified and labeled.

3.1.6 Telecommunications Space Termination

Install termination hardware required for Category 6 and optical fiber system. An insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to insulation displacement connectors.

3.1.6.1 Connector Blocks

Connector blocks shall be rack or wall mounted in orderly rows and columns. Adequate vertical and horizontal wire routing areas shall be provided between groups of blocks. Install in accordance with industry standard wire routing guides in accordance with TIA-569.

3.1.6.2 Patch Panels

Patch panels shall be mounted in equipment racks with sufficient ports to accommodate the installed cable plant plus 25 percent spares.

a. Copper Patch Panel. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent movement of the cable.

b. Fiber Optic Patch Panel. Fiber optic cable loop shall be 3 feet in length. The outer jacket of each cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel to prevent movement of the fibers within the panel, using clamps or brackets specifically manufactured for that purpose.

3.1.6.3 Equipment Support Frames

Install in accordance with TIA-569:

a. Bracket, wall mounted. Mount bracket to plywood backboard in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Mount rack so height of highest panel does not exceed 78 inches above floor.

b. Racks, floor mounted modular type. Permanently anchor rack to the floor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

c. Cabinets, freestanding modular type. When cabinets are connected together, remove adjoining side panels for cable routing between cabinets.

3.1.7 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.




Provide in accordance with TIA-607, NFPA 70 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.2 LABELING

3.2.1 Labels

Provide labeling in accordance with TIA/EIA-606, UL 969, and the Ft. Carson ARMY I3A Supplement for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.. Handwritten (Permanent marker, ink pen, and/or pencil) labeling is unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be provided using laser printer. All labels shall be permanent; no hanging/paper tags.

3.2.2 Cable

Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in accordance with TIA-606.

3.2.3 Termination Hardware

Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA-606.

Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.

Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.

Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A.

3.2.4 Documentation

The contractor shall provide the Fort Carson NEC with both a printed and a software media copy of a Microsoft Excel, Corel, Quattro-Pro, or Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet which documents the installation of data cable labels. Contractor shall submit building floor plans labeling scheme to NEC for review at least 45 days before facility cabling installation. The spreadsheet shall contain, at a minimum, information on the labeling on each end of every data cable termination installed in every equipment closet. The format shall be such that each entry for a closet termination shall have in the adjacent column and on the same row, an entry for the work station end of the cable. Label documentation shall be formatted as follows:

a. For the closet end, the column entries shall contain the official



Fort Carson building number (B####) followed by a hyphen, followed by the Official closet room number - without any hyphens - followed by the Rack Number and a hyphen, the Patch Panel Row Number and a hyphen, and the Patch Panel Row Position Number.

b. The documentation for the work station end of that cable would be placed on the same row in the next column, and would be an exact copy of the label installed in the equipment room rack for that cable.



3.3.1 Painting Backboards

If backboards are required to be painted, then the manufactured fire retardant backboard must be painted with fire retardant paint, so as not to increase flame spread and smoke density and must be appropriately labeled. Label and fire rating stamp must be unpainted.



3.5 TESTING

3.5.1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing

Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3. Test equipment shall conform to TIA-1152. Perform optical fiber field inspection tests via attenuation measurements on factory reels and provide results along with manufacturer certification for factory reel tests. Remove failed cable reels from project site upon attenuation test failure.

3.5.1.1 Inspection

Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for T568A or T568B pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, . Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.

3.5.1.2 Verification Tests

UTP backbone copper cabling shall be tested for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors, and between conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but prior to being cross-connected.

UTP Horizontal Cable Performance Tests: For each outlet, perform the



following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:

1. Wire map. 2. Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3. Insertion loss. 4. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5. Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6. Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7. Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8. Return loss. 9. Propagation delay. 10. Delay skew.

For multimode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3 and TIA-526-14 using Method B, OTDR for multimode optical fiber. For single-mode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3 and TIA-526-7 using Method B, OTDR for single-mode optical fiber. Perform verification acceptance tests.

3.5.1.3 Performance Tests

Perform testing for each outlet and MUTOA as follows:

a. Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and delay skew.

. Optical fiber Links. Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3.

3.5.1.4 Final Verification Tests

Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

a. Voice Tests. These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and DSN telephone call.

b. Data Tests. These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and are available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.






SECTION 27 51 16

RADIO AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS

04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2.1.1 Single-Channel System 2.1.2 System Performance 2.1.3 Detail Drawings 2.2 STANDARD PRODUCTS 2.2.1 Identical Items 2.2.2 Nameplates 2.3 MIXER-PREAMPLIFIER 2.4 POWER AMPLIFIERS 2.5 MICROPHONE INPUT MODULES 2.6 MICROPHONES 2.6.1 Desk Microphone 2.6.2 Gooseneck Microphone 2.6.3 Microphone Jack 2.7 LOUDSPEAKERS 2.7.1 Cone Speaker 2.7.2 Horn Speaker 2.7.3 Dual Horn Speaker 2.7.4 High Output Speaker Enclosures 2.7.5 Ceiling Speaker Enclosures 2.8 PRIORITY RELAYS AND CONTROLS 2.9 EQUIPMENT RACKS 2.10 CABLES 2.10.1 Speaker Cable 2.10.2 Microphone Cable 2.10.3 Antenna Cable 2.11 TERMINALS 2.12 SURGE PROTECTION 2.12.1 Power Line Surge Protection 2.12.2 SIGNAL SURGE PROTECTION 2.13 TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Equipment Racks



3.2.2 Wiring 3.3 GROUNDING 3.4 TRAINING 3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTS




SECTION 27 51 16

RADIO AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ASSOCIATION (ECA)

ECA EIA/ECA 310 (2005) Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment







UL 1449 (2006; Reprint Sep 2013) Surge Protective Devices

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings; G, DO

SD-03 Product Data

Spare Parts

SD-06 Test Reports



Approved Test Procedures; G, POAcceptance Tests; G, PO

SD-07 Certificates

Components


Radio and Public Address System; G, PO


Equipment placed in storage until installation shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of the detail drawings and not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


The radio and public address system shall consist of an audio distribution network to include amplifiers, mixers, microphones, speakers, cabling, and ancillary components required to meet the required system configuration and operation. Submit Data Package 3 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

2.1.1 Single-Channel System

The system shall control and amplify an audio program for distribution within the areas indicated. Components of the system shall include a mixer-preamplifier, mike input expander, power amplifier, microphone, speaker system, cabling and other associated hardware.

2.1.2 System Performance

The system shall provide even sound distribution throughout the designated area, plus or minus 3 dB for the 1/1 octave band centered at 4000 Hz. The system shall provide uniform frequency response throughout the designated area, plus or minus 3 dB as measured with 1/3-octave bands of pink noise at locations across the designated area selected by the Contracting Officer. The system shall be capable of delivering 75 dB average program level with additional 10 dB peaking margin sound pressure level (SPL) in the area at an acoustic distortion level below 5 percent total harmonic distortion (THD). Unless otherwise specified the sound pressure reference level is 20 micro Pascal (0.00002 Newtons per square meter).

2.1.3 Detail Drawings

Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and



material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Note that the contract drawings show layouts based on typical speakers. Check the layout based on the actual speakers to be installed and make necessary revisions in the detail drawings. Detail drawings shall also contain complete point to point wiring, schematic diagrams and other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operation.

2.2 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, and that essentially duplicate material and equipment that have been in satisfactory use at least 2 years. All components used in the system shall be commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified. Submit copies of current approvals or listings issued by UL, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory for all components. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is within 100 miles of the site.

2.2.1 Identical Items

Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components.

2.2.2 Nameplates

Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model and catalog number, and serial number on a plate secured to the equipment.

2.3 MIXER-PREAMPLIFIER

Mixer-preamplifier shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Rated Output 18 dB

Frequency Response Plus or Minus 1 dB, 20 - 20,000 Hz

Distortion Less than 0.5 percent, 20 - 20,000 Hz

Signal to noise Microphone - 60 dB

Aux - 70 dB

Inputs 5 independent balanced low-impedance transformer-isolated

Input Sensitivity Microphone - 0.003 volts

Aux - 0.125 volts

Magnetic Cartridge - 0.0005 volts



Input Channel Isolation 80 dB minimum

Tone Controls Plus or Minus 10 dB range at 50 and 15,000 Hz

Power Requirement 110-125 Vac 60 Hz

2.4 POWER AMPLIFIERS

Power amplifiers as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Rated power output 125 watts RMS

Frequency Response Plus or Minus 3 dB, 20-20,000 Hz

Distortion Less than 2 percent at RPO, 600-13,000 Hz

Input Impedance 50 k ohm unbalanced

Output Impedance Balanced 4 and 8 ohms

Output voltage 25 and 70.7 volts

Power Requirement 110-125 Vac 60 Hz

2.5 MICROPHONE INPUT MODULES

Microphone input modules shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Rated Outputs 0.25 volts into 10,000 ohms

1.0 volts into 10,000 ohms

Frequency Response Plus or Minus 2 dB, 20 - 20,000 Hz

Distortion Less than 0.5 percent 20 - 20,000 Hz

Inputs 4 transformer - coupled balanced 150 ohm

Input Sensitivity 0.003 volts

Input Channel Isolation 70 dB minimum

2.6 MICROPHONES

2.6.1 Desk Microphone

Microphones shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Element Dynamic



Pattern Cardioid

Frequency Response 50 - 12,000 Hz

Impedance Low impedance mic (150-400 ohms)

Front-to-back Ratio 20 dB

Selector switches Selector switches for zone shall be be integral microphone

2.6.2 Gooseneck Microphone

Gooseneck microphone shall meet the minimum requirements of the desk microphone. Microphone shall have push to talk button. Gooseneck tube length shall be 12 inch.

2.6.3 Microphone Jack

Each outlet for microphones shall consist of a standard outlet box, flush-mounted, and fitted with a three-pole, polarized, locking-type, female microphone jack and a corrosion resistant-steel device plate.

2.7 LOUDSPEAKERS

2.7.1 Cone Speaker

The cone speaker shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Application Ceiling

Frequency range 60 to 12,000 Hz

Power Rating Normal - 7 watts

Peak - 10 watts

Voice Coil Impedance 8 ohms

Line Matching Transformer Type 25/ 70.7 volt line

Capacity 4 watts

Magnet 10 ounces or greater

Primary Taps 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 watts

Primary Impedance 25 volts - 1250, 625, and 312 ohms

70.7 volts - 10k, 5k, and 2.5k ohms




Insertion Loss Less than 1 dB

2.7.2 Horn Speaker

The horn speaker shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Application Outdoor


Power Taps 70 volt line - .9, 1.8, 3.8, 7.5, and 15 watts

Impedance 5000, 2500, 1300, 670, 330, 90, and 45 ohms

Normal - 7 watts

Peak - 15 watts

Dispersion 110 degrees

2.7.3 Dual Horn Speaker

The dual horn speaker shall meet the minimum requirements of horn speaker except the dispersion shall be 100 degrees.

2.7.4 High Output Speaker Enclosures

High Output speaker enclosures shall be of the tuned-port design for precise balancing and tuning of the speaker. The enclosures shall be constructed throughout of 3/4 inch high density board, with screwed and glued joints, durably braced, and padded with fiberglass where acoustically required. Speaker enclosures shall have a 25 degree vertical dispersion and 120 degrees horizontal dispersion. The effective length of throw shall be a minimum of 50 feet.

2.7.5 Ceiling Speaker Enclosures

Ceiling speaker enclosure shall be constructed of heavy gauge cold steel with interior undercoating and 1-1/2 inch thick high density fiberglass 1-1/2 lbs/cu. ft. The unit shall be round and designed for surface installations which will be accomplished via standard screw mounting. Recessed models shall have a rust-preventive, textured black coating and the surface mount unit finished in textured white. Enclosure shall include four triple compound conduit knockouts.

2.8 PRIORITY RELAYS AND CONTROLS

Provide priority relays and controls required to accomplish operations specified. Relays shall be completely enclosed with a plastic dust cover for maximum protection against foreign matter, and shall be plug-in type. Relays shall be provided with a diode wired across the relay coil for transient suppression and shall be installed utilizing factory-prewired, rack-mounted receptacle strips. Coil shall be maximum 24 volts dc.



2.9 EQUIPMENT RACKS

Equipment shall be mounted on 19 inch racks in accordance with ECA EIA/ECA 310 and located as shown on drawings. Ventilated rear panels, solid side panels, and solid top panels shall be provided. Equipment racks shall be provided with lockable front panels that limit access to equipment. The lockable front shall not cover items that require operator access such as am/fm tuner, CD player, or tape player. Rack cooling shall be through top rack mounted fan. The racks and panels shall be factory finished with a uniform baked enamel over rust inhibiting primer.

2.10 CABLES

2.10.1 Speaker Cable

Cables shall be of the gauge required depending upon the cable run length. In no case shall cable be used which is smaller than 18 AWG. Insulation on the conductors shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or an equivalent synthetic thermoplastic not less than 0.009 inch. Cables shall be jacketed with a PVC compound. The jacket thickness shall be 0.02 inch minimum.

2.10.2 Microphone Cable

Cable conductor shall be stranded copper 20 AWG. Insulation on the conductors shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or an equivalent synthetic thermoplastic not less than 0.009 inch. Cable shall be shielded 100 percent of aluminum polyester foil with a bare 22 gauge stranded soft copper drain conductor. Cables shall be jacketed with a PVC compound. The jacket thickness shall be 0.02 inch minimum.

2.10.3 Antenna Cable

Antenna coaxial cable shall have 75 ohm plus or minus 2 ohm. Attenuation of the coaxial cable span between the antenna and amplifier shall not exceed 2.5 dB at 108 MHz.

2.11 TERMINALS

Terminals shall be solderless, tool-crimped pressure type.

2.12 SURGE PROTECTION

2.12.1 Power Line Surge Protection

Major components of the system such as power amplifiers, mixer-preamplifiers, and tuners, shall have a device, whether internal or external, which provides protection against voltage spikes and current surges originating from commercial power sources in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1/IEEE C62.41.2 B3 combination waveform and NFPA 70. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The surge protector shall be rated for a maximum let thru voltage of 350 Volts ac (line-to-neutral) and 350 Volt ac (neutral-to-ground). Surge protection device shall be UL listed and labeled as having been tested in accordance with UL 1449.

2.12.2 SIGNAL SURGE PROTECTION

Major components of the system shall have internal protection circuits which protects the component from mismatched loads, direct current, and shorted output lines. Communication cables/conductors shall have surge



protection installed at each point where it exits or enters a building.

2.13 TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE

Telephone Interface module shall provide one way all call paging access from telephone to PA system. Paging shall be accomplished by the building telephone system instruments interconnected to the PA system via an interface module to allow telephone dial up access to the paging amplifier. Interface module shall produce an alert tone in the associated speakers on activation. Telephone interface module shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Impedance 600 ohms

Frequency response 100Hz to 10Khz

70V Input Impedance 200K ohms

Output level 400mV rms

Input Power Requirement 12-24Vdc (from power supply)

Access requirement Electronic (analog) or IA2 line key (line card required) PABX loop or ground-start trunk port, or dedicated single-line phone

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with the details of the work and working conditions, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancies before performing the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Install equipment as indicated and specified, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations except where otherwise indicated. Equipment mounted out-of-doors or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproofed. The antenna shall be supported at least 60 inch clear above the roof by means of self-supported or guyed mast.

3.2.1 Equipment Racks

Racks shall be mounted side-by-side and bolted together. Items of the same function shall be grouped together, either vertically or side-by-side. Controls shall be symmetrically arranged at a height as shown. Audio input and interconnections shall be made with approved shielded cable and plug connectors; output connections may be screw terminal type. All connections to power supplies shall utilize standard male plug and female receptacle connectors with the female receptacle being the source side of the connection. Inputs, outputs, interconnections, test points, and relays shall be accessible at the rear of the equipment rack for maintenance and testing. Each item shall be removable from the rack without disturbing other items or connections. Empty space in equipment racks shall be covered by blank panels so that the entire front of the rack is occupied by



panels.

3.2.2 Wiring

Install wiring in rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, cable trays, or electric metallic tubing as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Wiring for microphone, grounding, line level, speaker and power cables shall be isolated from each other by physical isolation and metallic shielding. Shielding shall be terminated at only one end.

3.3 GROUNDING

All grounding practices shall comply with NFPA 70. The antenna mast shall be separately grounded. Equipment shall be grounded to the serving panelboard ground bus through a green grounding conductor. Metallic conduits serving the equipment shall be isolated on the equipment end with an insulating bushing to prevent noise from being transferred to the circuit. Equipment racks shall be grounded to the panelboard ground bus utilizing a #8 conductor. Grounding conductor shall be terminated to the rack using connector suitable for that purpose.

3.4 TRAINING

Conduct a training course for 3 members of the operating and maintenance staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training course will be given at the installation during normal working hours for a total of 4 hours and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operating and maintenance manuals, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the start of the training course.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

Submit test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. The reports shall include the manufacturer, model number, and serial number of test equipment used in each test. Each report shall indicate the final position of controls and operating mode of the system. After installation has been completed, conduct acceptance tests, utilizing the approved test procedures, to demonstrate that equipment operates in accordance with specification requirements. Submit test plan and test procedures for the acceptance tests. The test plan and test procedures shall explain in detail, step-by-step actions and expected results to demonstrate compliance with the requirements specified. The procedure shall also explain methods for simulating the necessary conditions of operation to demonstrate system performance. Notify the Contracting Officer 14 days prior to the performance of tests. In no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor has received written Contracting Officer approval of the test plans as specified. The acceptance tests shall include originating and receiving messages at specified stations, at proper volume levels, without cross talk or noise from other links or nondesignated units.





DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 31 49

CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS

04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES 1.2 SUBMITTALS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR 2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES, AND FITTINGS 2.3 WIRES AND CABLES

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Electrical work 3.1.2 Carbon Monoxide Detector 3.1.3 Grounding and Bonding 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.2.1 Carbon Monoxide Detector Test




SECTION 28 31 49

CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





UL 2034 (2008; Reprint Feb 2009) Single and Multiple Station Carbon Monoxide Alarms

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Carbon monoxide detector; G, DO

SD-06 Test Reports

Carbon monoxide detector test; G, PO


Carbon monoxide detector; Data Package 1

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR

UL 2034, Single station detector surface mounted. Operational requirements shall be as follows:

a. Electrical: 120 Volt AC with 9 volt battery backup volt DC

b. Environmental: 32 degrees to 120 degrees F.



c. Alarm and Indicator: Red LED for visual and 85 db at 10 ft for audible

alarm. Malfunction indicator light shall be yellow or amber LED. Power on indicator light shall be white or green for 120 Volt AC powered units, while operating on AC power.

d. Alarm reset/silence button: Provide a manually operated alarm reset and silence button. Pressing the button shall silence the alarm, and reset the detector. Alarm shall resound within 6 minutes if CO level remains at or above 70 ppm.

e. Battery removal flag: Provide a warning flag that will be exposed while the battery is removed, and hidden while the battery is installed.

2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES, AND FITTINGS

Specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.


Specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Electrical work

Electrical installation shall conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and NFPA 70.

3.1.2 Carbon Monoxide Detector

Install detectors in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide detector in hallway outside bedrooms, , and in locations as indicated.


Equipment grounding and bonding shall be in accordance with UL 2034 and NFPA 70.


Provide test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of the test results. Notify Contracting Officer 15 working days prior to the test.

3.2.1 Carbon Monoxide Detector Test

Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the detectors are in good condition and properly performing the intended function. Test shall be in accordance with UL 2034 requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Normal Operation Test" and the manufacturer's test procedure.





DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 31 76

INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS 1.2 SUMMARY 1.2.1 Scope 1.3 REFERENCES 1.4 DEFINITIONS 1.4.1 Interface Device 1.4.2 Remote Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit 1.4.3 Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Autonomous

Control Unit (FMCP) 1.4.4 Local Operating Console (LOC) 1.4.5 Terminal Cabinet 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.6 TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.7.1 Qualifications 1.7.1.1 Design Services 1.7.1.2 Supervisor 1.7.1.3 Technician 1.7.1.4 Installer 1.7.1.5 Test Personnel 1.7.1.6 Manufacturer's Representative 1.7.1.7 Manufacturer 1.7.2 Regulatory Requirements 1.7.2.1 Requirements for Fire Protection Service 1.7.2.2 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System 1.7.2.3 Fire alarm Testing Services or Laboratories 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.1.1 Standard Products 2.1.2 Nameplates 2.1.3 Keys 2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT 2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION 2.3.1 Alarm Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances (Visual,

Voice, Textural) 2.3.2 Functions and Operating Features 2.4 SYSTEM MONITORING 2.4.1 Valves 2.4.2 Independent Fire Detection System 2.5 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS 2.5.1 Notification Appliance Network



2.5.2 Strobes 2.5.3 Text Displays 2.5.4 Wide Area MNS 2.5.5 Voice Notification 2.5.6 Installation-Wide Control 2.6 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION 2.6.1 Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection 2.6.2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection 2.7 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES 2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE 2.9 ISOLATION MODULES 2.10 SMOKE SENSORS 2.10.1 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors 2.10.2 Ionization Type Smoke Sensors 2.10.3 Duct Smoke Sensors 2.10.4 Smoke Sensor Testing 2.11 HEAT DETECTORS 2.11.1 Heat Detectors 2.11.1.1 Combination Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Detectors 2.11.1.2 Rate Compensating Detectors 2.11.1.3 Fixed Temperature Detectors 2.11.2 Self-Test Routines 2.11.3 Operator Access 2.11.4 Operator Control 2.12 ELECTRIC POWER 2.12.1 Primary Power 2.13 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY 2.13.1 Batteries 2.13.1.1 Capacity 2.13.1.2 Battery Power Calculations 2.13.2 Battery Chargers 2.14 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNIT (FMCP) 2.14.1 Cabinet 2.14.2 Control Modules 2.14.3 Silencing Switches 2.14.3.1 Alarm Silencing Switch 2.14.3.2 Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch 2.14.4 Non-Interfering 2.14.5 Audible Notification System 2.14.5.1 Outputs and Operational Modules 2.14.5.2 Mass Notification 2.14.6 Memory 2.14.7 Field Programmability 2.14.8 Input/Output Modifications 2.14.9 Resetting 2.14.10 Instructions 2.14.11 Walk Test 2.14.12 History Logging 2.14.13 Remote LCD Text Display 2.15 REMOTE FIRE ALARM/MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNITS 2.15.1 Cabinet 2.15.2 Control Modules 2.15.3 Silencing Switches 2.15.4 Non-Interfering 2.15.5 Memory 2.15.6 Field Programmability 2.15.7 Input/Output Modifications 2.15.8 Resetting 2.15.9 Instructions



2.15.10 Walk Test 2.15.11 History Logging 2.16 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS 2.16.1 Operation 2.16.2 Construction 2.16.3 Inputs 2.16.4 Tone Generator 2.16.5 Protection Circuits 2.17 LCD, LED DISPLAY UNIT (VDU) 2.18 ANNUNCIATOR 2.18.1 Annunciator Panel 2.18.2 Programming 2.19 MANUAL STATIONS 2.20 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES 2.20.1 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers 2.20.2 Visual Notification Appliances 2.20.3 Foam Discharge Visual Notification Appliances 2.21 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS 2.22 INTERFACE TO THE BASE WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK 2.22.1 Radio 2.22.1.1 Radio Frequency Communications 2.22.1.2 Licensed Radio Frequency Systems 2.23 AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS 2.23.1 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels 2.23.1.1 Operation 2.23.1.2 Battery Power 2.23.1.3 Transmitter Housing 2.23.1.4 Antenna 2.23.2 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) 2.23.3 Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station 2.24 WIRING 2.24.1 Alarm Wiring

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES AND NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

3.1.1 FMCP 3.1.2 Manual Stations: 3.1.3 Notification Appliance Devices 3.1.4 Smoke and Heat Sensors 3.1.5 Annunciator 3.1.6 Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches 3.1.7 Firefighter Telephones 3.1.8 Local Operating Console (LOC) 3.2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING 3.2.1 Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes 3.2.2 Terminal Cabinets 3.2.3 Alarm Wiring 3.2.4 Conductor Terminations 3.3 DISCONNECTION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING SYSTEM 3.4 CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM 3.5 FIRESTOPPING 3.6 PAINTING 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.7.1 Testing Procedures 3.7.2 Tests Stages 3.7.2.1 Preliminary Testing 3.7.2.2 Request for Formal Inspection and Tests



3.7.2.3 Final Testing 3.7.2.4 System Acceptance 3.7.3 Minimum System Tests 3.7.3.1 Intelligibility Tests 3.8 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES 3.8.1 Instructor 3.8.2 Required Instruction Time 3.8.2.1 Technical Training 3.9 Technical Data and Computer Software 3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS 3.11 EXTRA MATERIALS 3.11.1 Repair Service/Replacement Parts 3.11.2 Interchangeable Parts 3.11.3 Spare Parts 3.11.4 Special Tools




SECTION 28 31 76

INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein. In addition, refer to the following sections for related work and coordination:

Section 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTIONSection 21 13 17.00 10 DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTIONSectino 21 13 25.00 HIGH EXPANSION FOAM (HI-EX) FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

Section14 24 00 HOLELESS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS for additional work related to elevators.Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING for additional work related to firestopping.

1.2 SUMMARY

1.2.1 Scope

a. This work includes completion of design and providing a new, complete, fire alarm and mass notification system as described herein and on the contract drawings for the UAS Hangar. Include in the system wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, supervising station fire alarm system transmitter, and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. Provide system complete and ready for operation.

b. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as modified herein. The system layout on the drawings show the intent of coverage and are shown in suggested locations. Submit plan view drawing showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes, other related equipment, conduit routing, wire counts, circuit identification in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors. Drawings shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 170. Final quantity, system



layout, and coordination are the responsibility of the Contractor.

c. Where remote fire alarm control units are needed, they shall be provided at a terminal cabinet location. Each remote fire alarm control unit shall be powered from a wiring riser specifically for that use or from a local emergency power panel located on the same floor as the remote fire alarm control unit. Where remote fire control units are provided, equipment for notification appliances may be located in the remote fire alarm control units.

1.3 REFERENCES


ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)

ASA S3.2 (2009) Method for Measuring the Intelligibility of Speech Over Communication Systems (ASA 85)

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME A17.1/CSA B44 (2013) Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

FM GLOBAL (FM)





INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

IEC 60268-16 (2003; ED 4.0) Sound System Equipment - Part 16: Objective Rating Of Speech Intelligibility By Speech Transmission Index

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

ISO 7240-16 (2007) Fire Detection And Alarm Systems — Part 16: Sound System Control And Indicating Equipment

ISO 7240-19 (2007) Fire Detection and Alarm Systems — Part 19: Design, Installation, Commissioning and Service of Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes




NFPA 170 (2012) Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols


NFPA 72 (2013) National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems


UFC 3-601-02 (2010) Operations and Maintenance: Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Protection Systems

UFC 4-021-01 (2008; Change 1 2010) Design and O&M: Mass Notification Systems



47 CFR 90 Private Land Mobile Radio Services


UL 1480 (2003; Reprint Oct 2012) Standard for Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional Use

UL 1638 (2001; Reprint Oct 2013) Visual Signaling Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and General Utility Signaling

UL 1971 (2002; Reprint Oct 2008) Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired

UL 2017 (2008; Reprint May 2011) General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems

UL 268 (2009) Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems

UL 464 (2009; Reprint Apr 2012) Standard for Audible Signal Appliances

UL 521 (1999; Reprint May 2010) Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL 864 (2003; Reprint Aug 2012) Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems




UL Fire Prot Dir (2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment, devices, and functions shall be defined as follows:

1.4.1 Interface Device

An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog/addressable system.

1.4.2 Remote Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit

A control panel, electronically remote from the fire alarm and mass notification control panel, that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices; may supply power to detection devices and interface devices; may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances; may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the control unit; and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm control panel.

1.4.3 Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Autonomous Control Unit (FMCP)

A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and mass notification control unit and fire alarm and mass notification control units are interconnected. The panel has central processing, memory, input and output terminals, and LCD, LED Display units.

1.4.4 Local Operating Console (LOC)

A unit designed to allow emergency responders and/or building occupants to operate the MNS including delivery or recorded and/or live messages, initiate strobe and textural visible appliance operation and other relayed functions.

1.4.5 Terminal Cabinet

A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door that terminal strips are securely mounted.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Nameplates; G, DOInstructions; G, DOWiring Diagrams; G, DOSystem Layout; G, DO



System Operation; G, DONotification Appliances; G, DOAmplifiers; G, DO

SD-03 Product Data

Technical Data And Computer Software; G, DOFire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Control Unit (FMCP); G DOLCD, LED Display Unit (VDU); G, DOTerminal cabinets; G, DOManual stations; G, DOTransmitters (including housing); G, DOBatteries; G, DOBattery chargers; G, DOSmoke sensors; G, DOHeat detectors; G, DONotification appliances; G, DOAddressable interface devices; G, DOAmplifiers; G, DOTone generators; G, DODigitalized voice generators; G, DORemote Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Control Units; G, DORadio transmitter and interface panels; G, DODigital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT); G, DOLocal Operating Console (LOC); G, DO

SD-05 Design Data

Battery power; G, DOBattery chargers; G, DO

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality Control; G, POTesting Procedures; G, POSmoke sensor testing procedures; G, PO

SD-07 Certificates

Installer; G, POFormal Inspection and Tests; G, POFinal Testing; G, PO


System Operation; G, POFire Alarm/Mass Notification System; G, PO


Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G, POInstruction of Government Employees; G, PO


As-Built Drawings



1.6 TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE

Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data that relates to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project, and may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be delivered, strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Identify data delivered by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system, equipment, and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract. The data package shall also include the following:

a. Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and capabilities.

b. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements.

c. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable portions of the fire alarm and detection system.

d. Description of Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel equipment operation.

e. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations.

f. Library of application software.

g. Operation and maintenance manuals.


Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing station fire alarm system and shall not impair reliability or operational functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system. The proprietary type Supervising Station (PSS) is located at the Fort Carson Fire Department.

a. In NFPA publications referred to herein, consider advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; interpret reference to "authority having jurisdiction" to mean the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR).

b. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or documentation shall be considered as mandatory requirements.

c. Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM APP GUIDE.


1.7.1.1 Design Services

Installations requiring completion of installation drawings and specification or modifications of fire detection, fire alarm, mass notification system, fire suppression systems or mass notification systems shall require the services and review of a qualified engineer. For the purposes of meeting this requirement, a qualified engineer is defined as an



individual meeting one of the following conditions:

a. A registered professional engineer having a Bachelor of Science or Masters of Science Degree in Fire Protection Engineering from an accredited university engineering program, plus a minimum of four years work experience in fire protection engineering.

b. A registered professional engineer (P.E.) in fire protection engineering.

c. Registered Professional Engineer with verification of experience and at least five years of current experience in the design of the fire protection and detection systems.

1.7.1.2 Supervisor

NICET Fire Alarm Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technician shall supervise the installation of the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm technicians supervising the installation of equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.7.1.3 Technician

Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of four years of experience utilized to install and terminate fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.7.1.4 Installer

Fire Alarm installer with a minimum of two years of experience utilized to assist in the installation of fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels . An electrician shall be allowed to install wire, cable, conduit and backboxes for the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm installer shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.7.1.5 Test Personnel

Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience (NICET Level IV)utilized to test and certify the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.7.1.6 Manufacturer's Representative

The fire alarm and mass notification equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for the connection of wiring to the control panel. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be an employee of the manufacturer with necessary technical training (NICET Level IV)on the system being installed.



1.7.1.7 Manufacturer

Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein.


1.7.2.1 Requirements for Fire Protection Service

Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard.

1.7.2.2 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System

Furnish equipment that is compatible and is UL listed, FM approved, or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended use. All listings by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard. Submit a unique identifier for each device, including the control panel and initiating and indicating devices, with an indication of test results, and signature of the factory-trained technician of the control panel manufacturer and equipment installer. With reports on preliminary tests, include printer information. Include the NFPA 72 Record of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Form, with the appropriate test reports.

1.7.2.3 Fire alarm Testing Services or Laboratories

construct fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with UL Fire Prot Dir, UL Electrical Constructn, or FM APP GUIDE.


Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Submit annotated catalog data as required in the paragraph SUBMITTAL, in table format on the drawings, showing manufacturer's name, model, voltage, and catalog numbers for equipment and components. Submitted shop drawings shall not be smaller than ISO A1. Also provide UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided.


Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or FM Approvals, LLC (FM), and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular



classification of materials. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least two years prior to bid opening.

2.1.2 Nameplates

Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. FMCPs

b. Automatic transmitter/transceiver

c. Terminal Cabinet

Furnish nameplate illustrations and data to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer before installation. Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer for installation locations. Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to panels or adjacent walls.

2.1.3 Keys

Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required. Master all keys and locks to a single key as required by the local AHJ.

LOC is not permitted to be locked or lockable.

2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT

All fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be listed for use under the applicable reference standards. Interfacing of Listed UL 864 or similar approved industry listing with Mass Notification Panels listed to UL 2017 shall be done in a laboratory listed configuration, if the software programming features cannot provide a listed interface control. If a field modification is needed, such as adding equipment like relays, the manufacturer of the panels being same or different brand from manufacturer shall provide the installing contractor for review and confirmation by the installing contractor. As part of the submittal documents, provide this information.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

The Addressable Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System shall be a complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass notification system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864 , and UL 2017. The system shall be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is reset and the control panel is reset and restored to normal. The system may be placed in the alarm mode by local microphones, LOC, or remotely from authorized locations/users.

Submit data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for notification appliances, 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.



Submit a complete description of the system operation in matrix format on the drawings. Submit a complete list of device addresses and corresponding messages.

2.3.1 Alarm Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances (Visual, Voice, Textural)

a. Connect alarm initiating devices Class "B" and installed in accordance with NFPA 72.

b. Connect alarm notification appliances and speakers to notification appliance circuits (NAC) Class "B".

c. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device or a mass notification signal. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until initiating device(s) or mass notification signal is/are reset and the control panel is manually reset and restored to normal. Audible, and visual appliances and systems shall comply with NFPA 72 and as specified herein. Fire alarm system/mass notification system components requiring power, except for the control panel power supply, shall operate on 24 Volts dc.

2.3.2 Functions and Operating Features

The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:

a. The FMCP shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control for the system. Addressable systems shall be microcomputer (microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified.

b. For Class "A" or "X" circuits with conductor lengths of 3m (10 feet) or less, the conductors shall be permitted to be installed in the same raceway in accordance with NFPA 72.

c. Provide signaling line circuits for each floor.

d. Provide signaling line circuits for the network.

e. Provide notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized as required by NFPA 72.

f. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel.

g. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition, or ground fault (or short circuit for Class "X"). The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature that shall silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.

h. Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP



to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, fire reporting systemair handler shutdownelevator recalldoor unlocking features. Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output.

i. Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to the fire department..

j. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions.

k. The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panels keyboard. Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile memory.

l. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring both addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory devices.

m. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable devices, that may be in alarm simultaneously.

n. Where the fire alarm/mass notification system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency control device or system, such as an HVAC systeman elevator system , the addressable fire alarm relay shall be in the vicinity of the emergency control device.

o. An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Transmission of an alarm signal to the fire department.

(2) Visual indication of the device operated on the control panel (FACP/MNCP), LCD, LED Display unit (VDU), and on the graphic annunciator. Indication on the graphic annunciator shall be by floor, zone or circuit, and type of device.

(3) Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances.

(4) Recording of the event via electronically in the history log of the fire control system unit.

(5) Release of doors held open by electromagnetic devices.

(6) Release of power to electric locks (delayed egress locks) on doors that are part of the means of egress.

(7) Operation of a smoke sensor in an elevator lobby or other location associated with the automatic recall of elevators, shall recall the elevators in addition to other requirements of this paragraph.

(8) Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph and as allowed by NFPA 72.

(9) Operation of a sprinkler waterflow switch serving an elevator machinery room or elevator shaft shall operate shunt trip circuit breaker(s) to shut down power to the elevators in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.



(10) Operation of an interface, that operates vibrating pagers worn by hearing-impaired occupants.

p. A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP, VDU, and on the graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.

(2) Transmission of a supervisory signal to the fire department.

(3) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the control unit.

q. A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP, VDU, and on the graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.

(2) Transmission of a trouble signal to the fire department.

(3) Recording of the event in the history log of the control unit.

r. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP is 10 seconds.

s. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP is 200 seconds.

t. Activation of a LOC pushbutton shall activate the audible and visual alarms in the facility. The audible message shall be the one associated with the pushbutton activated.

2.4 SYSTEM MONITORING

2.4.1 Valves

Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system, including automatic sprinkler control valves, standpipe control valves, sprinkler service entrance valve, valves at fire pumps, isolating valves for pressure type waterflow or supervision switches, and valves at backflow preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing, shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Provide each tamper switch with a separate address.

2.4.2 Independent Fire Detection System

Each existing independent smoke detection subsystem, kitchen fire extinguishing system, and releasing system (e.g. AFFF) shall be monitored both for the presence of an alarm condition and for a trouble condition. Provide each monitored condition with a separate address.



2.5 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

2.5.1 Notification Appliance Network

The audible notification appliance network consists of speakers located to provide intelligible instructions at all locations in the building. The Mass Notification System announcements shall take priority over all other audible announcements of the system including the output of the fire alarm system in a normal or alarm state. When a mass notification announcement is activated during a fire alarm, all fire alarm system functions shall continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the fire alarm audible and visual notification appliances.

2.5.2 Strobes

Provide strobes to alert hearing-impaired occupants.

2.5.3 Text Displays

LED text displays (textural visible appliances) for hearing impaired occupants. The textual displays shall be programmable and shall display the same content of the voice message being played. The signs shall be able to provide a minimum of100 mm 4 inch high letters and be located in high traffic areas easily seen by building occupants. The system shall interface with the Programmable sign controller to activate the proper message.

2.5.4 Wide Area MNS

The Wide Area MNS system (if available) in the area of the building shall not be activated by the in-building MNS.

2.5.5 Voice Notification

An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control the notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console, personnel in the building can initiate delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and instructions, and initiate visual strobe and optional textual message notification appliances. The autonomous voice notification control unit will temporarily override audible fire alarm notification while delivering Mass Notification messages to ensure they are intelligible.

2.5.6 Installation-Wide Control

If an installation-wide control system for mass notification exists on the base, the autonomous control unit shall communicate with the central control unit of the installation-wide system. The autonomous control unit shall receive commands/messages from the central control unit and provide status information.

2.6 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION

2.6.1 Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection

For systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links,



shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the following waveform(s):

a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Protection shall be provided at the equipment. Additional triple electrode gas surge protectors, rated for the application, shall be installed on each wireline circuit within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.6.2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection

Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and outputs shall be tested with the following waveforms:

a. A 10 by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.7 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES

The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Class "B" initiating device circuits. The system shall be capable of defining any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, fire pump monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, relays for output function actuation, etc. The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The monitor module shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Pull stations with a monitor module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE

The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems, and to control door holders or initiate elevator fire service. The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The indicating device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Class "B" notification appliance circuits. The system shall be capable of supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the control module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Control Modules shall be located in environmental areas that reflect the conditions to which they were listed.



2.9 ISOLATION MODULES

Provide isolation modules to subdivide each signaling line circuit into groups of not more than 20 addressable devices between adjacent isolation modules.

2.10 SMOKE SENSORS

2.10.1 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors

Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows:

a. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel.

b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal operation. Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors.

c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber.

d. Provide twist lock bases with sounder that produces a minimum of 90 dBA at 10 feet for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation.

e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.

f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device.

(1) Primary status

(2) Device type

(3) Present average value

(4) Present sensitivity selected

(5) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)

2.10.2 Ionization Type Smoke Sensors

Provide addressable ionization type smoke sensors as follows:

a. Provide analog smoke sensors that operate on the ionization principle and are actuated by the presence of visible or invisible products of



combustion. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel.

b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal operation. Sensors shall be UL or FM listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors.

c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber.

d. Provide twist lock bases for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation.

e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.

f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device.

(1) Primary status

(2) Device type

(3) Present average value

(4) Present sensitivity selected

(5) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)

(6) Sensitivity adjustments for smoke detectors.

2.10.3 Duct Smoke Sensors

Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed where indicated and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Units shall consist of a smoke detector as specified in paragraph Photoelectric Detectors, mounted in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes. Detector circuitry shall be mounted in a metallic enclosure exterior to the duct. (It is not permitted to cut the duct insulation to install the duct detector directly on the duct). Detectors shall have a manual reset. Detectors shall be rated for air velocities that include air flows between 500 and 4000 fpm. Detectors shall be powered from the fire alarm panel.

a. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 268A, and shall be UL listed for use in air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled from the fire alarm control panel.

b. Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition; and the test and



reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place. Remote indicators shall be provided where required by NFPA 72 and these shall be provided with test and reset switches.

c. Remote lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall be properly identified in etched plastic placards. Detectors shall provide for control of auxiliary contacts that provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions specified in Section 23 09 23 to LONWORKS DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEMS. Auxiliary contacts provide for this function shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or appliance. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm system manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility.

2.10.4 Smoke Sensor Testing

Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Submit smoke sensor testing procedures for approval. In addition to the NFPA 72 requirements, smoke detector sensitivity shall be tested during the preliminary tests.

2.11 HEAT DETECTORS

2.11.1 Heat Detectors

Heat detectors shall be designed for detection of fire by fixed temperature . The alarm condition shall be determined by comparing sensor valve with the stored values. Heat detector spacing shall be rated in accordance with UL 521. Detectors located in areas subject to moisture, exterior atmospheric conditions, or hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70, shall be types approved for such locations.

2.11.1.1 Combination Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Detectors

Detectors shall be designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiring connections. Contacts shall be self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise principle. Under fixed temperature actuation, the detector shall have a permanent external indication that is readily visible. Detector units located in boiler rooms, showers, or other areas subject to abnormal temperature changes shall operate on fixed temperature principle only. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature portion shall be 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test rating for the Rate-of-Rise detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet.

2.11.1.2 Rate Compensating Detectors

Detectors shall be surface mounted horizontal type, with outlet box supported independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be hermetically sealed and automatically resetting. Rate Compensated detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet.

2.11.1.3 Fixed Temperature Detectors

Detectors shall be designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be designed to detect high heat. The detectors shall have a specific temperature setting of 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet.



2.11.2 Self-Test Routines

Automatic self-test routines shall be performed on each sensor that will functionally check sensor sensitivity electronics and ensure the accuracy of the value being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel.

2.11.3 Operator Access

An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each heat sensor:

a. Primary status

b. Device type

c. Present average value

d. Sensor range

2.11.4 Operator Control

An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall have the capability to manually control the following information for each heat sensor:

a. Alarm detection sensitivity values

b. Enable or disable the point/device

c. Control sensors relay driver output

2.12 ELECTRIC POWER

2.12.1 Primary Power

Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FMCP from the AC service to the building in accordance with NFPA 72.

2.13 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY

Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure. Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm.

2.13.1 Batteries

Provide sealed, maintenance-free, sealed lead acid batteries as the source for emergency power to the FMCP. Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power.



2.13.1.1 Capacity

Battery size shall be the greater of the following two capacities.

a. Sufficient capacity to operate the fire alarm system under supervisory and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for 24 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 15 minutes.

b. Sufficient capacity to operate the mass notification for 60 minutes after loss of AC power.

2.13.1.2 Battery Power Calculations

a. Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements.

(1) Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Include ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each panel component, and compliance with UL 864.

(2) Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Submit ampere-hour requirements for each system component with the calculations.

(3) A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components, at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries.

b. For battery calculations use the following assumptions: Assume a starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm time. Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on batteries for the specified time period. Using this voltage perform a voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and/or appliances remote from the power sources.

2.13.2 Battery Chargers

Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 120 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged (20.4 Volts dc), the charger shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours after a single discharge cycle as described in paragraph CAPACITY above. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided.

2.14 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNIT (FMCP)

Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel cabinet as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel, the unit cabinets shall match exactly. If more than a single unit is required, and is located in the



lobby/entrance, notify the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR), prior to installing the equipment. The control panel shall be capable of communicating with the Foam System Control Panels (FSCP), described in 21 13 25.00 HIGH EXPANSION FOAM (HI-EX) FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM.

a. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.

b. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters. The mass notification control unit shall have the capability of temporarily deactivate the fire alarm audible notification appliances while delivering voice messages.

c. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages, strobes and displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least eight pre-recorded messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a secure microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible notification, and initiate/synchronize strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file.

2.14.1 Cabinet

Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say "Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be less than 1 inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.

2.14.2 Control Modules

Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and resistors, if any, on screw terminals in the FACP. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltage at the sensor or appliance connected. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage

2.14.3 Silencing Switches

2.14.3.1 Alarm Silencing Switch

Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FMCP that shall silence the audible and visual. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a



subsequent alarm.

2.14.3.2 Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch

Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm, supervision, or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated.

2.14.4 Non-Interfering

Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually reset by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.

2.14.5 Audible Notification System

The Audible Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as specified herein. The system shall be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system incorporating user selectability of a minimum eight distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Audible appliances shall produce a temporal code 3 tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers throughout the building/facility but not in stairs or elevator cabs. A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a microphone input at the control panel or the LOC.

a. When using the microphone, live messages shall be broadcast throughout a selected floor or floors or all call The system shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the code 3 temporal tone to take over all functions assigned to the failed unit in the event an alarm is activated.

b. The Mass Notification functions shall override the manual or automatic fire alarm notification or Public Address (PA) functions. Tthe override of the fire alarm system audible devices by the mass notification system shall not exceed 60 seconds. The reset back to fire alarm audible devices active shall be automatic. Other fire alarm functions including transmission of a signal(s) to the fire department shall remain operational. The system shall have the capability of utilizing LOC with redundant controls of the notification system control panel. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of the NAC Circuits shall follow the operation of the speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level. Amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS output. The strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be



provided and, upon activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or PA microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation.

2.14.5.1 Outputs and Operational Modules

All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Provide form "C" contacts for system alarm and trouble conditions. Provide circuits for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble alarms to be generated with the Fire Alarm system.

2.14.5.2 Mass Notification

a. Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other function performed by the Audible Notification System. Messages shall utilize a female voice and shall be similar to the following:

(1) Description: FIREFive (5) seconds of siren are played (1000 Hz tones as required in 18.4.2.1 of NFPA 72), followed by the message:"ATTENTION, ATTENTION. A FIRE EMERGENCY HAS BEEN REPORTED IN THE BUILDING. PLEASE LEAVE THE BUILDING USING THE NEAREST EXIT OR EXIT STAIRWAY. DO NOT USE THE ELEVATORS."Provide a 2-second pause.Repeat the message.

(2) Description: SEVERE THUNDERSTORMFive (5) seconds of 100-kHz steady tone are played, followed by the message:"SEVERE THUNDERSTORM WARNING. A SEVERE THUNDERSTORM WARNING HAS BEEN ISSUED."Provide a 2-second pause.Repeat the message.

(3) Description: NATIONAL SECURITYFive (5) seconds of fast whoop sound are played, followed by the message:"ATTENTION… A NATIONAL SECURITY WARNING HAS BEEN ISSUED. PLEASE GO INSIDE AND TUNE TO YOUR LOCAL TELEVISION OR RADIO STATION. REMAIN CALM."Provide a 2-second pause.Repeat the message.

(4) Description: EMERGENCY EVACUATIONFive (5) seconds of fast whoop sound are played, followed by the message:"ATTENTION… THIS IS AN EMERGENCY EVACUATION ORDER. REMAIN CALM. FOLLOW THE EMERGENCY OFFICIALS. REMAIN CALM."Provide a 2-second pause.Repeat the message.

(5) Description: GATE CLOSUREFive (5) seconds of fast whoop sound are played, followed by the message:"ATTENTION… THIS IS A GATE CLOSURE ADVISORY. STANDBY FOR A GATE CLOSURE ANNOUNCEMENT."Provide a 2-second pause.



Repeat the message.

(6) Description: BOMB THREATFive (5) seconds of fast whoop sound are played, followed by the message:"ATTENTION… A BOMB THREAT HAS BEEN ISSUED FOR THIS FACILITY. PLEASE EVACUATE. REMAIN CALM."Provide a 2-second pause.Repeat the message.

(7) Description: SHELTER IN PLACEFive (5) seconds of fast whoop sound are played, followed by the message:"ATTENTION… SHELTER IN PLACE, WAIT FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS. REMAIN CALM, LISTEN FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS."Provide a 2-second pause.Repeat the message.

(8) Description: ALL CLEARFive (5) seconds of chime sound are played, followed by the message:"ATTENTION, PLEASE… ATTENTION, PLEASE… AN ALL CLEAR TO THE PREVIOUS ALERT HAS BEEN ISSUED… AN ALL CLEAR TO THE PREVIOUS ALERT HAS BEEN ISSUED."Provide a 2-second pause.Repeat the message.

b. Contractor shall verify the type and number of pre-recorded messages and button colors with the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

c. The LOC shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, redundant controls and system status indicators of/for the system. The unit shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or prerecorded messages. The unit shall be fully supervised from the control panel. The housing shall contain a latch (not lock).

d. Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard expansion module to either expand the number of optional LOC's, or allow a telephone interface.

e. LOC shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, and controls to allow Public Address paging in the facility. The Public Address paging function shall not override any alarm or notification functions and shall be disabled by such signals. The microphone shall be handheld style. All wiring to the LOC shall be supervised in accordance with UFC 4-021-01. Systems that require field modification or are not supervised for multiple LOC's shall not be approved.

f. When an installation has more than one LOC, the LOC's shall be programmed to allow only one LOC to be available for page or messaging at a time. Once one LOC becomes active, all other LOC's will have an indication that the system is busy (Amber Busy Light)and cannot be used at that time. This is to avoid two messages being given at the same time. Also, it must be possible to override or lockout the LOC's from the Master Command Panel (in accordance with NFPA 72.)

2.14.6 Memory

Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all



functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.

2.14.7 Field Programmability

Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract.

2.14.8 Input/Output Modifications

The FMCP shall contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad. Any bypass or modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FMCP.

2.14.9 Resetting

Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists.

2.14.10 Instructions

Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the instructions on the interior of the FACP. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted.

2.14.11 Walk Test

The FACP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.

2.14.12 History Logging

In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory.

2.14.13 Remote LCD Text Display

An LCD text display shall be provided at locations as shown on the drawings. The size shall not exceed 16 inches length by 3 inches deep with a height necessary to meet the requirements of Chapter 24 of NFPA 72). The text display shall as a minimum meet the following requirements:



a. Two lines of information for high priority messaging.

b. Minimum of 20 characters per line (40 total) displayed.

c. Text shall be no less than height requirements in Table 24.4.2.20.14.5 of NFPA 72 and color/contrast requirements of 24.4.2.20 of NFPA 72.

d. 32K character memory.

e. Display shall be wall or ceiling mounted.

f. Mounting brackets for a convenient wall/cubicle mount.

g. During non-emergency periods, display date and time.

h. All programming shall be accomplished from the Mass Notification network. No user programming shall be required.

An LCD text display shall be provided at locations as shown on the drawings. The LCD text display shall spell out the words "EVACUATE" and "ANNOUNCEMENT" and the remainder of the emergency instructions. The design of LCD text display shall be such that it cannot be read when not illuminated.

2.15 REMOTE FIRE ALARM/MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNITS

Provide complete remote control units fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the control units shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel, the unit enclosures shall match exactly. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic for its portion of the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each unit with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.

2.15.1 Cabinet

Install remote control unit components in cabinets large enough to accommodate components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of units as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall be labeled "Remote Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Control Unit" and shall not be less than one inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock (keyed the same as the FMCP), and surface mounting provisions.

2.15.2 Control Modules

Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the remote control unit. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and



relays, if any, on screw terminals in the remote control unit. Circuits shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage. Circuits shall be arranged so that there is 25 percent spare capacity for any circuit.

2.15.3 Silencing Switches

Provide an alarm silencing switch at the remote control unit that shall silence the audible signal and extinguish the visual alarms. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm. Provide trouble and supervisory silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent trouble or supervisory signal. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated.

2.15.4 Non-Interfering

Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually resettable by switch from the remote control unit after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.

2.15.5 Memory

Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.

2.15.6 Field Programmability

Provide control units that are fully field programmable for control, initiating, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract.

2.15.7 Input/Output Modifications

Each remote control unit shall contain features that allow the elimination of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. Any such modifications shall indicate a trouble condition on the remote control unit, the FACP, and a printed output of the trouble condition.

2.15.8 Resetting

Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition on the system still exists.

2.15.9 Instructions

Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the remote fire alarm control unit. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an



operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted.

2.15.10 Walk Test

Each remote control unit shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.

2.15.11 History Logging

In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 1000 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory.

2.16 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS

Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice generators, and other hardware necessary for a complete, operational, textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote FMCP, terminal cabinet, or in the FMCP. Submit data to indicate that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all notification speakers at the maximum rating plus 50 percent spare capacity. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.

2.16.1 Operation

The system shall automatically operate and control all building speakers except those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs. The speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the microphone is used to deliver live messages.

2.16.2 Construction

Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the system.

2.16.3 Inputs

Equip each system with separate inputs for the tone generator, digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone . Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier.

2.16.4 Tone Generator

The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-in type with securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a code 3 temporal tone and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice message, the microphone input, or the alarm



silence mode as specified. The tone generator shall be single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay.

2.16.5 Protection Circuits

Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition that could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier, illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer, and other actions for trouble conditions as specified.

2.17 LCD, LED DISPLAY UNIT (VDU)

a. The VDU shall be the secondary operator-to-system interface for data retrieval, alarm annunciation, commands, and programming functions. The desk mounted VDU shall consist of a LCD monitor and a keyboard. The VDU shall have a 12 inch minimum screen, capable of displaying 25 lines of 80 characters each. Communications with the FACP shall be supervised. Faults shall be recorded on the printer. Power required shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz from the same source as the fire alarm control panel.

b. To eliminate confusion during an alarm situation, the screen shall have dedicated areas for the following functions:

(1) Alarm and returns to normal

(2) Commands, reports, and programming

(3) Time, day, and date

c. Use Full English language throughout to describe system activity and instructions. Full English language descriptors defining system points shall be 100 percent field programmable by factory trained personnel, alterable and user definable to accurately describe building areas.

d. Alarms and other changes of status shall be displayed in the screen area reserved for this information. Upon receipt of alarm, an audible alarm shall sound and the condition and point type shall flash until acknowledged by the operator. Returns to normal shall also be annunciated and shall require operator acknowledgment. The following information shall be provided in English:

(1) Condition of device (alarm, trouble, or supervisory).

(2) Type of device (manual pull, waterflow, etc.)

(3) Location of device plus numerical system address.

e. The system shall have multiple levels of priority for displaying alarms to conform with UL 864. Priority levels shall be as follows:

(1) Level 1 - Mass Notification

(2) Level 2 - Fire Alarms



(3) Level 3 - Supervisory Alarms

(4) Level 4 - Trouble Signals

f. Provide the system with memory so that no alarm is lost. A highlighted message shall advise the operator when unacknowledged alarms are in the system.

g. Multiple levels of access shall be provided for operators and supervisors via user-defined passwords. Provide the following functions for each level:

(1) Operator level access functions:

(a) Display system directory, definable by device.

(b) Display status of an individual device.

(c) Manual command (alarm device with an associated command shall use the same system address for both functions).

(d) Report generation, definable by device, output on either the VDU or printer, as desired by the operator.

(e) Activate building notification appliances.

(2) Supervisory level access functions:

(a) Reset time and date.

(b) Enable or disable event initiated programs, printouts, and initiators.

(c) Enable or disable individual devices and system components.

h. The above supervisory level functions shall not require computer programming skills. Changes to system programs shall be recorded on the printer and maintained in the control panel as a trouble condition.

2.18 ANNUNCIATOR

2.18.1 Annunciator Panel

Provide an annunciator that includes an LCD display. The display shall indicate the device in trouble/alarm or any supervisory device. Display the device name, address, and actual building location.

A building floor plan shall be provided mounted (behind plexiglass or similar protective material) at the annunciator location. The floor plan shall indicate all rooms by name and number including the locations of stairs and elevators. The floor plan shall show all devices and their programmed address to facilitate their physical location from the LCD display information.

2.18.2 Programming

Where programming for the operation of the annunciator is accomplished by a separate software program than the software for the FMCP, the software



program shall not require reprogramming after loss of power. The software shall be reprogrammable in the field.

2.19 MANUAL STATIONS

Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double action, addressable manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in fire-engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset the station. Manual stations shall be mounted at 42 inches. Stations shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor.

2.20 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

2.20.1 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers

Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464. Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Surface mounted audible appliances shall be painted white. Recessed audible appliances shall be installed with a grill that is painted white.

a. Speakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and operate with audio line input levels of 70.7 VRMs and 25 VRMs, by means of selectable tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, and 2 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of 150 Hz to 10,000 Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction. Speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 4 inch square electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single wall mounted unit. All inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring via the FMCP.

b. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of 16 gauge or molded high impact plastic and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation. Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.

c. Speakers shall utilize screw terminals for termination of all field wiring.

2.20.2 Visual Notification Appliances

Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1971 and conform to the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA). Colored lens, such as amber, shall comply with UL 1638. The manufacturer shall have the color lens tested to the full UL 1971 polar plotting criteria, voltage drop, and temperature rise as stated in 1971. Fire Alarm Notification Appliances shall have clear high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and be marked "Fire" in red letters.Mass Notification Appliances shall have clear high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and output white light and be marked "ALERT" in red letters. The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe



and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 75 candela (actual output after derating for tinted lens) based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be surface or semi-flush mounted. Where more than two appliances are located in the same room or corridor or field of view, provide synchronized operation. Devices shall use screw terminals for all field wiring.

2.20.3 Foam Discharge Visual Notification Appliances

Provide blue visual alarm strobes within the aircraft servicing area to indicate foam system activation (foam discharge). Mount signals at height indicated on plans and located to be visible from all parts of the aircraft maintenance and servicing area. Provide space between the co-located clear fire alarm and amber mass notification strobe locations and the blue foam discharge strobe locations, as shown on the drawings, to provide unambiguous indication to the occupants as to which visual notification appliance is activated. Blue strobes shall be part of the Foam System as described in Section 21 13 25.00 HIGH EXPANSION FOAM (HI-EX) FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM and connected to the Foam System Control Panels (FSCP).

The same salient requirements as listed above for Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Visual Notification Appliances shall apply to Foam Discharge Notification Appliances, except Foam Discharge Notification Appliances shall have blue high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and be marked "FOAM" in blue letters. The words "FIRE" and "ALERT" shall not appear on foam discharge notification devices.

Coordinate with requirements of Section 21 13 25.00 HIGH EXPANSION FOAM (HI-EX) FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM.

2.21 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS

Environmental enclosures shall be provided to permit Fire Alarm or Mass Notification components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental limits of the listing. The enclosure shall be listed for the device or appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible accessory for the UL category that the component is currently listed. Guards required to deter mechanical damage shall be either a listed manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating device or notification appliance.

2.22 INTERFACE TO THE BASE WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK

2.22.1 Radio

The radio transceiver shall be bi-direction and meet all the requirements of paragraph, RADIO TRANSMITTER AND INTERFACE PANELS as specified in this Specification Section. The transceiver utilized in the Mass Notification System shall be capable of the following:

a. Communication with the Central Control/Monitoring System to provide supervision of communication link and status changes are reported by automatic and manual poll/reply/acknowledge routines.

b. All monitored points/status changes are transmitted immediately and at programmed intervals until acknowledged by the Central Control/Monitoring System.

c. Each transceiver shall transmits a unique identity code as part of all



messages; the code is set by the user at the transceiver.

2.22.1.1 Radio Frequency Communications

Use of radio frequency-type communications systems shall comply with National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA) requirements.

2.22.1.2 Licensed Radio Frequency Systems

An approved DD Form 1494 for the system is required prior to operation.

2.23 AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS

2.23.1 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels

Transmitters shall be compatible with proprietary supervising station receiving equipment. Each radio alarm transmitter shall be the manufacturer's recognized commercial product, completely assembled, wired, factory tested, and delivered ready for installation and operation. Transmitters shall be provided in accordance with applicable portions of NFPA 72, Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 90 and Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 15. Transmitter electronics module shall be contained within the physical housing as an integral, removable assembly. The proprietary supervising station receiving equipment is Monaco BT-X and the transceiver shall be fully compatible with this equipment. At the contractors option, and if UL or FM listed, the transmitter may be housed in the same panel as the fire alarm control panel. The transmitter shall be Narrowband radio, with FCC certification for narrowband operation and meets the requirements of the NTIA (National Telecommunications and Information Administration) Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal Frequency Management.

2.23.1.1 Operation

Operate each transmitter from 120-volt ac power. In the event of 120-volt ac power loss, the transmitter shall automatically switch to battery operation. Switchover shall be accomplished with no interruption of protective service, and shall automatically transmit a trouble message. Upon restoration of ac power, transfer back to normal ac power supply shall also be automatic.

2.23.1.2 Battery Power

Transmitter standby battery capacity shall provide sufficient power to operate the transmitter in a normal standby status for a minimum of 72 hours and be capable of transmitting alarms during that period.

2.23.1.3 Transmitter Housing

Use NEMA Type 1 for housing. The housing shall contain a lock that is keyed identical to the fire alarm system for the building. Radio alarm transmitter housing shall be factory painted with a suitable priming coat and not less than two coats of a hard, durable weatherproof enamel.

2.23.1.4 Antenna

Antenna shall be omnidirectional, coaxial, halfwave dipole antennas for radio alarm transmitters with a driving point impedance to match



transmitter output. The antenna and antenna mounts shall be corrosion resistant and designed to withstand wind velocities of 100 mph. Do not mount antennas to any portion of the building roofing system. Protect the antenna from physical damage.

2.23.2 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT)

Provide DACT that is compatible with the existing supervising station fire alarm system. Transmitter shall have a means to transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions via a single transmitter. Transmitter shall have a source of power for operation that conforms to NFPA 72. Transmitter shall be capable of initiating a test signal daily at any selected time. Transmitter shall be arranged to seize telephone circuits in accordance with NFPA 72.

2.23.3 Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station

The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station:

a. Sprinkler water flow

b. Manual pull stations

c. Smoke detectors

d. Duct smoke detectors

e. Heat detectors

f. Fire Extinguishing System

g. Sprinkler valve supervision

h. Water supply level and temperature

2.24 WIRING

Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications specified herein. NFPA 70 accepted fire alarm cables that do not require the use of raceways except as modified herein are permitted.

2.24.1 Alarm Wiring

The SLC wiring shall be fiber optic or solid copper cable in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be No. 16 AWG size twisted and shielded solid conductors at a minimum. Visual notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm appliances, shall be solid copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits shall be copper No. 16 AWG size twisted and shielded conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltages for the sensors and/or appliances. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation. Acceptable power-limited cables are FPL, FPLR or FPLP as appropriate with red colored covering. Nonpower-limited cables shall comply with NFPA 70.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES AND NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

3.1.1 FMCP

Locate the FMCP where indicated on the drawings. Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is lower. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FMCP.

3.1.2 Manual Stations:

Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated on the drawings. Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4 feet above the finished floor. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally.

3.1.3 Notification Appliance Devices

Locate notification appliance devices as required by NFPA 72. Mount assemblies on walls as required by NFPA 72 and to meet the intelligibility requirements. Ceiling mounted speakers shall conform to NFPA 72.

3.1.4 Smoke and Heat Sensors

Locate sensors as required by NFPA 72 and their listings on a 4 inch mounting box. Locate smoke and heat sensors on the ceiling. Install heat sensors not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Heat sensors located on the wall shall have the top of the sensor at least 4 inches below the ceiling, but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling. Smoke sensors are permitted to be on the wall no lower than 12 inches from the ceiling with no minimum distance from the ceiling. In raised floor spaces, install the smoke sensors to protect 225 square feet per sensor. Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling supply outlets.

3.1.5 Annunciator

Locate the annunciator as shown on the drawings. Surface mount the panel, with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or center the panel at 5 feet, whichever is lower.

3.1.6 Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches

Connect to water flow detectors and tamper switches.

3.1.7 Firefighter Telephones

Locate wall mounted in each stair at each floor landing, in each elevator lobby, and in each elevator cab 4 feet above the finished floor.

3.1.8 Local Operating Console (LOC)

Locate the LOC as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated. Mount the console



so that the top message button is no higher than 44 inches above the floor.

3.2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING

3.2.1 Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes

Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box shall be connected to screw-type terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. The use of wire nuts or similar devices is prohibited. Conform wiring to NFPA 70.

Indicate the following in the wiring diagrams.

a. Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show connections from field devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals.

b. Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment.

3.2.2 Terminal Cabinets

Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor at each riser, and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size shall be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet. Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches. Only screw-type terminals are permitted.

3.2.3 Alarm Wiring

Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. Provide all wiring in electrical metallic conduit. Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in initiating device or notification appliance circuits. Run conduit or tubing (rigid, IMC, EMT, FMC, etc. as permitted by NFPA 72 and NFPA 70) concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise.

3.2.4 Conductor Terminations

Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FMCP, and remote FMCP and the LOC shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FMCP, and remote FMCP shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing



color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.

3.3 DISCONNECTION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING SYSTEM

Maintain existing fire alarm equipment fully operational until the new equipment has been tested and accepted by the Contracting Officer. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until the new equipment is accepted. Once the new system is completed, tested, and accepted by the Government, it shall be placed in service and connected to the station fire alarm system. Remove tags from new equipment and tag the existing equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

a. After acceptance of the new system by the Contracting Officer, remove existing equipment not connected to the new system, remove unused exposed conduit, and restore damaged surfaces. Remove the material from the site and dispose.

b. Disconnect and remove the existing fire alarm and smoke detection systems where indicated and elsewhere in the specification.

c. Control panels and fire alarm devices and appliances disconnected and removed shall be turned over to the Contracting Officer.

d. Properly dispose of fire alarm outlet and junction boxes, wiring, conduit, supports, and other such items.

3.4 CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM

The following new system connections shall be made during the last phase of construction, at the beginning of the preliminary tests. New system connections shall include:

a. Connection of new control modules to existing magnetically held smoke door (hold-open) devices.

b. Connection of new elevator recall smoke sensors to existing wiring and conduit.

c. Connection of new system transmitter to existing base fire reporting system.

Once these connections are made, system shall be left energized and new audio/visual devices deactivated. Report immediately to the Contracting Officer, coordination and field problems resulting from the connection of the above components.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs, fire rated walls, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls, and vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.6 PAINTING

Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm conduit, and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas. Paint junction boxes red in unfinished areas and conduits and surface metal raceways shall be painted with a 1-inch wide red band every 10 feet in unfinished areas.. Painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.




3.7.1 Testing Procedures

Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed by representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, Guard's Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data; similar to the forma in NFPA 72) and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the acceptance testing. The test data forms shall record the test results and shall:

a. Identify the NFPA Class of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Voice Notification System Circuits (NAC Audio), and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

b. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component, and describe how this test shall be performed.

c. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test location, and alphanumeric identity.

d. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equipment necessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke).

e. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.

3.7.2 Tests Stages

3.7.2.1 Preliminary Testing

Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests." After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that panel functions were tested and operated properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments.



3.7.2.2 Request for Formal Inspection and Tests

When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed, dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR).

3.7.2.3 Final Testing

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the following are provided at the job site:

a. The systems manufacturer's technical representative

b. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed

c. Megger test results

d. Loop resistance test results

e. Complete program printout including input/output addresses

The final tests will be witnessed by the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR). At this time, any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion.

3.7.2.4 System Acceptance

Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance. Submit six sets of detailed as-built drawings. The drawings shall show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system. At least one set of as-built (marked-up) drawings shall be provided at the time of, or prior to the final acceptance test.

a. Furnish one set of full size paper as-built drawings and schematics. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized mylar sheets not less than 30 by 42 inches with 8 by 4 inch title block similar to contract drawings. Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCAD and DXF format of as-built drawings and schematics.

b. Include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment, both factory and field wired.

c. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of devices and equipment.

3.7.3 Minimum System Tests

Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows:



a. Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making any connections to panels or devices, wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC. Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

b. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

c. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test.

d. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's O&M manual.

e. Test each initiating device and notification appliance and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 except that, for item 12(e) (Supervision) in Table 14.4.2.2, disconnect at least 20 percent of devices. If there is a failure at these devices, then supervision shall be tested at each device.

f. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual.

g. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified.

h. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified.

i. Visually inspect wiring.

j. Test the battery charger and batteries.

k. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.

l. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.

m. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits.

n. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive.

o. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke or the use of canned



smoke which is permitted.

p. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each notification appliance circuit.

3.7.3.1 Intelligibility Tests

Intelligibility testing of the System shall be accomplished in accordance with NFPA 72 for Voice Evacuation Systems, IEC 60268-16, and ASA S3.2. Following are the specific requirements for intelligibility tests:

a. Intelligibility Requirements: Verify intelligibility by measurement after installation.

b. Ensure that a CIS value greater than the required minimum value is provided in each area where building occupants typically could be found. The minimum required value for CIS is .8.

c. Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces (such as metal or concrete) that are found to cause excessive sound reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required value if approved by the DOD installation, and if building occupants in these areas can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 33 feet to find a location with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.

d. Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally present are permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required value if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 50 feet to a location with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.

e. Take measurements near the head level applicable for most personnel in the space under normal conditions (e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping, as appropriate).

f. The distance the occupant must walk to the location meeting the minimum required CIS value shall be measured on the floor or other walking surface as follows:

(1) Along the centerline of the natural path of travel, starting from any point subject to occupancy with less than the minimum required CIS value.

(2) Curving around any corners or obstructions, with a 12 inches clearance there from.

(3) Terminating directly below the location where the minimum required CIS value has been obtained.

Use commercially available test instrumentation to measure intelligibility as specified by ISO 7240-19 and ISO 7240-16 as applicable. Use the mean value of at least three readings to compute the intelligibility score at each test location.



3.8 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES

3.8.1 Instructor

Include in the project the services of an instructor, who has received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm and fire detection system. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work. Submit the instructors information and qualifications including the training history.

3.8.2 Required Instruction Time

Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses.

3.8.2.1 Technical Training

Equipment manufacturer or a factory representative shall provide 1 days of on site Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. Factory training shall occur within 6 months of system acceptance.

3.9 Technical Data and Computer Software

Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system.

3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS

Submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed and in booklet form. The Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be a single volume or in separate volumes, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Manuals shall be approved prior to training. The Interior Fire Alarm And Mass Notification System Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

a. "Manufacturer Data Package 5" as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

b. Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.



c. Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed.

d. The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements.

e. Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized.

f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.

g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for additional comments or reference. All data (devices, testing frequencies, etc.) shall comply with UFC 3-601-02.

3.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

3.11.1 Repair Service/Replacement Parts

Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer. During guarantee period, the service technician shall be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs shall be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site.

3.11.2 Interchangeable Parts

Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the final acceptance testing.

3.11.3 Spare Parts

Furnish the following spare parts and accessories:

a. Four fuses for each fused circuit

b. Two of each type of notification appliance in the system (e.g. speaker, FA strobe, MNS strobe, etc.)

c. Two of each type of initiating device included in the system (e.g. smoke detector, thermal detector, manual station, etc.)

3.11.4 Special Tools

Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer.



· project table of contents - 1 specifications for construction of 4th id cab uas hangar pn 81357...

Documents